Volvo 2015 XC70 Owner's Manual Owners V1

Owners Manual Pdf 2015-Volvo-XC70-Owners-Manual-v1 2015 Volvo XC70 Owners Manual Pdf | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

User Manual: Volvo 2015 XC70 Owner's Manual 2015 Volvo XC70 Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 408

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

WEB EDITION

OWNER'S MANUAL

WELCOME TO THE WORLD-WIDE FAMILY OF VOLVO OWNERS.
We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe
driving in your Volvo, an automobile designed
with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage you to familiarize yourself with the equipment
descriptions and operating instructions in this
manual.
We also urge you and your passengers to wear
seat belts at all times in this (or any other) vehicle.
And, of course, please do not operate a vehicle if
you may be affected by alcohol, medication or

any impairment that could hinder your ability to
drive.
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and emission standards. If you have
any questions regarding your vehicle, please contact your Volvo retailer or see the section "Contacting Volvo" in this manual's "Introduction"
chapter for information on getting in touch with
Volvo in the United States and Canada.

Contents

00 Introduction

01 Safety

Important information................................. 6
Environment.............................................. 12
Important warnings................................... 13

Occupant safety........................................
Reporting safety defects...........................
Seat belts .................................................
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....
Occupant Weight Sensor .........................
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags .....
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ...............................
Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS.....
Crash mode..............................................
Child safety...............................................
Child restraint systems.............................
Infant seats...............................................
Convertible seats......................................
Booster cushions......................................
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors..................
Top tether anchors....................................
Integrated booster cushion*......................
Child safety locks......................................

02 Locks and alarm
16
17
18
21
26
30
32
33
35
37
40
42
44
47
48
50
51
54

Remote key and key blade.......................
Private locking .........................................
Keyless drive.............................................
Locks........................................................
Alarm.........................................................

00 01 02
2

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

58
67
68
71
74

Contents

03 Your driving environment

04 Driver support

Instruments and controls.......................... 78
Ignition modes.......................................... 88
Seats......................................................... 90
Steering wheel.......................................... 97
Lighting..................................................... 99
Wipers and washers............................... 107
Windows................................................. 110
Mirrors..................................................... 112
Digial compass*...................................... 115
Power moonroof* ................................... 117

Stability system.......................................
Road sign information (RSI)* ..................
Cruise control..........................................
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*..............
Distance Alert* .......................................
City Safety™ ..........................................
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake*......................................
Driver Alert System* ...............................
Park assist*.............................................
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* ............
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*...

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
152
154
156
158
169
172

Volvo Sensus..........................................
Menus and messages.............................
The MY CAR menus...............................
Climate system.......................................
Trip computer.........................................
Active chassis system–Four C*...............
Passenger compartment convenience...

03 04 05

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*....
Starting the engine..................................
Transmission...........................................
Eco Guide* and Power Meter*................
Eco* ........................................................
Start/Stop* .............................................
Brakes.....................................................
Parking brake..........................................
Hill Descent Control (HDC)*....................

119
122
127
132
134
137
141
144
147

178
188
193
197
200

206
207
209
215
225
232
233

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Contents

06 Infotainment
Introduction.............................................
Radio.......................................................
Media player...........................................
AUX/USB sockets...................................

07 During your trip
240
250
259
264

Driving recommendations.......................
Refueling.................................................
Loading...................................................
Cargo area .............................................
Towing a trailer.......................................
Emergency towing..................................

08 Wheels and tires
284
288
293
299
303
306

General information ...............................
Tire inflation.............................................
Inflation pressure ...................................
Tire designations ....................................
Glossary of tire terminology ...................
Vehicle loading .......................................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires .
Temporary Spare ...................................
Tire Sealing System*...............................
Changing a wheel ..................................
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

310
313
316
317
319
320
322
323
324
325
331
334

06 07 08

Bluetooth® media ................................... 267

Bluetooth® hands-free connection ........ 269
Cell phone voice control*........................ 278

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Contents

09 Maintenance and
specifications
Volvo maintenance..................................
Maintaining your car...............................
Hood and engine compartment..............
Engine oil................................................
Fluids......................................................
Replacing bulbs......................................
Wiper blades and washer fluid................
Battery.....................................................
Fuses......................................................
Vehicle care.............................................

10 Specifications
340
341
344
346
348
350
356
359
363
374

Label information....................................
Specifications.........................................
Overview of information and warning
symbols...................................................
Volvo programs.......................................

11 Index
382
384

Index....................................................... 396

391
394

09 10 11
5

Introduction
Important information
Contacting Volvo

About this manual

In the USA:

•

Before you operate your vehicle for the
first time, please familiarize yourself with
the information found in the chapters
"Your Driving Environment" and "During
Your Trip."

•

Information contained in the balance of
the manual is extremely useful and should
be read after operating the vehicle for the
first time.

•

The manual is structured so that it can be
used for reference. For this reason, it
should be kept in the vehicle for ready
access.

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive,
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.com/us
In Canada:
Volvo Cars of Canada
National Customer Service
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocars.com/ca

There are various types of decals in the vehicle whose purpose is to provide important
information in a clear and concise way. The
importance of these decals is explained as
follows, in descending order of importance.

Risk of injury

Footnotes
Certain pages of this manual contain information in the form of footnotes at the bottom of
the page. This information supplements the
text that the footnote number refers to (a letter is used if the footnote refers to text in a
table).

Display texts
There are several displays in the driver’s field
of vision that show messages generated by
various systems and functions in the vehicle.
These texts are indicated in the Owner’s
Manual by being in slightly larger type than
the surrounding text and are printed in gray,
(for example: Change doors unlock
setting).

Decals

G031590

Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning background, white text/image on a black background. Decals of this type are used to indicate potential danger. Ignoring a warning of
this type could result in serious injury or
death.

Introduction
Important information
Risk of damage to the vehicle

Information

Types of lists used in the manual
Procedures
Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or
actions that must be carried out in a certain
order, are arranged in numbered lists in this
manual.

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a
black or blue warning background and space
for a message. If the information on decals of
this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle
could result.

G031593

G031592

If there is a series of illustrations associated with step-by-step instructions, each
step in the procedure is numbered in the
same way as the corresponding illustration.

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a
black background. These decals provide general information.

NOTE
The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual
are examples only and are not intended to
be reproductions of the decals actually
used in the vehicle. The purpose is to give
an indication of how they look and their
approximate location in the vehicle. The
applicable information for your particular
vehicle can be found on the respective
decals in the vehicle.

Lists in which letters are used can be
found with series of illustrations in cases
where the order in which the instructions
are carried out is not important.
Arrows with or without numbers are used
to indicate the direction of a movement.
Arrows containing letters are used to indicate movement.
If there are no illustrations associated with a
step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure
are indicated by ordinary numbers.

Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used
in general overview illustrations in which
certain components are pointed out. The
corresponding number is also used in the
position list's description of the various
components.

Introduction
Important information
Bullet lists
Bullets are used to differentiate a number of
components/functions/points of information
that can be listed in random order.

NOTE

•

For example:

•
•

Coolant
Engine oil

Continued
} }This symbol can be found at the lower

right corner of an odd-numbered (right-hand)
page to indicate that the current topic is continued on the following page.

Options and accessories
Optional or accessory equipment described
in this manual is indicated by an asterisk.
Optional or accessory equipment may not be
available in all countries or markets. Please
note that some vehicles may be equipped differently, depending on special legal requirements.
Contact your Volvo retailer for additional
information.

All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this owner's
information are based on the latest
product information available at the
time of publication.

•

Volvo reserves the right to make model
changes at any time, or to change
specifications or design without notice
and without incurring obligation.

•

Do not export your Volvo to another
country before investigating that country's applicable safety and emission
control requirements. In some cases it
may be difficult or impossible to comply with these requirements. Modifications to the emission control system(s)
may render your Volvo not certifiable
for legal operation in the U.S., Canada
and other countries.

WARNING
If your vehicle is involved in an accident,
unseen damage may affect its drivability
and safety.

WARNING
CALIFORNIA proposition 65
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer, and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer, and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.

WARNING
Certain components of this vehicle such as
air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners,
adaptive steering columns, and button cell
batteries may contain Perchlorate material.
Special handling may apply for service or
vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.

Introduction
Important information
these requirements. Modifications to the
emission control system(s) may render
your Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in the U.S., Canada and other countries.

Shiftlock
When your vehicle is parked, the gear selector is locked in the P (Park) position. To
release the selector from this position, the
ignition must be in mode II (see page 88) or
the engine must be running. Depress the
brake pedal, press the button on the front
side of the gear selector and move the selector from P (Park).

•

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS system performs a brief self-diagnostic test when the engine has been started
and driver releases the brake pedal. Another
automatic test may be performed when the
vehicle first reaches a speed of approximately
6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate
several times and a sound may be audible
from the ABS control module. This is normal.

Fuel filler door
Press the button on the light switch panel
(see the illustration on page 290) when the
vehicle is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler
door. It will relock when closed and there will
be an audible click.

Points to keep in mind

•

Do not export your Volvo to another
country before investigating that country's applicable safety and exhaust emission requirements. In some cases it may
be difficult or impossible to comply with

All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based
on the latest product information available at the time of publication. Please note
that some vehicles may be equipped differently, depending on special legal
requirements. Optional equipment described in this manual may not be available in
all markets.

•

Some of the illustrations shown are
generic and may not depict the exact
model for which this manual is intended.

•

Volvo reserves the right to make model
changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and
without incurring obligation.

Crash event data
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys-

tems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:

•

How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;

•

Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;

•

How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,

•

How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to

Introduction
Important information
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Furthermore, your vehicle is equipped with a
number of computers whose task is to continuously control and monitor the vehicle’s
operation. They can also register information
during normal driving conditions if they detect
a fault relating to the vehicle’s operation and
functionality. Some of the stored information
is required by technicians when carrying out
service and maintenance to enable them to
diagnose and rectify any faults that have
occurred in the vehicle and to enable Volvo to
fulfill legal and other regulatory requirements.
This information may be stored in the vehicle’s computers for a certain period of time.
Volvo will not contribute to spreading the
above-mentioned information to third parties
without the consent of the vehicle’s owner.
However, due to national legal requirements
and regulations, Volvo may be compelled to
provide information of this type to authorities
such as law enforcement agencies or others
who may assert a legal right to obtain such
information.
Volvo and service and repair facilities with
agreements with Volvo have access to the
special technical equipment required in order

to read and interpret the information stored
by the vehicle’s computers. Volvo is responsible for ensuring that the information transmitted to Volvo during service and maintenance
is stored and handled in a secure manner and
that this handling is done in accordance with
applicable legal requirements. For additional
information, contact:
For additional information, contact:
In the United States
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive, P.O. box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.com/us
In Canada
Volvo Cars of Canada
National Customer Service
9130 Leslie Street
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocars.com/ca

Volvo Structural Parts Statement
Volvo has always been and continues to be a
leader in automotive safety. Volvo engineers
and manufactures vehicles designed to help
protect vehicle occupants in the event of a
collision.
Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of
a collision. This energy absorption system
including, but not limited to, structural components such as bumper reinforcement bars,
bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails,
fender aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body
panels must work together to maintain cabin
integrity and protect the vehicle occupants.
The supplemental restraint system including
but not limited to air bags, side curtain air
bags, and deployment sensors work together
with the above components to provide proper
timing for air bag deployment.
Due to the above, Volvo Cars of North America does not support the use of aftermarket,
alternative or anything other than original
Volvo parts for collision repair.
In addition Volvo does not support the use or
re-use of structural components from an
existing vehicle that has been previously
damaged. Although these parts may appear
equivalent, it is difficult to tell if the parts have
been previously replaced with non-OE parts
or if the part has been damaged as a result of

Introduction
Important information
a prior collision. The quality of these used
parts may also have been affected due to
environmental exposure.

Information on the Internet
Additional information about your vehicle is
available at www.volvocars.com.
In order to read a QR code, a QR reader is
necessary, which is available as an app for a
number of different cell phones and can be
downloaded from the App Store or Google
Play.

disclaimers and notices. The links how to
access the exact terms of GPLv2, GPLv3,
LGPLv3, and the other open source software
licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and
notices are provided to you below. Please
refer to the exact terms of the relevant
License, regarding your rights under said
licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers
to provide the source code of said free/open
source software to you for a charge covering
the cost of performing such distribution, such
as the cost of media, shipping and handling,
upon written request. Please contact your
nearest Volvo retailer.
This offer is valid for a period of at least three
(3) years from the date of the distribution of
this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC
offers spare parts or customer support.

QR code

Open Source Software Notice
This product uses certain free / open source
and other software originating from third
parties, that is subject to the GNU General
Public License version 2 and 3 (GPLv2/
GPLv3), GNU Lesser General Public License
version 3 (LGPLv3), The FreeType Project
License (“FreeType License”) and other
different and/or additional copyright licenses,

Portions of this product uses software
copyrighted © v2.4.3/2010 The
FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rights
reserved.

GPL v2 : http://www.gnu.org/licenses/oldlicenses/gpl-2.0.html

•
•
•

Linux kernel (merge between MontaVista
2.6.31 kernel and kernel from
L2.6.31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP)
uBoot (based on v2009.08)
busybox (based on version 1.13.2.)

GCC runtime library exception: http://
www.gnu.org/licenses/gcc-exception.html

•

libgcc_s.so.1

LGPL v3: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/
lgpl.html

•

Libc.so.6, libpthread.so.0, Librt.so.1

The FreeType Project License: http://
www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT

•

libfreetype.so.6 (version 2.4.3)

This product includes software under
following licenses:

Introduction
Environment
Volvo and the environment
Volvo is committed to the well being of its
customers. As a natural part of this commitment, we care about the environment in
which we all live. Caring for the environment
means an everyday involvement in reducing
our environmental impact. Volvo's environmental activities are based on a holistic view,
which means we consider the overall environmental impact of a product throughout its
complete life cycle. In this context, design,
production, product use, and recycling are all
important considerations. In production,
Volvo has partly or completely phased out
several chemicals including CFCs, lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and reduced
the number of chemicals used in our
plants 50% since 1991.
Volvo was the first in the world to introduce
into production a three-way catalytic converter with a Lambda sond, now called the
heated oxygen sensor, in 1976. The current
version of this highly efficient system reduces
emissions of harmful substances (CO, HC,
NOx) from the exhaust pipe by approximately
95 – 99% and the search to eliminate the
remaining emissions continues. Volvo is the
only automobile manufacturer to offer CFCfree retrofit kits for the air conditioning system
of all models as far back as the 1975
model 240. Advanced electronic engine con-

trols and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer
to our goal. In addition to continuous environmental refinement of conventional gasolinepowered internal combustion engines, Volvo
is actively looking at advanced technology
alternative-fuel vehicles.
When you drive a Volvo, you become our
partner in the work to lessen the car's impact
on the environment. To reduce your vehicle's
environmental impact, you can:

•

Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.
Tests have shown decreased fuel economy with improperly inflated tires.

•

Follow the recommended maintenance
schedule in your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet.

•

Drive at a constant speed whenever possible.

•

See a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician as soon as possible for
inspection if the check engine (malfunction indicator) light illuminates, or stays
on after the vehicle has started.

•

Properly dispose of any vehicle-related
waste such as used motor oil, used batteries, brake pads, etc.

•

When cleaning your vehicle, please use
genuine Volvo car care products. All
Volvo car care products are formulated to
be environmentally friendly.

FSC®

The FSC® (Forest Stewardship Council®)
symbol indicates that the wood pulp used in
this publication comes from FSC® certified
forests and other responsible sources.

Introduction
Important warnings
Driver distraction
A driver has a responsibility to do everything
possible to ensure his or her own safety and
the safety of passengers in the vehicle and
others sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions is part of that responsibility.
Driver distraction results from driver activities
that are not directly related to controlling the
vehicle in the driving environment. Your new
Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many feature-rich entertainment and communication
systems. These include hands-free cellular
telephones, navigation systems, and multipurpose audio systems. You may also own
other portable electronic devices for your own
convenience. When used properly and safely,
they enrich the driving experience. Improperly
used, any of these could cause a distraction.
For all of these systems, we want to provide
the following warning that reflects the strong
Volvo concern for your safety. Never use
these devices or any feature of your vehicle in
a way that distracts you from the task of driving safely. Distraction can lead to a serious
accident. In addition to this general warning,
we offer the following guidance regarding
specific newer features that may be found in
your vehicle:

•

Never use a hand-held cellular telephone
while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit

cellular telephone use by a driver while
the vehicle is moving.

•

If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, set and make changes to
your travel itinerary only with the vehicle
parked.

•

Never program your audio system while
the vehicle is moving. Program radio presets with the vehicle parked, and use
your programmed presets to make radio
use quicker and simpler.

•

Never use portable computers or personal digital assistants while the vehicle is
moving.

Accessory installation

•

We strongly recommend that Volvo owners install only genuine, Volvo-approved
accessories, and that accessory installations be performed only by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.

•

Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to
ensure compatibility with the performance, safety, and emission systems in
your vehicle. Additionally, a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician knows
where accessories may and may not be
safely installed in your Volvo. In all cases,
please consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician before installing
any accessory in or on your vehicle.

•

Accessories that have not been approved
by Volvo may or may not be specifically
tested for compatibility with your vehicle.
Additionally, an inexperienced installer
may not be familiar with some of your
car's systems.

•

Any of your car's performance and safety
systems could be adversely affected if
you install accessories that Volvo has not
tested, or if you allow accessories to be
installed by someone unfamiliar with your
vehicle.

•

Damage caused by unapproved or
improperly installed accessories may not
be covered by your new vehicle warranty.
See your Warranty and Service Records
Information booklet for more warranty
information. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that
may result from the installation of nongenuine accessories.

Occupant safety......................................................................................
Reporting safety defects.........................................................................
Seat belts ...............................................................................................
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ...................................................
Occupant Weight Sensor .......................................................................
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ...................................................
Inflatable Curtain (IC) .............................................................................
Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS...................................................
Crash mode............................................................................................
Child safety.............................................................................................
Child restraint systems...........................................................................
Infant seats..............................................................................................
Convertible seats....................................................................................
Booster cushions....................................................................................
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors.................................................................
Top tether anchors..................................................................................
Integrated booster cushion*....................................................................
Child safety locks....................................................................................

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

16
17
18
21
26
30
32
33
35
37
40
42
44
47
48
50
51
54

SAFETY

01 Safety
Occupant safety

Volvo's concern for safety
Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concern
dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled
off the production line. Three-point seat belts
(a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energyabsorbing impact zones were designed into
Volvo vehicles long before it was fashionable
or required by government regulation.
We will not compromise our commitment to
safety. We continue to seek out new safety
features and to refine those already in our
vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate
hearing your suggestions about improving
automobile safety. We also want to know if
you ever have a safety concern with your
vehicle. Call us in the U.S. at:
1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at:
1-800-663-8255.

Never drink and drive.

Volvo customers in Canada

If you are taking any medication, consult
your physician about its potential effects
on your driving abilities.

For any questions regarding open recalls for
your vehicle, please contact your authorized
Volvo retailer. If your retailer is unable to
answer your questions, please contact Volvo
Customer Relations at 905 695-9626, Monday through Friday, 8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M.
EST or by e-mail at vclcust@volvocars.com.
You may also write us at:

•
•
•

Take a driver-retraining course.

•

Replace wiper blades when they start to
leave streaks.

Volvo Cars of Canada

•

Take into account the traffic, road, and
weather conditions, particularly with
regard to stopping distance.

9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101

•
•

Never send text messages while driving.

Have your eyes checked regularly.
Keep your windshield and headlights
clean.

Refrain from using or minimize the use of
a cell phone while driving.

Occupant safety reminders

Recall information

How safely you drive doesn't depend on how
old you are but rather on:

Information regarding recalls or other service
campaigns is available on our website at
www.volvocars.com/us/. Select the tab
YOUR VOLVO and the heading RECALL
INFORMATION will be displayed at the lower
left side of the screen. Enter your Vehicle
Identification Number for your vehicle (found
at the base of the windshield). If your vehicle
has any open Recalls, they will be displayed
on this page.

•
•
•

How well you see.
Your ability to concentrate.
How quickly you make decisions under
stress to avoid an accident.

The following suggestions are intended to
help you cope with the ever changing traffic
environment.

•
•

National Customer Service
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

01 Safety
Reporting safety defects
Reporting safety defects in the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying Volvo Cars of North
America, LLC. If NHTSA receives
similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
retailer, or Volvo Cars of North
America, LLC. To contact NHTSA,
you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from:
http://www.safercar.gov
Volvo strongly recommends that if
your vehicle is covered under a
service campaign, safety or emission recall or similar action, it should
be completed as soon as possible.
Please check with your local retailer
or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
if your vehicle is covered under
these conditions.

Reporting safety defects in Canada
If you believe your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying Volvo
Cars of Canada Corp.
Transport Canada can be contacted at:
1-800-333-0510
Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500
Fax: 1-819-994-3372
Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road
Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z
0A1

NHTSA can be reached at:
Internet:
http://www.nhtsa.gov
Telephone:
1-888-DASH-2-DOT
(1-888-327-4236).

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington D.C. 20590.

01 Safety
01

Seat belts
General information

belts also include a tension reducing device
which, in the event of a collision, limits the
peak forces exerted by the seat belt on the
occupant.

NOTE
Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt)
is equipped with the ALR/ELR function,
which is designed to help keep the seat
belt taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt
is pulled out as far as possible. If this is
done, a sound from the seat belt retractor
will be audible, which is normal, and the
seat belt will be pulled taut and locked in
place. This function is automatically disabled when the seat belt is unbuckled and
fully retracted.

Fastening a seat belt
Buckling
Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch
plate into the receptacle until a distinct click
is heard. The seat belt retractor is normally
"unlocked" and you can move freely, provided that the shoulder belt is not pulled out
too far.
Adjusting the seat belt

Seat belts should always be worn by all occupants of your vehicle. Children should be
properly restrained, using an infant, car, or
booster seat determined by age, weight and
height.
Volvo also believes no child should sit in the
front seat of a vehicle.
Most states and provinces make it mandatory
for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.

Seat belt pretensioners
All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners
that reduce slack in the belts. These pretensioners are triggered in situations where the
front or side impact airbags deploy, and in
certain impacts from the rear. The front seat

Seat belt retractor
The seat belt retractor will lock up in the
following situations:

•
•
•
•
•

if the belt is pulled out rapidly
during braking and acceleration
if the vehicle is leaning excessively

See also page 38 for information about
using a seat belt's ALR/ELR function to
anchor a child seat.

When wearing the seat belt remember:

•
•

when driving in turns
if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is
activated

•

The belt should not be twisted or turned.
The lap section of the belt must be positioned low on the hips (not pressing
against the abdomen).
Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled
up into its retractor and that the shoulder
and lap belts are taut.

Unbuckling the seat belt
To remove the seat belt, press the red section
on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the
vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully
after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the
belt back into the retractor slot.

01 Safety
Seat belts

Check periodically that the seat belts are in
good condition. Use water and a mild detergent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism
function as follows: attach the seat belt and
pull rapidly on the strap.

WARNING

•

Never repair the belt yourself; have this
work done by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician only.

•

Any device used to induce slack into
the shoulder belt portion of the threepoint belt system will have a detrimental effect on the amount of protection
available to you in the event of a collision.

•

The seat back should not be tilted too
far back. The shoulder belt must be
taut in order to function properly.

•

Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the
front passenger's seat. We also recommend that children who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear
seat with the seat belt properly fastened.

WARNING
Never use a seat belt for more than one
occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion
of the belt under the arm, behind the back
or otherwise out of position. Such use
could cause injury in the event of an accident. As seat belts lose much of their
strength when exposed to violent stretching, they should be replaced after any collision, even if they appear to be undamaged.

Seat belt reminder

G017726

Seat belt maintenance

Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console

The seat belt reminder consists of an audible
signal, an indicator light near the rearview
mirror and a symbol in the instrument panel
that alert all occupants of the vehicle to fasten their seat belts. The audible signal and
indicator light will be on for several seconds
from the time the ignition is switched on,
regardless of whether or not the seat belts
are fastened.
If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the
vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and
warning light will be active for a several seconds.

}}

01 Safety
Seat belts

Rear seats

Seat belt use during pregnancy

The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has
two additional functions:

should strive to position the seat with as large
a distance as possible between their belly
and the steering wheel.

•

Child seats

•

It also provides a reminder if one of the
occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled
his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in
motion. A visual and audible signal will be
given. These signals will stop when the
seat belt has been re-buckled or can be
stopped by pressing the OK button.
The message Unbelted in rear seat will
appear in the information display if one of
the rear doors has been opened.

The message in the information display can
always be accessed, even if it has been
erased, by pressing the OK button to display
stored messages.

Please refer to page 40 for information on
securing child seats with the seat belts.

G020998

•

It provides information about which seat
belts are fastened in the rear seat. A message will appear in the information display
when a belt is being used. This message
will disappear after several seconds or
can be erased by pressing the OK button
on the left steering wheel lever.

The seat belt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in
the correct way. The diagonal section should
wrap over the shoulder then be routed
between the breasts and to the side of the
belly. The lap section should lay flat over the
thighs and as low as possible under the belly.
It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove all slack from the belt and ensure
that it fits close to the body without any
twists.
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of
the vehicle as they drive (which means they
must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
and steering wheel). Within this context, they

01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
General information

Models with an analog instrument panel

consists of seat belt pretensioners, front airbags, side impact airbags, a front passenger
occupant weight sensor, and inflatable curtains. All of these systems are monitored by
the SRS control module. An SRS warning
light in the instrument panel (see the illustration) illuminates when the ignition is in modes
I or II, and will normally go out after approximately 6 seconds if no faults are detected in
the system.
Where applicable, a text message will also be
displayed when the SRS warning light illuminates. If this warning symbol is not functioning properly, the general warning symbol illuminates and a text message will be displayed.
See also page 81 for more information
about indicator and warning lights.

WARNING

•

If the SRS warning light stays on after
the engine has started or if it illuminates while you are driving, have the
vehicle inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as
soon as possible.

•

Never try to repair any component or
part of the SRS yourself. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction and serious injury. All work on
these systems should be performed by
a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.

Models with an digital instrument panel*

As an enhancement to the three-point seat
belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

01 Safety
01

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
WARNING

Front airbags

If your vehicle has become flood-damaged
in any way (e.g., soaked carpeting/standing water on the floor of the vehicle), do
not attempt to start the vehicle or insert
the remote key into the ignition slot before
disconnecting the battery (see below). This
may cause airbag deployment which could
result in serious injury. Have the vehicle
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician for repairs.
1. Switch off the ignition for at least
10 minutes and disconnect the battery.
2. Follow the instructions for manually
overriding the shiftlock system on
page 130.

G018665

Before attempting to tow the vehicle:

The front airbag system
The front airbags supplement the three-point
seat belts. For these airbags to provide the
protection intended, seat belts must be worn
at all times.
The front airbag system includes gas generators surrounded by the airbags, and deceleration sensors that activate the gas generators,
causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen gas.

Location of the passenger's side front airbag

As the movement of the seats' occupants
compresses the airbags, some of the gas is
expelled at a controlled rate to provide better
cushioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also
deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire
process, including inflation and deflation of
the airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a
second.
The location of the front airbags is indicated
by SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering
wheel pad and above the glove compartment,
and by decals on both sun visors and on the
front and far right side of the dash.
The driver's side front airbag is folded and
located in the steering wheel hub.

01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
The passenger's side front airbag is folded
behind a panel located above the glove compartment.

Front airbag deployment

•

The front airbags are designed to deploy
during certain frontal or front-angular collisions, impacts, or decelerations,
depending on the crash severity, angle,
speed and object impacted. The airbags
may also deploy in certain non-frontal
collisions where rapid deceleration
occurs.

•

The SRS sensors, which trigger the front
airbags, are designed to react to both the
impact of the collision and the inertial
forces generated by it, and to determine if
the intensity of the collision is sufficient
for the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags to be deployed.

WARNING

•

Never drive with your hands on the
steering wheel pad/airbag housing.

•

The front airbags are designed to help
prevent serious injury. Deployment
occurs very quickly and with considerable force. During normal deployment
and depending on variables such as
seating position, one may experience
abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other
injuries as a result from deployment of
one or both of the airbags.

•

The airbags in the vehicle are designed
to be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a
replacement for–the three-point seat
belts. For maximum protection, wear
seat belts at all times. Be aware that
no system can prevent all possible
injuries that may occur in an accident.

When installing any accessory equipment, make sure that the front airbag
system is not damaged. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction.

See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information on page 26.

However, not all frontal collisions activate the
front airbags.

WARNING

•

Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the
front passenger's seat. We also recommend that occupants under 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) in height who have
outgrown these devices sit in the rear
seat with the seat belt fastened1.

•

Never drive with the airbags deployed.
The fact that they hang out can impair
the steering of your vehicle. Other
safety systems can also be damaged.

•

The smoke and dust formed when the
airbags are deployed can cause skin
and eye irritation in the event of prolonged exposure.

•

If the collision involves a nonrigid object
(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid,
fixed object at a low speed, the front airbags will not necessarily deploy.

Should you have questions about any component in the SRS system, please contact a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
or Volvo customer support:

•

Front airbags do not normally deploy in a
side impact collision, in a collision from
the rear or in a rollover situation.

In the USA

•

The amount of damage to the bodywork
does not reliably indicate if the airbags
should have deployed or not.

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive
P.O. Box 914

}}

01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552

NOTE

•

Deployment of front airbags occurs
only one time during an accident. In a
collision where deployment occurs,
the airbags and seat belt pretensioners
activate. Some noise occurs and a
small amount of powder is released.
The release of the powder may appear
as smoke-like matter. This is a normal
characteristic and does not indicate
fire.

•

Volvo's front airbags use special sensors that are integrated with the front
seat buckles. The point at which the
airbag deploys is determined by
whether or not the seat belt is being
used, as well as the severity of the collision.

•

Collisions can occur where only one of
the airbags deploys. If the impact is
less severe, but severe enough to
present a clear injury risk, the airbags
are triggered at partial capacity. If the
impact is more severe, the airbags are
triggered at full capacity.

www.volvocars.com/us
In Canada
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
National Customer Service
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocars.com/ca

Airbag decals

G008335

Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors

Passenger's side airbag decal

01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
WARNING

•

Children must never be allowed in the
front passenger's seat.

•

Occupants in the front passenger's
seat must never sit on the edge of the
seat, sit leaning toward the instrument
panel or otherwise sit out of position.

•

The occupant's back must be as
upright as comfort allows and be
against the seat back with the seat
belt properly fastened.

•

Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on
the dash, seat or out of the window.

WARNING

•

No objects or accessory equipment,
e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed
on, attached to, or installed near the
air bag hatch (the area above the glove
compartment) or the area affected by
airbag deployment (see the illustration
on page 22).

•

There should be no loose articles,
such as coffee cups on the floor, seat,
or dashboard area.

•

Never try to open the airbag cover on
the steering wheel or the passenger's
side dashboard. This should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.

•

Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the vehicle occupants.

01 Safety
01

Occupant Weight Sensor
General information

The OWS works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly seated occupant and determine
if the passenger's side front airbag should be
enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not
inflate).

front airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located in the
overhead console, near the base of the rearview mirror.

NOTE
When the ignition is switched on, the OWS
indicator light will go on for up to 10 seconds while the system performs a selfdiagnostic test.

The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag when:

Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light

Disabling the passenger's side front
airbag
Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seat
of any vehicle with a front passenger side airbag, and be properly restrained for their size
and weight. For child safety recommendations,see page 38.
The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is
designed to meet the regulatory requirements
of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will
not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag
under certain conditions.

•

the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,
or has small/medium objects in the front
seat,

•

the system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat that is
installed according to the manufacturer's
instructions,

G017724

•

the system determines that a small child
is present in a forward-facing child
restraint that is installed according to the
manufacturer's instructions,

•

the system determines that a small child
is present in a booster seat,

•

a front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time,

•

a child or a small person occupies the
front passenger's seat.

The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay
on to remind you that the passenger's side

However, if a fault is detected in the system:

•
•

The OWS indicator light will stay on

•

The message Pass. Airbag OFF Service
urgent will be displayed in the information display.

The SRS warning light (see page 21) will
come on and stay on

WARNING
If a fault in the system is detected and
indicated as described, be aware that the
passenger's side front airbag will not
deploy in the event of a collision. In this
case, the SRS system and Occupant
Weight Sensor should be inspected by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible.

01 Safety
Occupant Weight Sensor
WARNING

•

Never try to open, remove, or repair
any components in the OWS system.
This could result in system malfunction. Maintenance or repairs should
only be carried out by an a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
The front passenger's seat should not
be modified in any way. This could
reduce pressure on the seat cushion,
which might interfere with the OWS
system's function.

Passenger's seat
occupancy status

OWS
indicator
light status

Passenger's side
front airbag status

Seat unoccupied

OWS indicator light
lights up.

Passenger's
side front airbag disabled

Seat occupied by low
weight
occupant/
objectA

OWS indicator light
lights up

Passenger's
side front airbag disabled

Seat occupied by
heavy occupant/object

OWS indicator light
is not lit

Passenger's
side front airbag enabled

Volvo recommends that children always be properly
restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats.
Do not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is
disabled unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front airbag, move the child restraint to the rear
seat.

The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate)
the passenger's side front airbag in the event
of a collision anytime the system senses that
a person of adult size is sitting properly in the
front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER

AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and
remain off.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible
that the person isn't sitting properly in the
seat. If this happens:

•

Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in an upright position.

•

Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person's legs comfortably extended.

•

Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the passenger's frontal airbag.

•

If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains on even after this, the
person should be advised to ride in the
rear seat.

This condition reflects limitations of the OWS
classification capability. It does not indicate
OWS malfunction.

Modifications
If you are considering modifying your vehicle
in any way to accommodate a disability, for
example by altering or adapting the driver's
}}

01 Safety
01

Occupant Weight Sensor
or front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag
systems, please contact Volvo at:
In the USA

WARNING

•

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552

•

The seat belt should never be wrapped
around an object on the front passenger's seat. This could interfere with
the OWS system's function.

•

The front passenger's seat belt should
never be used in a way that exerts
more pressure on the passenger than
normal. This could increase the pressure exerted on the weight sensor by a
child, and could result in the airbag
being enabled, which might cause it to
deploy in the event of a collision,
thereby injuring the child.

In Canada
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
National Customer Service
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-800-663-8255

No objects that add to the total weight
on the seat should be placed on the
front passenger's seat. If a child is
seated in the front passenger's seat
with any additional weight, this extra
weight could cause the OWS system
to enable the airbag, which might
cause it to deploy in the event of a collision, thereby injuring the child.

WARNING

•

Keep the following points in mind with
respect to the OWS system. Failure to
follow these instructions could
adversely affect the system's function
and result in serious injury to the occupant of the front passenger's seat:

•

The full weight of the front seat passenger should always be on the seat
cushion. The passenger should never
lift him/herself off the seat cushion
using the armrest in the door or the
center console, by pressing the feet on
the floor, by sitting on the edge of the
seat cushion, or by pressing against
the backrest in a way that reduces
pressure on the seat cushion. This
could cause OWS to disable the front,
passenger's side airbag.

01 Safety
Occupant Weight Sensor

WARNING

•

Do not place any type of object on the
front passenger's seat in such a way
that jamming, pressing, or squeezing
occurs between the object and the
front seat, other than as a direct result
of the correct use of the Automatic
Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (see
page 38).

•

No objects should be placed under the
front passenger's seat. This could
interfere with the OWS system's function.

01 Safety
01

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags
General information

NOTE
SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag)
occurs only on the side of the vehicle
affected by the impact. The airbags are not
designed to deploy in all side impact situations.

G024377

G032949

Components in the SIPS airbag system

Driver's side SIPS airbag

Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbags (front
seats only)

The SIPS airbag system is designed to help
increase occupant protection in the event of
certain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and point of
impact.

G024378

As an enhancement to the structural side
impact protection built into your vehicle, it is
also equipped with Side Impact Protection
System (SIPS) airbags.

Passenger's side SIPS airbag

This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas
generator, the side airbag modules built into
the outboard sides of both front seat backrests, and electronic sensors/wiring.

01 Safety
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags

WARNING

•

The SIPS airbag system is a supplement to the structural Side Impact
Protection System and the three-point
seat belt system. It is not designed to
deploy during collisions from the front
or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations.

•

The use of seat covers on the front
seats may impede SIPS airbag deployment.

•

No objects, accessory equipment or
stickers may be placed on, attached to
or installed near the SIPS airbag system or in the area affected by SIPS airbag deployment.

•

Never try to open or repair any components of the SIPS airbag system. This
should be done only by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.

•

In order for the SIPS airbag to provide
its best protection, both front seat
occupants should sit in an upright
position with the seat belt properly fastened.

•

Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the occupants of the
vehicle in the event of an accident.

01 Safety
01

Inflatable Curtain (IC)
General information

This system consists of inflatable curtains
located along the sides of the roof liners,
stretching from the center of both front side
windows to the rear edge of the rear side
door windows. It is designed to help protect
the heads of the occupants of the front seats
and the occupant of the outboard rear seating positions in certain side impact collisions.
In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable
Curtain (IC) and the Side Impact Airbag System (SIPS airbag) will deploy. The IC and the
SIPS airbag deploy simultaneously.

NOTE
If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains
inflated for approximately 3 seconds.

WARNING

•

The IC system is a supplement to the
Side Impact Protection System. It is
not designed to deploy during collisions from the rear of the vehicle or in
rollover situations.

•

Never try to open or repair any components of the IC system. This should be
done only by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.

•

Never hang heavy items from the ceiling handles. This could impede
deployment of the Inflatable Curtain.

•

The cargo area and rear seat should
not be loaded to a level higher than
2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of
the rear side windows. Objects placed
higher than this level could impede the
function of the Inflatable Curtain.

WARNING
In order for the IC to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants and
both outboard rear seat occupants should
sit in an upright position with the seat belt
properly fastened; adults using the seat
belt and children using the proper child
restraint system. Only adults should sit in
the front seats. Children must never be
allowed in the front passenger seat, see
page 38 for guidelines. Failure to follow
these instructions can result in injury to the
vehicle occupants in an accident.

01 Safety
Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS
General information

Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) –
front seats only
The WHIPS system consists of specially
designed hinges and brackets on the front
seat backrests designed to help absorb some
of the energy generated in a collision from the
rear (when the vehicle is rear-ended).
In the event of a collision of this type, the
hinges and brackets of the front seat backrests are designed to change position slightly
to allow the backrest/head restraint to help
support the occupant's head before moving
slightly rearward. This movement helps
absorb some of the forces that could result in
whiplash.

WARNING

•

The WHIPS system is designed to
supplement the other safety systems
in your vehicle. For this system to
function properly, the three-point seat
belt must be worn. Please be aware
that no system can prevent all possible
injuries that may occur in an accident.

•

The WHIPS system is designed to
function in certain collisions from the
rear, depending on the crash severity,
angle and speed.

WARNING

•

Occupants in the front seats must
never sit out of position. The occupant's back must be as upright as
comfort allows and be against the seat
back with the seat belt properly fastened.

•

If your vehicle has been involved in a
rear-end collision, the front seat backrests must be inspected by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician,
even if the seats appear to be undamaged. Certain components in the
WHIPS system may need to be
replaced.

•

Do not attempt to service any component in the WHIPS system yourself.

}}

01 Safety
01

Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS
WARNING

•

Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind
the front seats could impede the function of the WHIPS system.

•

If the rear seat backrests are folded
down, cargo must be secured to prevent it from sliding forward against the
front seat backrests in the event of a
collision from the rear. This could
interfere with the action of the WHIPS
system.

WARNING
Any contact between the front seat backrests and the folded rear seat or a rearfacing child seat could impede the function
of the WHIPS system. If the rear seat is
folded down, the occupied front seats
must be adjusted forward so that they do
not touch the folded rear seat.

01 Safety
Crash mode
cates that the vehicle's functionality has been
reduced.

WARNING

•

Never attempt to repair the vehicle
yourself or to reset the electrical system after the vehicle has displayed
Safety mode See manual. This could
result in injury or improper system
function.

•

Restoring the vehicle to normal operating status should only be done by a
trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.

•

After Safety mode See manual has
been displayed, if you detect the odor
of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel
leakage, do not attempt to start the
vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately.

NOTE
This text can only be shown if the display
is undamaged and the vehicle's electrical
system is intact.

Warning symbol: analog instrument panel

Safety mode is a feature that is triggered if
one or more of the safety systems (e.g. front
or side airbags, an inflatable curtain, or one or
more of the seat belt pretensioners) has
deployed. The collision may have damaged
an important function in the vehicle, such as
the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety
systems, the brake system, etc.

Attempting to start the vehicle
If damage to the vehicle is minor and there is
no fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the
vehicle. To do so:

Warning symbol: digital instrument panel*

Driving after a collision
If the vehicle has been involved in a collision,
the text Safety mode See manual may
appear in the information display. This indi-

1. Remove the remote key from the ignition
slot and open the driver's door. If a message is displayed that the ignition is on,
press the start button.
2. Close the driver's door and reinsert the
remote key in the ignition slot.
3. Try to start the vehicle.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

01 Safety
01

Crash mode
If the message Safety mode See manual is
still displayed, the vehicle should not be
driven and must be towed. Concealed faults
may make the vehicle difficult to control.

Moving the vehicle
If the message Normal mode is displayed
when Safety mode See manual is no longer
displayed, the vehicle may be moved carefully from its present position, if for example,
it is blocking traffic. It should, however, not
be moved farther than is absolutely necessary.

WARNING
Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable
after Safety mode has been set, it should
not be driven or towed (pulled by another
vehicle). There may be concealed damage
that could make it difficult or impossible to
control. The vehicle should be transported
on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician for
inspection/repairs.

01 Safety
Child safety
Children should be seated safely
Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint
systems for all occupants including children.
Remember that, regardless of age and size, a
child should always be properly restrained in
a vehicle.
Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/
LATCH attachments, which make it more
convenient to install child seats.
Some restraint systems for children are
designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap
belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.
Such child restraint systems can help protect
children in vehicles in the event of an accident only if they are used properly. However,
children could be endangered in a crash if the
child restraints are not properly secured in the
vehicle. Failure to follow the installation
instructions for your child restraint can result
in your child striking the vehicle's interior in a
sudden stop.
Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable
substitute for a child restraint system. In an
accident, a child held in a person's arms can
be crushed between the vehicle's interior and
an unrestrained person. The child could also
be injured by striking the interior, or by being
ejected from the vehicle during a sudden
maneuver or impact. The same can also happen if the infant or child rides unrestrained on

the seat. Other occupants should also be
properly restrained to help reduce the chance
of injuring or increasing the injury of a child.
All states and provinces have legislation governing how and where children should be carried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations
existing in your state or province. Recent
accident statistics have shown that children
are safer in rear seating positions than front
seating positions when properly restrained. A
child restraint system can help protect a child
in a vehicle. Here's what to look for when
selecting a child restraint system:
It should have a label certifying that it meets
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada,
CMVSS 213.
Make sure the child restraint system is
approved for the child's height, weight and
development – the label required by the
standard or regulation, or instructions for
infant restraints, typically provide this information.

injuries for both the infant or child and other
occupants in the vehicle.
When a child has outgrown the child safety
seat, you should use the rear seat with the
standard seat belt fastened. The best way to
help protect the child here is to place the
child on a cushion so that the seat belt is
properly located on the hips (see the illustration on page 47). Legislation in your state or
province may mandate the use of a child seat
or cushion in combination with the seat belt,
depending on the child's age and/or size.
Please check local regulations.
A specially designed and tested booster
cushion and backrest can be obtained from
your Volvo retailer.
USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs. (15 –
36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm) in
height
Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs.
(18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 –
137 cm) in height

In using any child restraint system, we urge
you to carefully look over the instructions that
are provided with the restraint. Be sure you
understand them and can use the device
properly and safely in this vehicle. A misused
child restraint system can result in increased
}}

01 Safety
01

Child safety
WARNING

•

Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the
front passenger's seat. We also recommend that children under 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) in height who have
outgrown these devices sit in the rear
seat with the seat belt fastened.
On hot days, the temperature in the
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure to these high temperatures
for even a short period of time can
cause heat-related injury or death.
Small children are particularly at risk.

Child seat should always be registered. See
page 39 for more information.

When attaching the seat belt to a child
seat:
1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat
according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.
3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the
buckle (lock) in the usual way.
4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut
around the child seat.
A sound from the seat belt retractor will be
audible at this time and is normal. The belt
will now be locked in place. This function is
automatically disabled when the seat belt is
unlocked and the belt is fully retracted.

WARNING
Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/
ELR)
To make child seat installation easier, each
seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with a locking mechanism to help keep
the seat belt taut.

Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that children who have outgrown these
devices sit in the rear seat with the seat
belt properly fastened.

Volvo's recommendations
Why does Volvo believe that no child should
sit in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple
really. A front airbag is a very powerful device
designed, by law, to help protect an adult.
Because of the size of the airbag and its
speed of inflation, a child should never be
placed in the front seat, even if he or she is
properly belted or strapped into a child safety
seat. Volvo has been an innovator in safety
for over seventy-five years, and we'll continue
to do our part. But we need your help. Please
remember to put your children in the back
seat, and buckle them up.

Volvo has some very specific
recommendations:

•
•

Always wear your seat belt.
Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety
device which, when used with a threepoint seat belt can help reduce serious
injuries during certain types of accidents.
Volvo recommends that you do not disconnect the airbag system in your vehicle.

•

Volvo strongly recommends that everyone in the vehicle be properly restrained.

•

Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back

01 Safety
Child safety

seat of any vehicle with a front passenger
side airbag.

•

Drive safely!

Child restraint registration and recalls
Registering a child restraint
Child restraints could be recalled for safety
reasons. You must register your child
restraint to be reached in a recall. To stay
informed about child safety seat recalls, be
sure to fill out and return the registration card
that comes with new child restraints.
Child restraint recall information is readily
available in both the U.S. and Canada. For
recall information in the U.S., call the U.S.
Government's Auto Safety Hotline at
1-800-424-9393 or go to http://wwwodi.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/recalls/
register/childseat/index.cfm. In Canada, visit
Transport Canada's Child Safety website at
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/
menu.htm.

01 Safety
01

Child restraint systems

Infant seat

There are three main types of child restraint
systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and
booster cushions. They are classified according to the child's age and size.
The following section provides general information on securing a child restraint using a
three-point seat belt. Refer to page 48–50
for information on securing a child restraint
using ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or
top tether anchorages.

Convertible seat

WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles
equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If
the severity of an accident were to cause
the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this
position.

G023269

G022847

G022840

Child restraints

Booster cushion

WARNING
Always refer to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for detailed information
on securing the restraint.

01 Safety
Child restraint systems

WARNING

•

When not in use, keep the child
restraint system secured or remove it
from the passenger compartment to
help prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.

•

A small child's head represents a considerable part of its total weight and its
neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel,
properly restrained, facing rearward. In
addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing,
properly restrained, as long as possible.

01 Safety
01

Infant seats
Securing an infant seat with a seat
belt

G022844

G023270

WARNING

Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's seat

NOTE
Refer to page 48–50 for information on
securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/
LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether
anchorages.

Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat

WARNING

•

An infant seat must be in the rear-facing
position only.

•

The infant seat should not be positioned
behind the driver's seat unless there is
adequate space for safe installation.

A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles
equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If
the severity of an accident were to cause
the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this
position.

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.

2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat
according to the manufacturer's instructions.

G023271

1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
Fasten the seat belt

01 Safety
Infant seats
NOTE

WARNING

The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled
and allowed to retract fully.

G022846

It should not be possible to move the child
restraint (child seat) more than 1 in.
(2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat belt
path.

5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let
the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A
sound from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at
this time and is normal. The seat belt
should now be locked in place.

The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract completely.

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

G022850

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
out as far as possible to activate the
belt's automatic locking function.

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

6. Push and pull the infant seat along the
seat belt path to ensure that it is held
securely in place by the seat belt.

01 Safety
01

Convertible seats
Securing a convertible seat with a
seat belt

G018630

G022847

WARNING

Do not place the convertible seat in the front
passenger's seat

NOTE
Refer to pages 48 and 50 for information on securing a child restraint using
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top
tether anchorages.

Convertible seats can be used in either a forward or rearward-facing position, depending
on the age and size of the child.

Route the seat belt through the convertible seat

WARNING
Always use a convertible seat that is suitable for the child's age and size. See the
convertible seat manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat
of the vehicle.

•

Convertible child seats should be installed in the rear seat only.

•

A rear-facing convertible seat should
not be positioned behind the driver's
seat unless there is adequate space for
safe installation.

2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible
seat according to the manufacturer's
instructions.

01 Safety
Convertible seats
NOTE

WARNING

The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled
and allowed to retract fully.

G022848

It should not be possible to move the child
restraint (child seat) more than 1 in.
(2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat belt
path.

5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place,
let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A
sound from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at
this time and is normal. The seat belt
should now be locked in place.

The convertible seat can be removed by
unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract
completely.

Fasten the seat belt

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.

G022849

G022850

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
out as far as possible to activate the
belt's automatic locking function.

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

6. Push and pull the convertible seat along
the seat belt path to ensure that it is held
securely in place by the seat belt.

}}

01 Safety
01

Convertible seats
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the
severity of an accident were to cause the
airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious
injury or death to a child seated in this
position.

01 Safety
Booster cushions
Securing a booster cushion

G022851

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.

Booster cushions are recommended for children who have outgrown convertible seats.
1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat
of the vehicle.
2. With the child properly seated on the
booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or
around the cushion according to the
manufacturer's instructions.

G022852

Position the child correctly on the booster cushion
Positioning the seat belt

4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut
and fits snugly around the child.

WARNING

•

The hip section of the three-point seat
belt must fit snugly across the child's
hips, not across the stomach.

•

The shoulder section of the three-point
seat belt should be positioned across
the chest and shoulder.

•

The shoulder belt must never be
placed behind the child's back or
under the arm.

01 Safety
01

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors
Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child
seat anchors

3. Fasten the attachment on the child
restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/
LATCH/LATCH lower anchors.
4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps
according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to
FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to
the child restraint system's manual for
weight and size ratings.

Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped
child seats are located in the rear, outboard
seats, hidden below the backrest cushions.
Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark
the anchor positions as shown. To access the
anchors, kneel on the seat cushion and locate
the anchors by feel. Always follow your child
seat manufacturer's installation instructions,
and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors
and top tethers whenever possible.

To access the anchors
1. Put the child restraint in position.
2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down
the seat cushion and locate the anchors
by feel.

NOTE

•

The rear seat's center position is not
equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower
anchors. When installing a child
restraint in this position, attach the
restraint's top tether strap (if it is so
equipped) to the top tether anchorage
point and secure the restraint with the
vehicle's center seat belt.

•

Always follow your child seat manufacturer's installation instructions, and
use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors
and top tethers whenever possible.

G018631

WARNING

Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/
LATCH lower anchors

01 Safety
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors

WARNING

•

Be sure to fasten the attachment correctly to the anchor (see the illustration). If the attachment is not correctly
fastened, the child restraint may not
be properly secured in the event of a
collision.

•

The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child
restraint anchors are only intended for
use with child seats positioned in the
outboard seating positions. These
anchors are not certified for use with
any child restraint that is positioned in
the center seating position. When
securing a child restraint in the center
seating position, use only the vehicle's
center seat belt.

01 Safety
01

Top tether anchors
Child restraint anchorages

4. Firmly tension all straps.
Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's
instructions for information on securing the
child seat.

NOTE
On models equipped with the optional
cargo area cover, this cover should be
removed before a child seat is attached to
the child restraint anchors.

WARNING

•

Always refer to the recommendations
made by the child restraint manufacturer.

•

Volvo recommends that the top tether
anchors be used when installing a forward-facing child restraint.

•

Never route a top tether strap over the
top of the head restraint. The strap
should be routed beneath the head
restraint.

•

Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts or
harnesses. The anchorages are not
able to withstand excessive forces on
them in the event of collision if full harness seat belts or adult seat belts are
installed to them. An adult who uses a
belt anchored in a child restraint
anchorage runs a great risk of suffering severe injuries should a collision
occur.

•

Do not install rear speakers that
require the removal of the top tether
anchors or interfere with the proper
use of the top tether strap.

Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint
top tether anchorages in the rear seat. They
are located on the rear side of the backrests.

Securing a child seat
1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat.
2. Route the top tether strap under the head
restraint and attach it to the anchor.
3. Attach lower tether straps to the lower
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors. If the child
restraint is not equipped with lower tether
straps, or the restraint is used in the center seating position, follow instructions for
securing a child restraint using the Automatic Locking Retractor seat belt (see
page 38).

01 Safety
Integrated booster cushion*

Volvo's optional integrated booster cushions
are located in the outboard seating positions.
These booster cushions have been specially
designed to help safeguard children in the
rear seat. They should be stowed (folded
down into the seat cushion) when not in use.
When using an integrated booster cushion,
the child must be secured with the vehicle's
three-point seat belt.

The booster cushions are designed to raise
the child higher, so that the shoulder strap
crosses over the child's collarbone, not over
the child's neck. If using a booster cushion
does not result in proper positioning of the
shoulder strap, then the child should be
placed in a properly secured child restraint
(see page 40). The shoulder belt must never
be placed behind the child's back or under
the arm.

Use these booster cushions only
with children whose weight is
between:
• Stage 1: 48 – 80 lbs (22 – 36 kg)
• Stage 2: 33 – 55 lbs (15 – 25 kg)

Incorrect seating position: the child's head is
above the head restraint and the shoulder belt is
not across the collarbone

Before driving, check that:

•

G017875

and whose height is between:
• Stage 1: 45 – 55 in. (115 –
140 cm)
• Stage 2: 37 – 47 in. (95 – 120 cm)
In Canada, Transport Canada's
weight recommendation is 40 –
80 lbs (18 – 36 kg).

G017719

Integrated two-stage booster
cushion1

Correct seating position: child's head is below
the head restraint and the shoulder belt is across
the collarbone

The integrated two-stage booster cushion
is set in the correct position according to
the child's height and weight (see the
table below) and is locked in position.

Weight

Height

Stage 1

Stage 2

48 – 80 lbs

33 – 55 lbs

22 – 36 kg

15 – 25 kg

45 – 55 in.

37 – 47 in.

115 – 140 cm

95 – 120 cm

Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

01 Safety
Integrated booster cushion*

•

That the seat belt is properly positioned
and is taut.

•

The shoulder section of the seat belt is
across the child's collarbone, not over the
neck.

•

The lap section of the seat belt is across
the child's hips and not the abdomen.

G017697

Stage 1

Pull the handle (1) forward and upward (2)
to release the booster cushion.
Press the booster cushion rearward to
lock it in position.

Stage 2

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G017784

Using an integrated booster cushion

With the booster cushion in the stage 1
position, press the button (see the arrow
in illustration 1).
Lift the front edge of the booster cushion
and press it rearward toward the backrest
to lock it in position.

01 Safety
Integrated booster cushion*
Stowing the two-stage integrated
booster cushion

NOTE

WARNING

The booster cushion cannot be moved
from the stage 2 (upper) position to the
stage 1 (lower) position. It must first be
folded down completely to the stowed
position, and then adjusted to stage 1.

Pull the handle forward to release the
booster cushion.
Press down on the center of the booster
cushion to return it to the stowed position.

NOTE
The booster cushion must be in the
stowed position before the rear seat backrests are folded down.

CAUTION
Be sure there are no loose objects under
the booster cushion before it is stowed.

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can
occur
Follow all instructions on the
booster cushion and in the vehicle's owner's manual.
MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER
CUSHION IS SECURELY
LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS
SEATED.
• Use this booster cushion only with
children whose height and weight are
within the permitted limits shown in
the table (see page 51).

•

In the event of a collision while the
integrated booster cushion was occupied, the entire booster cushion and
seat belt must be replaced. The
booster cushion should also be
replaced if it is badly worn or damaged
in any way. This work should be performed by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician only.

The booster cushion can be folded down
completely (stowed) from either the stage 1 or
stage 2 positions.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

01 Safety
01

Child safety locks
Manual child safety locks

Power child safety locks and
disengaging rear door windows*

2. Press the button on the driver's door control panel (see the illustration).
> Rear child locks Activated will be
displayed in the instrument panel and
the indicator light in the button will illuminate when the function is activated.

G021077

When the child safety locks are activated:

Child safety locks – rear doors
The controls are located on the rear door
jambs. Use the remote control's key blade or
a screwdriver to adjust these controls.
The rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the slot is in the horizontal position.
The rear doors can be opened from the
inside when the slot is in the vertical position.

Driver's door control panel

The power child safety locks can be activated/deactivated when the remote key is in
mode I (see page 89) or higher. Activation/
deactivation can be done up to 2 minutes
after the engine has been switched off (if no
door has been opened).
To activate the child safety locks:
1. Put the ignition in mode I or higher or
start the engine.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

•

The rear door windows can only be
opened from the driver's door control
panel

•

The rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside

The child safety locks' current setting is
stored when the engine is switched off. If
these locks were activated when the engine
was switched off, they will also be active
when the engine is restarted.

01 Safety
01

Remote key and key blade.....................................................................
Private locking ........................................................................................
Keyless drive...........................................................................................
Locks.......................................................................................................
Alarm.......................................................................................................

58
67
68
71
74

LOCKS AND ALARM

02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade

Introduction

Detachable key blade

Two remote keys or optional Personal Car
Communicators (PCC) are provided with your
vehicle. They enable you to unlock the doors
and tailgate, and also function as ignition
keys to start the vehicle or operate electrical
components. The remote keys contain
detachable metal key blades for manually
locking or unlocking the driver's door and the
glove compartment. The visible ends of these
key blades are unique to make it easier to
identify "your" remote key. Up to six remotes
can be programmed for use on the same
vehicle.

Each remote key or PCC contains a detachable metal key blade for mechanically locking
or unlocking the driver's door and the glove
compartment, and to enable the private locking function. See page 64 for more information on the key blade and page 67 for information on the private locking function. The
key blades have a unique code, which is used
if new ones need to be produced. This code
is available at an authorized Volvo retailer.

The PCCs have enhanced functionality compared with the standard remote key.

NOTE
In the remainder of this chapter, all references to the remote key also pertain to the
PCC unless otherwise stated.

WARNING
Never leave the remote key in the ignition
slot if children are to remain in the vehicle.

See page 88 for more information on the
various ignition modes.

The visible ends of these key blades are
unique to make it easier to identify "your"
remote key.

Loss of a remote key
If either of the remote keys is lost, the other
should be taken with the car to a Volvo
retailer. As an anti-theft measure, the code of
the lost remote key must be erased from the
system.

NOTE
Additional or duplicate remote control keys
can be obtained from any Authorized
Volvo Retailer.
You can also obtain additional or duplicate
remote control keys from certain independent repair facilities and locksmiths
that are qualified to make remote control
keys. Each key must be programmed to
work with your vehicle.
California Only:
A list of independent repair facilities and/or
locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut
and code replacement keys can be found:

•

on the Volvo website at
http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys

•

by calling Volvo Customer Care at
1-800-458-1552

The number of registered keys for the vehicle
can be found by pressing MY CAR and going
into Settings Information Number of
keys. See page 209 for a description of the
menu system.
USA-5WK49264
FCC ID:KR55WK49264 + Siemens VDO
5WK49236
FCC ID:KR55WK49236, 5WK49266

02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
FCC ID:KR55WK49266 + Siemens VDO
5WK49233

Key memory: door mirrors and driver's
seat

Confirmation when locking/unlocking
the vehicle

FCC ID:KR55WK49233

The position of the side door mirrors, power
driver's seat* and the selected instrument
panel theme1 are stored in the remote keys
when the vehicle is locked. The next time the
driver's door is unlocked with the same
remote key and the door is opened within
2 minutes, the power driver's seat and side
door mirrors will automatically move to the
position that they were in when the doors
were most recently locked with the same
remote key. If the seat/mirrors have not been
readjusted since the vehicle was locked, they
will already be in the position stored in that
particular remote key and will not move. See
page 91 for more information. See also
page 92 for more information on this feature.

Settings can be made in the menu system for
audible and visual confirmation when the
vehicle has been locked or unlocked. With
these functions activated, the following will
occur when the vehicle is locked/unlocked:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to
the following conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Canada-5WK49264
IC:267T-5WK49264 + Siemens VDO
5WK49236
IC:267T-5WK49236, 5WK49266
IC:267T-5WK49266 + Siemens VDO
5WK49233
IC:267T-5WK49233
Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.

This feature can be activated or deactivated
in the vehicle's menu by pressing MY CAR
and going into Settings Car settings
Car key memory. See page 209 for a
description of the menu system.
See also page 68 for information regarding
vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

Locking confirmation

•

The turn signals flash once, an audible
signal sounds and the door mirrors will
fold* in.

Confirmation will only be given when all doors
and the tailgate are properly closed and
locked.

NOTE
If you do not receive confirmation when
locking the vehicle, check whether a door
or the tailgate is ajar, or if this feature has
been turned off in the menu.

Unlocking confirmation

•

The turn signals will flash twice and the
door mirrors will fold* out.

Making a setting
Different alternatives for locking/unlocking
confirmation can be selected in the menus by

Optional digital instrument panel only

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade

pressing MY CAR on the center console control panel.

Message

Meaning

•

Insert car
key

Remote key not recognized
during start. Try to start the
vehicle again.

Car key
not found

PCC with keyless drive only.
Remote key not recognized
during start. Try to start the
vehicle again.

•

To activate visual confirmation: go to
Settings Car settings Light
settings and select Door lock
confirmation light and/or Unlock
confirmation light by pressing OK/
MENU.
To activate audible confirmation: go to
Settings Car settings Lock
settings and select Audible
confirmation by pressing OK/MENU.

See page 209 for a description of the menu
system.

Immobilizer (start inhibitor)
Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle
contains a coded transponder. The code in
the key is transmitted to an antenna in the
ignition slot where it is compared to the code
stored in the start inhibitor module. The vehicle will start only with a properly coded key. If
you misplace a key, take the other keys to a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
for reprogramming as an anti-theft measure.
The following messages (which may appear
in the instrument panel display) are related to
the immobilizer:

If the problem continues,
insert the remote key into
the ignition slot and try to
start the vehicle again.

Immobilizer Try
start
again

Remote key fault during
start. Contact an authorized
Volvo workshop.

CAUTION
Never use force when inserting the remote
key in the ignition slot. The vehicle cannot
be started if the transponder is damaged.

USA–FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following
condition: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Canada–IC: 3659A-WFS125VO
Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
See page 122 for information on starting the
vehicle.

Replacing the battery in the remote key
The batteries should be replaced if:

•

The information symbol illuminates and
Low battery in remote control. Please
change batteries. is shown in the display and/or

•

if the locks do not react after several
attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle.

NOTE
The remote key's range is normally
approximately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehicle.

See page 65 for information about replacing
the battery.

02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
Remote key/Personal Car
Communicator (PCC)* - common
functions

After a short pause, press the Unlock button
a second time within 10 seconds to unlock
the other doors and the tailgate.

This function can be changed so that all
doors unlock at the same time by pressing
My Car and going to Settings Car
settings Lock settings Change doors
unlock setting. See page 209 for a description of the menu system.
Approach lighting – As you approach
the vehicle, press the button on the remote
key to light the interior lighting, parking lights,
license plate lighting and the lights in the door
mirrors*.

Personal Car Communicator (PCC)*

Lock
Standard remote key

Unlock

Lock

Approach lighting

Unlock

Tailgate unlock

Approach lighting

Panic alarm

Tailgate unlock

Information button (see page 62)

Panic alarm

These lights will switch off automatically after
30, 60 or 90 seconds. See page 209 for a
description of the menu system.

Buttons on the remote
Lock – Press the Lock button on the
remote once to lock all doors and the tailgate.
The turn signals will flash once to confirm
locking.

Unlock tailgate – Press the button twice
within several seconds to disarm the alarm
system (the alarm indicator light on the dashboard will go out), and unlock only the tailgate. Pressing this button for several seconds
also opens the tailgate on models equipped
with the optional power tailgate.

Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the
remote once to unlock the driver's door.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
NOTE
02

NOTE

As an added safety precaution, the parking
lights will come on automatically for a
short period when the tailgate has been
opened.

Buildings or other obstacles may interfere
with the function of the remote key. The
vehicle can also be locked or unlocked
with the key blade, see page 64.

After closing, the tailgate will not automatically relock. Press Lock to relock it and rearm
the alarm.

If the remote key is removed from the vehicle
while the engine is running or if the ignition is
in mode I or II and all of the doors are closed,
a message will appear in the instrument panel
display and there will be an audible signal.

See also the section "Unlocking the tailgate
from the passenger compartment."
Panic alarm – This button can be used
to attract attention during emergency situations.
To activate the panic alarm, press and hold
this button for at least 3 seconds or press it
twice within 3 seconds. The turn signals and
horn will be activated. The panic alarm will
stop automatically after 2 minutes and
45 seconds.

When the remote key is returned to the vehicle, the message will be erased and the audible signal will stop after one of the following
has been done:

•

The remote key is inserted in the ignition
slot

•

The vehicle's speed exceeds 20 mph
(30 km/h)

•

The OK button on the left steering wheel
lever is pressed

To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds
and press the button again.
The Panic alarm button will not unlock the
vehicle.

Range
The remote key has a range of approximately
60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Unique functions—PCC*

Information button
Indicator lights
Pressing the information button provides certain information about the vehicle with the
help of the indicator lights.

Using the information button
1. Press the information button

2. All of the indicator lights will flash
sequentially for approximately 7 seconds
to indicate that the PCC is receiving information from the vehicle. If any of the buttons are pressed during this 7-second
period, transmission of information to the
PCC will be interrupted.

02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
Steady red light: the alarm has been triggered since the vehicle was most recently
locked.

NOTE
If none of the indicator lights flash when
the information button has been pressed
several times from different places in relation to the vehicle, contact an authorized
Volvo service technician.

The indicator lights provide information
according to the illustration:

Both red lights flash alternatively: the
alarm was triggered less than 5 minutes
ago.

Range
The PCC's lock and unlock functions have a
range of approximately 60 ft. (20 m) from the
vehicle.

NOTE

•

•
Steady green light: the vehicle is correctly
locked.
Steady yellow light: the vehicle is not
locked.

The approach lighting, panic alarm,
and the functions controlled by the
information button have a range of
approximately 300 ft (100 m) from the
vehicle.
Radio waves, buildings or other obstacles may interfere with the function of
the PCC.

or unlock the vehicle will show the vehicle's
most recently received status. The indicator
lights will not flash when the information button is pressed while the PCC is out of range.

If more than one PCC is used to lock/unlock
the vehicle, only the one used most recently
will show the correct locking status.

NOTE
If none of the indicator lights illuminate
when the information button is pressed,
this may be because the most recent
transmission between the vehicle and the
PCC was interrupted or impeded by buildings or other objects.

Keyless drive
Vehicles equipped with the optional Personal
Car Communicator have the keyless drive
function, see page 68 for detailed information.

If the vehicle does not provide confirmation
when a button has been pressed, try moving
closer and pressing the button again.

Outside of the PCC´s range
If the PCC is more than approximately 300 ft
(100 m) from the vehicle when the information
button is pressed, no new information will be
received. The PCC most recently used to lock
}}

02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
Detachable key blade
02

The key blade can be removed from the
remote key. When removed, the key blade
can be used to:

Reinserting the key blade in the remote
key
1. Hold the remote key with the slot for the
key blade up.

•

Lock/unlock the driver's door if the
remote key is not functioning properly

2. Carefully slide the key blade into its
groove.

•

Lock/unlock the glove compartment (see
page 72)

•

3. Gently press the key blade in the groove
until it clicks into place.

Override the transmission's shiftlock system (see page 130)

•

Enable/disable the private locking function (see page 67)

Unlocking the driver's door with the
detached key blade

Removing the key blade

1. Remove the key blade from the remote
key/PCC (see the previous section,
"Removing the key blade" on page 64 for
instructions).
2. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm)
straight up in the hole on the underside of
the keyhole cover.
> The cover will come off due to the
pressure exerted when the key blade is
pushed upward.
3. Insert the key blade as far as possible in
the driver's door lock. Turn the key blade
to unlock the driver's door. This will trigger the alarm.
4. To turn off the alarm, insert the remote
key in the ignition slot. This also applies
to vehicles equipped with the optional
keyless drive.
5. Press the cover back into place after the
door has been unlocked.

Driver's door keyhole cover

Slide the spring loaded catch to the side.

If the remote key/PCC* does not function normally (weak battery, etc.), the vehicle can be
unlocked with the detachable key blade.

Pull the key blade straight out of the
remote key.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade
Replacing batteries in the remote
key/PCC

Replacing the batteries

CAUTION

The battery/batteries in the remote key/PCC
should be replaced if:

•

When handling batteries, avoid touching
their contact surfaces as this could result
in poor battery function in the remote key.

The information symbol lights up and a
text appears in the information display.

and/or

•

the vehicle's locks repeatedly do not
react when a button on the remote
key/PCC is pressed within approximately
60 ft (20 m) from the vehicle.

Battery type CR 2430, 3 V (one battery in the
remote key, two batteries in the PCC)

Opening the remote key/PCC
Slide the spring loaded catch to the
side.
Pull the key blade straight out of the
remote key.
Insert a small screwdriver in the hole
behind the spring loaded catch and carefully pry up the cover.

NOTE
Turn the remote key with the buttons
upward so that the batteries do not fall out
when the cover is removed.

Note the position of the battery's (+) or (–)
sides.

Remote key (one battery)
1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old battery.
2. Insert a new one with the (+) side downward.

PCC (two batteries)
1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old batteries.
2. Insert the first new battery with the (+)
side upward.
3. Insert the plastic spacer over the battery.
Insert the second new battery on top of
the plastic spacer, with the + side downward.

Re-assembling the remote key
1. Press the remote key's cover into place.
2. Hold the remote key with the slot for the
key blade up.
}}

02 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade

3. Carefully slide the key blade into its
groove.
4. Gently press the key blade in the groove
until it clicks into place.

NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries used
in the remote control meet the UN Manual
of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section
38.3.
Batteries mounted in the key from the factory and batteries exchanged by an
authorized Volvo workshop fulfill the above
criteria.
Old batteries should be disposed of properly at a recycling center or at your Volvo
retailer.

02 Locks and alarm
Private locking
Tailgate compartment

you to block access to the glove compartment and disconnect the tailgate from the
central locking system for e.g., valet parking
or when the vehicle is brought to the retailer
for service.

Activating the private locking function
02

G017869

With the private locking function activated:

Normal locking/unlocking points

•

The vehicle's doors can be locked or
unlocked with the remote

•
•

The engine can be started

•

The tailgate cannot be unlocked or
opened with the remote

•

The rear floor hatch cannot be opened

The glove compartment cannot be
unlocked

NOTE
The floor hatch must be closed completely
before the tailgate can be closed.

Insert the key blade in the glove compartment lock.
Turn the key blade180 degrees clockwise.
Remove the key blade from the lock. A
message will appear in the instrument
panel display.

G017870

Deactivating the private locking
function

Locking/unlocking points with private locking
activated.

By utilizing the remote key with the key blade
removed, the private locking feature enables

Turn the key blade 180 degrees counterclockwise in the glove compartment lock to
deactivate private locking.
See page 72 for information on locking the
glove compartment normally, without activating the private locking function.

02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive

Keyless drive* (models with Personal
Car Communicator only)

NOTE

Keyless locking and unlocking

•

The gear selector must in the P position before the vehicle can be locked
and the alarm can be armed.

•

The buttons on the keyless drive
remote key can also be used to lock
and unlock the vehicle, see page 61
for more information.

See page 209 for a description of the menu
system.

Unlocking the vehicle with the key
blade

Both of the PCCs provided with the vehicle
have the keyless function, and additional
ones can be ordered. The system can
accommodate up to six PCCs.
Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft
(1.5 meters)

This system makes it possible to unlock and
lock the vehicle without having to press any
buttons on the Personal Car Communicators
(PCC). It is only necessary to have a keyless
drive remote key in your possession to operate the central locking system.

The red rings in the illustration indicate the
area around the vehicle that is within range of
the keyless drive antennas.

Unlocking the vehicle

•

A keyless drive remote key must be on
the same side of the vehicle as the door
to be opened, and be within 5 feet
(1.5 meters) of the door's lock or the tailgate (see the shaded areas in the illustration).

•

Pull a door handle to unlock and open the
door or pull the tailgate opening control.

The number of doors that are unlocked at the
same time can be set in the vehicle's menu
system. Press MY CAR and go to Car
settings Lock settings Keyless entry.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Keyless drive keyhole cover

If the PCC does not function normally (weak
battery, etc.), the vehicle can be unlocked
with the detachable key blade. See page 64
for instructions.

02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive
position of the driver's seat and door mirrors will be stored in the seat's memory.

Locking the vehicle

•

The next time a door is opened by a person with the same PCC in his/her possession, the driver's seat and door mirrors will automatically move to the position that they were in when the door was
most recently locked.

NOTE

Models with keyless drive have a button on the
outside door handles

The doors and the tailgate can be locked by
pressing the lock button in any of the outside
door handles.

NOTE
On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selector must be in the Park (P) position, all
doors and the tailgate must be closed and
the ignition must be switched off before
the vehicle can be locked.

Keyless drive remote key and driver's
seat/door mirror memory

•

When you leave the vehicle with a PCC in
your possession and lock any door, the

If several people carrying PCCs approach
the vehicle at the same time, the driver's
seat and door mirrors will assume the
positions they were in for the person who
opens the driver's door.

See also page 91 for information on adjusting and storing the seat's position in the seat
memory.

•
•

A door has been opened and closed

•

The OK button (see page 207 for the
location of this button) has been pressed.

The PCC has been inserted in the ignition
slot

CAUTION

•

Keyless drive remote keys should
never be left in the vehicle. In the event
of a break-in, a remote found in the
vehicle could make it possible to start
the engine.

•

Electromagnetic fields or metal
obstructions can interfere with the
keyless drive system. The remote key
should never be placed closer than
approximately 4-6 in. (10-15 cm) to
cell phones, metallic objects or e.g.,
stored in a metal briefcase.

Keyless drive information messages
If all of the PCCs are removed from the vehicle while the engine is running or if the ignition is in mode II (see page 88) and all of
the doors are closed, a message will appear
in the instrument panel display and an audible
signal will sound.
When at least one PCC has been returned to
the car, the message will be erased in the display and the audible signal will stop when:

USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952,
KR55WK48964
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
}}

02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive
CAUTION
02

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.

Location of the keyless drive
antennas

Siemens VDO
5WK48891
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
For Automobile Use
Canada – IC:267T-5WK48952,
267T-5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891
NOTE
This device complies with RSS -210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.

The keyless drive system has a number of
antennas located at various points in the
vehicle.
On the tailgate, near the wiper motor
Left rear door handle
Under the floor of the cargo area, near
the rear seat
Right rear door handle
Under the rear section of the center console
Under the front section of the center console

WARNING
People with implanted pacemakers should
not allow the pacemaker to come closer
than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless
drive system's antennas. This is to help
prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless drive system.

02 Locks and alarm
Locks
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
From outside the vehicle
The remote key locks and unlocks all of the
doors and the tailgate.

unlocked with the detachable key blade. See
page 65.

From inside the vehicle (central locking
button)

Before the vehicle can be locked from the
outside with the remote key, the driver's door
must be closed. Any other door/tailgate that
is open will be locked and the alarm will be
armed.

If the locks repeatedly do not react when the
unlock button is pressed, it may be necessary
to replace the batteries in the remote, see
page 60. In this case the vehicle can be

Press the lock button
after the front
doors have been closed.

•

Each door can be locked individually with
the lock button on the respective doors.
The door must be closed first.

Alternative locking when parking

1. Open the door.
2. Press the lock section of the button.

Be sure the remote key is outside of the
vehicle before the other doors/tailgate are
closed to help avoid locking the remote
inside the vehicle.

The first press on the unlock button unlocks
the driver's door and a second press unlocks
the other doors and the tailgate (see also
page 61). This setting can be changed in the
menu system. See page 209 for a description.

•

The central locking button on the driver's
door can also be used to lock the vehicle
when you leave it. To do so:

NOTE

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional
keyless drive system, all doors/tailgate must
be closed before the vehicle can be locked.

Locking

3. Close the door. This will lock the vehicle
completely and arm the alarm.
Central locking button

NOTE

The lock buttons on the door panel can be
used to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate at the same time. Press
to lock and
to unlock.

Unlocking
The vehicle can be unlocked from inside the
vehicle in two ways:

•
•

By pressing the unlock button

Please be aware that locking the vehicle in
this way makes it possible to lock the
remote key in the passenger compartment.
To help avoid this, lock the vehicle from
the outside by pressing the lock button on
the remote key.
If the vehicle is locked using the central
locking button, be sure that the remote key
is in your possession before closing the
door.

The door can be unlocked by pulling the
door handle once and opened by pulling
the handle again.
}}

02 Locks and alarm
Locks
Automatic relocking
02

If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automatically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will
rearm after 2 minutes unless a door or the
tailgate has been opened.

Automatic locking
When the vehicle starts to move, the doors
and tailgate can be locked automatically. This
feature can be turned on or off by pressing
MY CAR and going to Car settings Lock
settings Automatic door locking. See
page 209 for a description of the menu system.

The glove compartment can only be locked
and unlocked using the detachable key blade
in the remote key. See page 64 for information on removing the key blade from the
remote key.

Unlocking the tailgate with the remote
key
–

Press the tailgate unlock button on the
remote key to unlock (but not open1) the
tailgate. See also page 61.
> The alarm indicator light on the dashboard will go out to indicate that the
alarm is not monitoring the entire vehicle.

Insert the key blade in the glove compartment lock.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
Remove the key blade from the lock.

Locking/unlocking the tailgate

NOTE

•

If the doors are locked while the tailgate is open, the tailgate will remain
unlocked until the vehicle is relocked
by pressing the Lock button on the
remote key.

•

On keyless drive vehicles, the gear
selector must be in the Park (P) position, all doors and the tailgate must be
closed and the ignition must be
switched off before the vehicle can be
locked.

Glove compartment

Tailgate unlock button on the remote key

This button also opens, but does not close, the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate (see page 293).

02 Locks and alarm
Locks
Unlocking the tailgate from the driver's
seat

–

The alarm indicator on the dashboard will
begin flashing to show that the vehicle is
locked and that the alarm has been armed.

Press the button on the lighting panel (1)
to unlock (but not open2) the tailgate.

NOTE
The taillights will illuminate automatically
for a short period when the tailgate has
been opened.

Locking the tailgate with the remote
key
Press the lock button (
See also page 61

) on the remote.

This button also opens, but does not close, the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate (see page 293).

02 Locks and alarm
Alarm
The alarm system
02

Arming the alarm
–

When armed, the alarm continuously monitors a number of points on the vehicle. The
following conditions will trigger the alarm:

Press the Lock button on the remote key.
One long flash of the turn signals will confirm that the alarm is armed.

•
•
•
•
•

The hood is forced open.

Alarm confirmation settings can be changed
in MY CAR, under Car settings Lock
settings Keyless entry. See page 209 for
a description of the menu system.

The tailgate is forced open.

USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)

•

The battery is disconnected (while the
alarm is armed).

•

A door is forced open.
The ignition slot is tampered with.
An attempt is made to start the vehicle
with a non-approved key (a key not
coded to the car's ignition).

The siren is disconnected when the alarm
is disarmed.

A message will appear in the information display if a fault should occur in the alarm system. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.

NOTE
Do not attempt to repair any of the components in the alarm system yourself. This
could affect the insurance policy on the
vehicle.

The alarm indicator light

The alarm is automatically armed whenever
the vehicle is locked with the remote key or
optional Personal Car Communicator.

The status of the alarm system is indicated by
the red indicator light on the dashboard (see
illustration):

•
•
•

Indicator light off: the alarm is not armed
The indicator light flashes at one-second
intervals: the alarm is armed
The indicator light flashes rapidly before
the remote key is inserted in the ignition
slot and the ignition is put in mode I: the
alarm has been triggered.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.

Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)
This device is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.

02 Locks and alarm
Alarm
Disarming the alarm

Remote key not functioning

–

If the remote key is not functioning properly,
the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle
can be started as follows:

Press the Unlock button on the remote
key.
> Two short flashes from the car's direction indicators confirm that the alarm
has been deactivated and that all
doors are unlocked.

Turning off (stopping) the alarm

1. Open the driver's door with the key blade
(see page 64 for information on detaching
the key blade).
> This will trigger the alarm.

If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by
pressing the Unlock button on the remote key
or by inserting the remote key in the ignition
slot. Two short flashes from the car's direction indicators confirm that the alarm has
been turned off.

Other alarm-related functions
Automatic re-arming
If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automatically re-engage (re-lock) and the alarm
will re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or
the tailgate has been opened.

Audible/visual alarm signal

•

An audible alarm signal is given by a battery powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts
for 30 seconds.

•

The visual alarm signal is given by flashing all turn signals for approximately
5 minutes or until the alarm is turned off.

2. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot
(also on vehicles with the optional keyless
drive). This will turn off the alarm.
3. Start the engine (see page 122 for
instructions).

Instruments and controls........................................................................ 78
Ignition modes........................................................................................ 88
Seats....................................................................................................... 90
Steering wheel........................................................................................ 97
Lighting................................................................................................... 99
Wipers and washers.............................................................................. 107
Windows............................................................................................... 110
Mirrors................................................................................................... 112
Digial compass*.................................................................................... 115
Power moonroof* ................................................................................. 117
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*..................................................
Starting the engine................................................................................
Transmission.........................................................................................
Eco Guide* and Power Meter*..............................................................
Eco* ......................................................................................................
Start/Stop* ...........................................................................................
Brakes...................................................................................................
Parking brake........................................................................................
Hill Descent Control (HDC)*..................................................................

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

119
122
127
132
134
137
141
144
147

YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT

03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Instrument overview

03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Instrument panel information displays

Function

Page

Function

Page

Controls for menus and
messages, turn signals,
high/low beams, trip
computer

209,
104,
99, 225

In-door control panels
(power windows, mirrors,
central locking button,
power child safety locks)

110,
112,
71,54

Paddles for manually
shifting gears*

129

Controls for the infotainment system and menus

209,
240, 218

Cruise control

156

Climate system controls

218

Horn, airbag

97, 22

Gear selector

127

Main instrument panel

232

Infotainment system/
Bluetooth hands-free
controls

240,
269

Controls for active chassis (Four-C)*
Wipers and washers

107,
108

START/STOP ENGINE
button

Steering wheel adjustment

Ignition slot

Parking brake

144

Display for infotainment
system functions and
menus

240,
207

Hood opening control

344
90

Hazard warning flashers

104

Power seat* adjustment
controls

Door handle

–

Lighting panel, buttons
for opening fuel filler
door and unlocking the
tailgate

99,
290, 72

Information displays: analog instrument panel

Information displays: digital instrument panel*

These displays show information on some of
the vehicle's functions, such as cruise con}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls

trol, the trip computer and messages. The
information is shown with text and symbols.

needle moves on the scale, the more
economically the vehicle is being driven.

More detailed information can be found in the
descriptions of the functions that use the
information displays.

Speedometer

Gauges and indicators: analog
instrument panel

Gear indicator: Shows the currently
selected gear

Tachometer: Shows engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm)

Gauges and indicators: digital
instrument panel*
Different themes (display alternatives) can be
selected for the digital instrument panel:

•
•
•

Fuel gauge: When the indicator shows
one white marking1, a yellow indicator
light will illuminate to indicate a low fuel
level. See also 225 and 288 for additional information.

Elegance
Eco
Performance

To change themes, press the OK button on
the left steering wheel lever and use the
thumb wheel to scroll to Themes. Press OK
to confirm your choice.

Eco meter: Indicates how economically
the vehicle is being driven. The higher the

When the message Distance to empty fuel tank: shows "----", the marker turns red

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Theme Elegance: gauges and indicators

Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows
one white marking, a yellow indicator light
will illuminate to indicate a low fuel level.
See also 225 and 288 for additional
information.
Coolant temperature gauge
Speedometer
Tachometer (engine speed in thousands
of revolutions per minute (rpm))
Gear indicator: Shows the currently
selected gear

03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols

Theme Eco: gauges and indicators

Theme Performance: gauges and indicators

Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows a
white marking, a yellow indicator light will
illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. See
also 225 and 288 for additional information.

Eco Guide (see page 132)

Coolant temperature gauge

Speedometer

Tachometer (engine speed in thousands
of revolutions per minute (rpm))

Tachometer (shows engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute
(rpm))

Gear indicator: Shows the currently
selected gear

Indicator and warning symbols: analog instrument panel

Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
Warning symbols

Power Meter (see page 132).
Gear indicator: Shows the currently
selected gear

}}

03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
cate a fault in the vehicle's emissions system,
and the symbol for low oil pressure.

Symbol

Left turn signal indicator

Some of the symbols shown may not be
available in all markets or models.

Right turn signal indicator

Indicator symbols
03

Symbol

Description
Fault in the Active Bending
Light (ABL)*system
Malfunction indicator light

Indicator and warning symbols: digital instrument
panel

Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols

Rear fog lights on

Warning symbols

Stability system

Function check
All indicator and warning symbols light up in
ignition mode II or when the engine is started.
When the engine has started, all the symbols
should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is
disengaged.
If the engine does not start or if the function
check is carried out in ignition mode II, all
symbols go out after 5 seconds except the
malfunction indicator light, which may indi-

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The stability system's Sport
mode is activated
Low fuel level
Information symbol, read the
text displayed in the instrument
panel
High beam indicator

Description

Tire pressure monitoring sensor
(TPMS)A
A

Option in Canada

Fault in the Active Bending Light
(ABL) system
This symbol will illuminate if there is a fault in
the ABL system. See page 102 for more
information about this system.

Malfunction Indicator Light
As you drive, a computer called On-Board
Diagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle's
engine, transmission, electrical and emission
systems.
The malfunction indicator light will illuminate if
the computer senses a condition that potentially may need correcting. When this happens, please have your vehicle checked by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
as soon as possible.
A malfunction indicator light may have many
causes. Sometimes, you may not notice a

03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
change in your car's behavior. Even so, an
uncorrected condition could hurt fuel economy, emission controls, and drivability.
Extended driving without correcting the cause
could even damage other components in
your vehicle.
This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is
not closed tightly or if the engine was running
while the vehicle was refueled.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
If the warning light comes on, there may be a
malfunction in the ABS system (the standard
braking system will still function). Check the
system by:
1. Stopping in a safe place and switching off
the ignition.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If the warning light goes off, no further
action is required.
If the indicator light remains on, the vehicle
should be driven to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for inspection, see
page 141 for additional information.

Rear fog lights
This symbol indicates that the rear fog lights
are on.

Stability system

High beam indicator

This indicator symbol flashes when the DSTC
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control system) is actively working to stabilize the vehicle, see page 152 for more detailed information.

This symbol illuminates when the high beam
headlights are on, or if the high beam flash
function is used.

Left turn signal indicator
Right turn signal indicator

Sport mode
This symbol illuminates to indicate that the
stability system's Sport mode has been activated to help provide maximum tractive force,
for example when driving with snow chains,
or driving in deep snow or loose sand.

Low fuel level
When this light comes on, the vehicle should
be refueled as soon as possible. See page
288 for information about fuel and refueling.

Information symbol
The information symbol lights up and a text
message is displayed to provide the driver
with necessary information about one of the
vehicle's systems. The message can be
erased and the symbol can be turned off by
pressing the OK button (see page 207 for
information) or this will take place automatically after a short time (the length of time varies, depending on the function affected).
The information symbol may also illuminate
together with other symbols.

NOTE

•

Both turn signal indicators will flash
when the hazard warning flashers are
used.

•

If either of these indicators flash faster
than normal, the direction indicators
are not functioning properly.

Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)*
This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire
pressure in one or more tires is low, see
page 334 for detailed information.

Warning symbols

Symbol

Description
Low oil pressure
Parking brake applied
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Symbol

Description
SRS airbags
Seat belt reminder

Generator not charging
Fault in the brake system
Warning symbol, read the text
displayed in the instrument
panel

Low oil pressure
If the light comes on while driving, stop the
vehicle, stop the engine immediately, and
check the engine oil level. Add oil if necessary. If the oil level is normal and the light
stays on after restart, have the vehicle towed
to the nearest trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.

Parking brake applied
This symbol flashes while the brake is being
applied and then glows steadily when the
parking brake has been set.
See page 144 for more information about
using the parking brake.

Airbags – SRS
If this light comes on while the vehicle is
being driven, or remains on for longer than
approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle
has been started, the SRS system's diagnostic functions have detected a fault in a seat
belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag, side
impact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain.
Have the system(s) inspected by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician as
soon as possible.
See page 21 for more information about the
airbag system.

Seat belt reminder
This symbol comes on for approximately
6 seconds if the driver has not fastened his or
her seat belt.

Generator not charging
This symbol comes on during driving if a fault
has occurred in the electrical system. Contact
an authorized Volvo workshop.

Engine temperature
Engine overheating can result from low oil or
coolant levels, towing or hard driving at high
heat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction.
Engine overheating will be signaled with text
and a red warning triangle in the middle of the
instrument display. The exact text will depend
on the degree of overheating. It may range

from High engine temp Reduce speed to
High engine temp Stop engine. If appropriate, other messages, such as Coolant level
low, Stop safely will also be displayed. If
your engine does overheat so that you must
stop the engine, always allow the engine to
cool before attempting to check oil and coolant levels.
See page 348 for more information.

Fault in brake system
If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may
be too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place
and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 348. If the level in the reservoir
is below MIN, the vehicle should be transported to an authorized Volvo workshop to have
the brake system checked.
and
symbols come on
If the
at the same time, there may be a fault in the
brake force distribution system.
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn
off the engine.
2. Restart the engine.

•

If both symbols extinguish, continue driving.

•

If the symbols remain on, check the level
in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 348.
If the brake fluid level is normal but the

03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls

•

symbols are still lit, the vehicle can be
driven, with great care, to an authorized
Volvo workshop to have the brake system
checked.

page 207. The warning symbol can also
come on in conjunction with other symbols.

If the level in the reservoir is below MIN,
the vehicle should be transported to an
authorized Volvo workshop to have the
brake system checked.

1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the
vehicle further.

WARNING

•

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark
in the reservoir or if a warning message is displayed in the text window:
DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician and have the brake
system inspected.
and
symbols
If the
are on at the same time, there is a risk
of reduced vehicle stability.

Warning symbol
The red warning symbol lights up to indicate
a problem related to safety and/or drivability.
A message will also appear in the instrument
panel. The symbol remains visible until the
fault has been rectified but the text message
can be cleared with the OK button, see
2

Action:

2. Read the information on the information
display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display.
Clear the message using OK.

Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors is not closed properly, the
information or warning symbol illuminates
(depending on the vehicle's speed), a graphic
will be displayed in instrument panel and an
explanatory text message2 will also be displayed in the instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and
close the door.

minates.

nates.

If the hood is not closed properly, the warning symbol illuminates, a graphic will be displayed in instrument panel and an explanatory text message2 will also be displayed in
the instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in a
safe place as soon as possible and close the
hood.

If the tailgate is not closed properly, the
information symbol illuminates and a graphic
will be displayed in instrument panel. Stop
the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and close the tailgate.

Ambient temperature sensor

If the vehicle is driven at a speed
lower than approximately 5 mph
(7 km/h), the information symbol illuIf the vehicle is driven at a speed
higher than approximately 5 mph
(7 km/h), the warning symbol illumi-

Location of the ambient temperature sensor, A:
digital instrument panel*, B: analog instrument
panel

Text message applies only to models with the optional digital instrument panel

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Odometer display

NOTE

When the ambient temperature is between
23° and 36 °F (–5° and +2 °C), a snowflake
symbol will be displayed next to the temperature. This symbol serves as a warning
for possible slippery road surfaces. Please
note that this symbol does not indicate a
fault with your vehicle.

The trip odometers T1 and T2 are used to
measure short distances. The distance is
shown in the display.

At low speeds or when the vehicle is not
moving, the temperature readings may be
slightly higher than the actual ambient
temperature.

Press and hold the RESET button on the left
steering wheel lever for at least 1 second to
reset the selected trip odometer4.

Trip odometers

Setting the clock
The clock can be set in the MY CAR menu
system. See page 209 for additional information about these menus.

Turn the thumb wheel on the left steering
wheel lever to display the desired trip odometer.

Clock

1. Go to Settings
Time.

System options

2. The hour box will be selected. Press OK
to activate this box.
3. Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and
press OK to confirm the setting and
deactivate this box.

Trip odometer3
3
4
5

Clock, digital instrument panel*

4. Turn TUNE to select the minute box (A)
and press OK to activate this box (B).

Display5

The trip odometer will be displayed differently in analog and digital instrument panels
Models with a digital information panel: press and hold RESET for more than approximately 4 seconds to reset all trip computer information
Models with an analog instrument panel: the time will be displayed in the center of the instrument panel

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
5. Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and
press OK to confirm the setting and
deactivate this box.
6. Turn TUNE to select OK and press OK to
complete the procedure.
Use the menu selection Settings System
options Time format to display the time in
the 24-hour format or the 12-hour format
(AM/PM).

03 Your driving environment
Ignition modes
Inserting and removing the remote
key

Removing the remote key
The remote key can be removed from the
ignition slot by pulling it out.

Mode
0

The odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated.
Power seats* can be adjusted
and the infotainment system can
be used for a limited time (to minimize battery drain see
page 240).

The Moonroof*, power windows,
12-volt sockets in the passenger
compartment, navigation system*, climate system blower,
windshield wipers can be used.

The headlights/taillights illuminate. Warning/indicator lights illuminate for 5 seconds. Other systems are activated. However, the
heated seats* and heated rear
window function can only be activated when the engine is running.
Mode II should only be used for
very short periods to help avoid
draining the battery.

Functions
The remote key has 3 modes: 0, I, and II that
can be used without starting the engine. The
following table shows examples of which
functions are available in the respective
modes.

NOTE
Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOP
ENGINE button.

Inserting the remote

To access ignition modes I or II without
starting the engine, the brake pedal must
not be depressed.

key1

Holding the end of the remote key with the
base of the key blade, insert the remote key
into the ignition slot as shown in the illustration and press it in as far as possible.

CAUTION
Foreign objects in the ignition slot can
impair function or cause damage.

Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Function

03 Your driving environment
Ignition modes
Ignition modes
Ignition mode 0
–

The vehicle is unlocked.

Emergency towing
See page 307 for important information
about the remote key when the vehicle is
being towed.

Ignition mode I
–

With the remote key fully pressed into the
ignition slot1, press START/STOP
ENGINE briefly.

Ignition mode II
–

With the remote key fully pressed into the
ignition slot1, press START/STOP
ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds.

Returning to mode 0
To return to mode 0 from mode II or I, press
START/STOP ENGINE briefly.

Starting and stopping the engine
See page 122 for information on starting the
engine and switching it off.

Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

03 Your driving environment
Seats
Front seats

WARNING

•

Do not adjust the seat while driving.
The seat should be adjusted so that
the brake pedal can be depressed
fully. In addition, position the seat as
far rearward as comfort and control
allow.

The front passenger seat backrest can be
folded to a horizontal position to make room
for a long load. Fold the backrest as follows:
Move the seat as far back and down as
possible.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest.

Check that the seat is securely locked
into position after adjusting.

Without releasing the catches, push the
backrest forward.

Folding the front seat backrest*

Move the seat as far forward as possible
so that the head restraint slides under the
glove compartment.

Lumbar support: turn the control for
firmer or softer lumbar support.
Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and
move the seat to the position of your
choice.
Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion,
pump up/down.
Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the
angle of the backrest.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Control panel for power seat*.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

•

When transporting long objects, cover
sharp edges on the load to help prevent injury to occupants. Secure the
load to help prevent shifting during
sudden stops.

•

When the seat's backrest is returned
to the upright position, push and pull it
to be sure that it is securely locked in
this position.

03 Your driving environment
Seats
NOTE

Button for storing a position

•

Only one of the power seat's controls
can be used at the same time.

M (memory) button

•

The power seats have an overload
protector that activates if a seat is
blocked by any object. If this occurs,
switch off the ignition (key in position 0) and wait for a short period
before operating the seat again.

Power seat1

Power seat memory function
Power seat adjustment controls

Seat forward/rearward and up/down

The following example explains how button
(1) can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3)
are programmed in the same way.
To program (store) a seat and door mirror
position in button (1):

3. With the memory button depressed,
press button (1) briefly to store the current position for the seat/mirrors.

Operation

Power seat memory buttons

Button for storing a position
Button for storing a position

Optional on certain models

2. Press and hold down the M (memory)
button (4).

Backrest tilt

Three different seating and door mirror positions can be stored in the driver seat's memory.

1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to the
desired positions using the seat and mirror adjustment controls.

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

The seats can be adjusted for a short period
after unlocking the door with the remote control without the key in the ignition slot. Seat
adjustment is normally made when the ignition is on and can always be made when the
engine is running.

Programming the seat's memory

To move the seat and mirrors to the position that they were in when a button was
programmed:
–

Press and hold down button (1) until the
seat and mirrors stop moving.

}}

03 Your driving environment
Seats
NOTE
As a safety precaution, the seat will stop
automatically if the button is released
before the seat has reached the preset
position.
03

Remote key memory and the power
driver's seat* and door mirrors2

1. Insert a remote key in the ignition slot.
2. Go into the MY CAR menu and go to
Settings Car settings Car key
memory
3. To activate the remote key memory feature, press ENTER (check the box).
> The remote key is now ready to store
the position of the power driver's seat
and door mirrors.
Repeat this procedure for each of the vehicle's remote keys.
See page 209 for a description of the menu
system.

Storing the positions of the power
driver's seat/mirrors in the remote key
1. Move the seat and door mirrors to the
desired position using the seat and mirror
adjustment controls.
Each remote key has a feature that enables it
to store (remember) the position of the power
driver's seat and door mirrors when the vehicle is locked with that remote key.
This feature has to be activated for each of
the remote keys used in the vehicle as follows:

This information also applies to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

2. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors with
the remote key (or close the driver's door
and press the lock button on the door
handle with the remote key in your possession on vehicles with the optional keyless drive).
> The positions of the power driver's
seat and door mirrors are now stored
in the remote key's memory.

NOTE
The remote key's memory feature and the
power driver's seat memory function (the
settings made using the buttons on the
side of the seat, see the section "Power
seat memory function" on page 91) work
independently of each other.

Returning the seat/mirrors to the stored
positions
To move the seat and door mirrors to the
position stored in the remote key:
1. Unlock the driver's door with the same
remote key (the one used to lock the
doors). For models equipped with the
optional keyless drive, you must have the
same remote key in your possession.
2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes.

03 Your driving environment
Seats
The driver's seat and door mirrors will automatically move to the position in which you
left them (if the vehicle has been unlocked
with one of the other keys and new seat/
mirror adjustments have been made).

The seat will move to this position
even if someone else has moved it to a
different position and locked the vehicle with a different remote key.

•

This feature will work in the same way
with all of the remote keys that you
use with your vehicle.

Rear center head restraint

WARNING

•

NOTE

•

Rear seats

Emergency stop

Because the driver's seat can be
adjusted with the ignition off, children
should never be left unattended in the
vehicle.

•

Movement of the seat can be STOPPED at any time by pressing any button on the power seat control panel.

•

Do not adjust the seat while driving.
The seat should be adjusted so that
the brake pedal can be depressed
fully. In addition, position the seat as
far rearward as comfort and control
allow.

•

The seat rails on the floor must not be
obstructed in any way when the seat is
in motion.

Heated/ventilated seats*
See page 218.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Seats
The center head restraint should be adjusted
according to the passenger's height. The
restraint should be carefully adjusted to support the occupant's head.

•
•

Manually folding down the rear seat's
outboard head restraints

Pull the head restraint up as required.
To lower, press and hold the button
(located at the center, between the backrest and the head restraint) while pressing
the head restrain down carefully.

WARNING
For safety reasons, no one should be
allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat
positions if the head restraints are folded
down. If these positions are occupied, the
head restraints should be in the upright
(fixed) position.

WARNING
The center rear seat head restraint should
only be in its lowest position when this
seat is NOT occupied. When the center
position is occupied, the head restraint
should be correctly adjusted to the passenger’s height. The upper edge of the
head restraint should be at least on a level
with the upper-most point of the seat
occupant's ear.

CAUTION
The rear head restraints should not be
kept folded down for prolonged periods.
This could result in pressure marks in
leather upholstery.

•

Pull the handle closest to the head
restraint to fold it down.

•

To return the head restraint to the upright
position, push it up until it clicks into
place.

Automatically folding down the rear
seat’s outboard head restraints

NOTE

•

The head restraint must be returned to
the upright position manually.

•

The outboard head restraints cannot
be folded down on models that are not
equipped with this button.

1. The ignition must be in mode II.

03 Your driving environment

2. Press the button to lower the rear head
restraints for improved visibility.

NOTE

•

The head restraint must be returned to
the upright position manually.

•

The outboard head restraints cannot
be folded down on models that are not
equipped with this button.

CAUTION
The rear head restraints should not be
kept folded down for prolonged periods.
This could result in pressure marks in
leather upholstery.

Folding down the rear seat backrests

•

The left (driver's side) section can be
folded down separately.

•

The center section can be folded down
separately.

•

The right (passenger's side) section can
only be folded down together with the
center section.

•

All three sections can be folded down
together.

CAUTION
To help avoid damage to the upholstery,
there should be no objects on the rear seat
and the seat belt should not be buckled
when the backrest is folded down.

G017903

Seats

Release and lower the center head
restraint (see page 93) if the center and/or
right section of the backrest is to be lowered. The outboard head restraints fold
down automatically.
Pull up the backrest release control on
the respective section(s) ( ) and fold the
section(s) down. A red indicator ( )
shows that the backrest is not locked in
the upright position.

NOTE
It may be necessary to move the front
seats forward or put their backrests in a
more upright position before folding down
the rear seat backrests.

The three sections of the rear seat backrest
can be folded down in different combinations
to make it easier to transport long objects.
}}

03 Your driving environment
Seats
WARNING

•

When one or more sections of the
backrest is returned to the upright
position, check that it is properly
locked in place by pushing and pulling
it. The red indicators should also not
be visible.

•

Return the outboard head restraints to
the upright position.

•

Long loads should always be securely
anchored to help avoid injury in the
event of a sudden stop.

•

Always turn the engine off and apply
the parking brake when loading/
unloading the vehicle.

•

Place the transmission in the Park (P)
position to help prevent inadvertent
movement of the gear selector.

•

On hot days, the temperature in the
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people to these high temperatures for even a short period of
time can cause heat-related injury or
death. Small children are particularly at
risk.

03 Your driving environment
Steering wheel
Adjusting

Horn

WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.

With the optional speed-dependent power
steering the level of steering force can be
adjusted, see page 232.

G021138

Keypads and steering wheel paddles*

Adjusting the steering wheel

Horn

Lever for releasing/locking the steering
wheel

–

Press the steering wheel hub to sound
the horn.

Possible positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and reach:
1. Pull the lever toward you to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
3. Push back the lever to lock the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to
push into place, press the steering wheel
lightly at the same time as you push the
lever.

Steering wheel keypads and paddles*

Cruise control, see page 156. Adaptive
cruise control*, see page 158.
Paddles for manually shifting gears (Geartronic), see page 129.
Infotainment system controls, see
page 241.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Steering wheel
Electrically heated* steering wheel

Button for steering wheel heating

With the engine running, press this button
once to begin warming the steering wheel
(press again to switch off). The indicator light
in the button will illuminate when the function
is active.
This function can also be started automatically (the setting can be activated/deactivated
in the MY CAR menu) if the vehicle is cold
and the ambient temperature is below
approximately 50° F (10° C).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Lighting panel

Headlight switch positions
Daytime running lights function as follows:

the MY CAR menu system under Settings
Car settings Light settings Daytime
running lights.

With the headlight switch in the
position:

Lighting panel overview

Thumb wheel for adjusting display, instrument and "theater" lighting (see
page 102)
Rear fog lights (see page 103)

•

In the US: the daytime running lights will
be off

•

In Canada: the daytime running lights will
be on

1
With the headlight switch in the
position and the ignition in mode II or if the
engine is running (see page 89)

•

In the US: the daytime running lights will
be off

•

In Canada: the daytime running lights will
be on

NOTE
The use of daytime running lights is recommended in the United States and is
mandatory in Canada.

With the headlight switch in the
position:

•

The daytime running lights will be off and
the low beam headlights will be on

Headlight switch
Volvo recommends using the
tion whenever possible.

posi-

With the headlight switch in the
position:

•

The daytime running lights will be on (the
low beam headlights will automatically
switch on in dark conditions)

US models only: The daytime running lights
in

The parking lights will be on in this position, even if the ignition is switched off.

mode can be switched on or off in

}}

03 Your driving environment
Lighting
High/low beam headlights

•

Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to
position 2 and release it to toggle
between low and high beams.

High beam flash
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to
position 1. The high beams come on until the
lever is released.

Active high beams – AHB*

Headlight switch and steering wheel lever

High beam flash
Toggle between high and low beams

Low beam headlights
When the engine is started, the low beams
are activated automatically if the headlight
control is in position

Continuous high beam headlights
With the headlight switch in the
(in
dark conditions only, when the daytime running lights have automatically switched off
and the low beam headlights have switched
on) or

100

AHB is a feature that uses a camera at the
upper edge of the windshield to detect the
headlights of oncoming vehicles or the taillights of a vehicle directly ahead. When this
happens, the headlights will automatically
switch from high beams to low beams. When
the camera no longer detects the headlights/
taillights of other vehicles, your headlights will
switch back to high beams after several seconds.
To activate AHB:

•

Turn the headlight control to the
position.

The feature will begin functioning if the engine
has been running for at least 20 seconds and
the vehicle's speed is at least 12 mph
(20 km/h).

position:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Headlight switch in the AUTO position

Switch AHB on or off by pulling the left steering wheel lever rearward (toward the steering
wheel) as far as possible and releasing it. If
AHB is switched off while the high beams are
on, the headlights will change to low beams.

03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Models with an analog instrument panel
symbol
When AHB is activated, the
will illuminate in the instrument panel. The

symbol will go out when these messages are displayed.

high beam indicator (
) in the instrument
panel will also illuminate when the high
beams are on.

AHB may be temporarily unavailable (e.g., in
heavy fog or rain). When AHB becomes active
again or if the sensors in the windshield are
no longer obscured, the messages will disap-

Models with a digital instrument panel

pear and the

When AHB is activated,
will illuminate
as a white symbol in the instrument panel.
When the high beams are on, the symbol will
change to blue.

NOTE

•

Keep the windshield in front of the
camera free of ice, snow, dirt, etc.

•

Do not mount or in any way attach
anything on the windshield that could
obstruct the camera.

If Active high beam Temporary
unavailable Switch manually is displayed in
the instrument panel, switching between high
and low beams will have to be done manually. However, the light switch can remain in
the AUTO position. The same applies if
Windscreen Sensors blocked is displayed
and the

symbol will illuminate.

CAUTION
In the following situations, it may be necessary to switch between high and low
beams manually:

•
•
•
•
•
•

In heavy fog or rain
In blowing snow or slush
In freezing rain
In areas with dim street lighting
When oncoming vehicles have dim
front lighting

•

If there are pedestrians on or near the
road

•

If there are reflective objects, such as
signs, near the road

•

When oncoming vehicles' lights are
obscured by e.g., fences, bushes, etc.

•

When there are vehicles on connecting
roads

•
•

In bright moonlight

At the top of hills or in dips in the road
In sharp curves

See page182 for more information about the
camera's limitations.

symbol is displayed. The
}}

101

03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Tunnel detection (models with the rain
sensor* only)

The rain sensor reacts to the change in lighting conditions when, for example, the vehicle
enters a tunnel and the tunnel detection feature will then activate the low beam headlights. The low beams will be switched off
approx. 20 seconds after the vehicle leaves
the tunnel.
The rain sensor does not have to be activated
for tunnel detection to function.

Active Bending Lights (ABL)*

When this function is activated, the headlight
beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve
according to movements of the steering
wheel (see the right-pointing beam in the
illustration).
ABL is activated automatically2 when the
engine is started.
The function can be deactivated/reactivated
in the MY CAR menu system under My XC70
Active Bending Lights or under Settings
Car settings Light settings Active
Bending Lights.
See page 209 for a description of the menu
system.

NOTE
This function is only active in twilight or
dark conditions, and only when the vehicle
is in motion.

Symbol

Display

Explanation

Headlamp
failure
Service
required

The system is
not functioning
properly and
should be
inspected/
repaired by a
trained and
qualified Volvo
service technician.

Auxiliary lights*
If the vehicle is fitted with auxiliary lights, the
driver can use the MY CAR menu system to
choose to deactivate and turn these lights on
and off along with the high beam headlights3.

Instrument and "theater" lighting
Instrument lighting

If a fault should occur in the system, the symbol will illuminate and a message will be displayed as shown in the table.
Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light
function deactivated (left) and activated (right)

2
3

102

Illumination of the display and instrument
lights will vary, depending on ignition mode
(see page 88).
The display lighting is automatically subdued
in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the
thumb wheel.

The factory default setting is on.
The auxiliary lights must be connected to the vehicle's electrical system, which should only be done by a trained and authorized Volvo service technician. See page 209 for more information
about the menu system.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Lighting
The intensity of the instrument lighting is
adjusted with the thumb wheel.

"Theater" lighting
When the overhead courtesy lighting has
gone out and the engine is running, several
LEDs located near the roof console illuminate
to provide faint lighting for the occupants of
the front seats. This lighting goes out just
after the overhead courtesy lighting when the
vehicle is locked.

Parking lights

Canadian models: If the ignition is in position
II or the engine is running, the daytime running lights will also be on.
With the headlight switch in this position, the
parking lights will remain on even when the
ignition is switched off.
In dark ambient lighting conditions, the rear
parking lights also illuminate when the tailgate
is opened to alert anyone traveling behind
your vehicle. This happens regardless of the
position that the headlight control is in or
which mode the ignition is in.

Rear fog lights

The rear fog lights will only function in combination with the high/low beam headlights.
–

Press the button to switch the rear fog
lights on/off.
> The rear fog light indicator symbol
on the instrument panel and the
light in the button illuminate when the
rear fog lights are switched on.

NOTE
The rear fog lights are considerably
brighter than the normal taillights and
should be used only when conditions such
as fog, rain, snow, smoke or dust reduce
visibility for other vehicles to less than
500 ft. (150 meters).

NOTE

Headlight switch in the parking light position

Condensation may form temporarily on the
inside of the lenses of exterior lights such
as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This
is normal and the lights are designed to
withstand moisture. Normally, condensation will dissipate after the lights have been
on for a short time.

Turn the headlight switch to the
position (the license plate lighting comes on at the
same time).
}}

103

03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Hazard warning flashers

Turn signals

NOTE

•

This automatic flashing sequence can
be interrupted by immediately moving
the lever in the opposite direction.

•

If the turn signal indicator flashes
faster than normal, check for a
burned-out turn signal bulb.

Interior lighting, front

Location of the hazard warning flasher button

Turn signals

The hazard warning flasher should be used to
indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic
hazard.

When changing lanes

To activate the flashers, press the button
in the center dash. Press the button again
to turn off the flashers.

NOTE

104

•

Regulations regarding the use of the
hazard warning flasher may vary,
depending on where you live.

•

The hazard warning flashers will be
activated automatically if an airbag
deploys.

G021149

–

The driver can automatically flash the turn
signals 3 times by moving the turn signal
lever up or down to the first position and
releasing it.

When turning
Move the lever as far up or down as possible to start the turn signals. The turn signals
will be cancelled automatically by the movement of the steering wheel, or the lever can
be returned to its initial position by hand.

Light switches, front roof lighting

Drivers side front reading light, on/off
Passenger's side front reading light,
on/off
Overhead courtesy lighting.

03 Your driving environment
Lighting
The lighting in the front part of the passenger
compartment is controlled with the buttons
(1) and (2) in the roof console.

The lights are switched on or off by pressing
each respective button.

Switch (3) has three positions for all passenger compartment lighting:

The courtesy lights/door step lighting switch
on/off automatically when one of the front
doors is opened/closed.

•

Off: right side depressed, automatic lighting off.

•

Neutral position: automatic lighting is
on.

•

On – left side depressed, passenger
compartment lighting on.

Courtesy lights/door step lighting*

Glove compartment lighting

Overhead courtesy lighting

Home safe lighting

•

the vehicle is unlocked from the outside
with the key or remote control

•

the engine is switched off and the ignition
is in mode 0.

G021150

The lighting switches off when:

•
•

the engine is started
the vehicle is locked from the outside.

The lighting comes on and remains on for two
minutes if one of the doors is open.

Cargo area lighting
The cargo area lighting comes on automatically when the tailgate is opened.

The lighting comes on and remains on for
30 seconds if:

Rear reading lights

If the lighting is switched on manually and the
vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will
switch off automatically after one minute.

The glove compartment lighting switches
on/off automatically when the lid is opened/
closed.
The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and off automatically when button (3) is in the neutral position.

Interior lighting, rear

The passenger compartment lighting can be
switched on and off manually within
30 minutes after the vehicle has been
unlocked.

When you leave your vehicle at night, you can
make use of the home safe lighting function
to illuminate the area in front of the vehicle.
1. Remove the key from the ignition slot to
put the ignition in mode 0 (see page 89
for information about the ignition modes).
2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible
towards the steering wheel and release it.
3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.
The headlights, parking lights, turn signals,
lights in the door mirrors, license plate lights,
and footwell lighting will illuminate and remain
on for 30 4, 60 or 90 seconds. The time interval can be set in MY CAR under Settings

Factory setting

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

105

03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Car settings Light settings Home safe
light duration. See page 209 for a description of the menu system.

Approach lighting
03

Approach lighting is activated by pressing the
approach light button on the remote key (see
the illustration on page 61).
When the function has been activated, the
parking lights, indicator lights, door mirror
lights, license plate lighting, dome lighting
and door step lighting come on.
The time interval for this lighting can be set
by pressing MY CAR and going to Car
settings Light settings Approach light
duration. See page 209 for a description of
the menu system.

106

03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washers
Windshield wipers/washers

Windshield wipers off

Rain sensor*

Move the lever to position 0 to
switch off the windshield wipers.

Single sweep
Move the lever upward from position 0 to sweep the windshield one
stroke at a time for as long as the
lever is held up.

Rain sensor* on/off

With the lever in this position, you
can set the wiper interval by twisting
the thumb wheel upward to increase
wiper speed or downward to decrease the
speed.

Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency

Continuous wiping

CAUTION

•

Use ample washer fluid when washing
the windshield. The windshield should
be thoroughly wet when the wipers are
in operation.
Before using the wipers, ice and snow
should be removed from the windshield/rear window. Be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen in place.

NOTE

Intermittent wiping

Windshield wipers and washers

The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper
speed according to the amount of water on
the windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted moving the thumb wheel
up (the wipers will sweep the windshield more
frequently) or down (the wipers will sweep the
windshield less frequently).

The wipers will make an extra sweep each
time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward.

When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol
will illuminate in the instrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivity

The wipers operate at normal
speed.
The wipers operate at high speed.

When activating the rain sensor, the vehicle
must be running or in ignition mode II and the
windshield wiper lever must be in position 0
or in the single sweep position.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but-

Windshield wiper service position
The windshield wipers must be in the service
position before the wiper blades can be
cleaned or replaced. See page 356 for additional information.

ton
. The windshield wipers will make
one sweep.
Press the lever up for the wipers to make an
extra sweep. The rain sensor returns to active
mode when the stalk is released back to
position 0.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

107

03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washers
Deactivating
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the
or press the lever down to
button
another wiper position.
03

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the key is removed from the ignition
slot or five minutes after the ignition has been
switched off.

CAUTION
The rain sensor should be deactivated
when washing the car in an automatic car
wash, etc. If the rain sensor function is left
on, the wipers will start inadvertently in the
car wash and could be damaged.

Move the lever toward the steering wheel to
start the windshield and headlight washers.
After the lever is released the wipers make
several extra sweeps.

CAUTION

•

Use ample washer fluid when washing
the windshield. The windshield should
be thoroughly wet when the wipers are
in operation.

•

When approx. 1 US quart (1 liter) of
washer fluid remains in the reservoir,
the headlights will no longer be
washed. A text message will also be
displayed to remind the driver to fill the
washer fluid reservoir.

Heated washer nozzles*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically
in cold weather to help prevent the washer
fluid from freezing.

High-pressure headlight washing*
High-pressure headlight washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid,
the headlights are washed using two alternatives:

•

Low/high beam headlights on. The
headlights will be washed the first time
the windshield is washed. Thereafter, the
headlights will only be washed once for
every five times the windshield is washed
within a 10-minute period.

•

Parking lights on. Optional Active Bending Lights will be washed once for every
five times the windshield is washed. Normal halogen headlights will not be
washed.

Windshield washing

Tailgate wiper/washer

Move the lever forward to start the tailgate
washer.

Intermittent wiping
Washing function

108

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Normal (continuous) wiping

03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washers
NOTE
The rear wiper is equipped with cut-off
function, which means that it will not operate if its electric motor overheats. The
wiper will function again after a cool-down
period (30 seconds or longer, depending
on the heat of the motor and ambient temperature conditions).

Tailgate wiper and reverse gear
If the windshield wipers are on and the transmission is put into reverse gear, the tailgate
wiper will go into intermittent wiping function1. This function is deactivated when a different gear is selected.

NOTE
On vehicles with the optional rain sensor,
the tailgate wiper will be activated when
reverse is selected, if the rain sensor is
activated and it is raining.

If the tailgate wiper is in the normal (continuous) wiping mode, selecting different gears
will not affect its function.

Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated.

109

03 Your driving environment
Windows
Power windows

Driver's door control panel

WARNING

•

Always remove the ignition key when
the vehicle is unattended to put the
ignition in mode 0 (see page 89 for
information about the ignition modes).

•

Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.

•

Make sure that the windows are completely unobstructed before they are
operated.

All power windows can be operated using the
control panel in the driver's door. The control
panels in the other doors only operate the
window in the respective doors.
For the power windows to function, the ignition must be in at least mode I. When the
vehicle has been running, the power windows
can be operated for several minutes after the
remote key has been removed from the ignition slot, or until a door has been opened.

NOTE

Operating

Switch for disengaging rear door power
window buttons
Rear door window controls
Front door window controls.

•

To reduce buffeting wind noise if the
rear windows are opened, also open
the front windows slightly.

Manual up/down
–

Operating the power windows

Manual up/down
Auto up/down.

110

•

Movement of the windows will stop if
they are obstructed in any way.

Move one of the controls up/down
slightly.
> The power windows move up/down as
long as the control is held in position.

Auto up/down
–

Move one of the controls up/down as far
as possible and release it.
> The window will open or close completely.

03 Your driving environment
Windows
Resetting
If the battery has been disconnected, the
auto open function must be reset so that it
will work properly.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button to close the window and hold it for
one second.

2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.

Laminated glass*
This glass is reinforced to help provide protection against break-ins
and improved sound insulation in
the passenger compartment.
The windshield, optional moonroof and other
windows have laminated glass.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

111

03 Your driving environment
Mirrors
Power door mirrors

Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces:
1. Press down the L and R buttons at the
same time.
2. Release them after approximately one
second. The mirrors automatically stop in
the fully retracted position.

Door mirror controls

Adjusting
1. Press the L button for the left door mirror
or the R button for the right door mirror.
The light in the button comes on.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
center.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be on.

WARNING
Objects seen in the mirrors may appear
further away than they actually are.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully extended position.

Storing the position*
The mirror positions are stored in the key
memory when the vehicle has been locked
with the remote key. When the vehicle is
unlocked with the same remote control the
mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the stored
positions when the driver's door is opened.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
MY CAR under Settings Car settings
Car key memory Personal settings in
key memory. See page 209 for a description
of the menu system.

Tilting the door mirrors when parking*
The door mirrors can be tilted down to help
give the driver a better view along the sides of

112

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

the vehicle, for example when parallel parking.
To activate this function, select reverse gear
and press the L or R mirror control button to
tilt the mirror down.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
MY CAR under Settings Car settings
Side mirror settings Tilt left mirror or Tilt
right mirror. See page 209 for a description
of the menu system.
The door mirror will reset to its normal position:

•

after 10 seconds when reverse is disengaged and the car remains stopped.

•

immediately when reverse is disengaged
and the vehicle's forward speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

•

immediately if you press the corresponding L or R button again.

•
•

when the engine is turned off.
when the side mirrors are folded in.

NOTE
Only one mirror can be tilted down at a
time.

03 Your driving environment
Mirrors
Automatically tilting the door mirrors
when parking
The door mirrors can tilt down automatically
to help give the driver a better view along the
sides of the vehicle, for example when parallel parking. When the transmission is no
longer in reverse, the mirrors will automatically return to their original position.
This function can be activated/deactivated in
MY CAR under Settings Car settings
Side mirror settings In reverse gear tilt
left mirror or In reverse gear tilt right
mirror. See page 209 for information about
the MY CAR menu system.

•

Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.

•

Fold them out again with the L and R buttons.

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

Home safe and approach lighting
The light on the door mirrors comes on when
approach lighting or home safe lighting is
selected, see page 105.

Heated windshield*, rear window and
door mirror defrosters

When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the
remote key the door mirrors are automatically
retracted/extended.

Auto-dim function

The function can be activated/deactivated in
MY CAR under Settings Car settings
Side mirror settings Retract side mirrors
when locking. See page 209 for a description of the menu system.

Resetting to neutral

Auto-defrosting for the rear window and door
mirrors (if the vehicle is started when the
ambient temperature is below 45 °F (7 °C)
can be selected in MY CAR under Settings
Climate settings Automatic rear
defroster. See page 209 for a description of
the menu system.

Interior rearview mirror

Automatic retraction when locking

Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be electrically reset
to the neutral position for electric retracting/
extending to work.

in the respective buttons indicate that the
function is active. Switch the function off
when then windshield/rear window/mirrors
have cleared to help avoid battery drain.The
heating function will also switch off automatically after a certain amount of time.

Max. defroster/heated windshield (1), rear window and door mirror defroster (2)

The interior rearview mirror’s auto-dim function is controlled by two sensors: one pointing forward (located on the forward-facing
side of the mirror, which monitors the amount
of ambient light) and one pointing rearward
(located on the side of the mirror facing the
driver at the upper edge, which senses the
strength of following vehicles' headlights),
and work together to help eliminate glare.

Press button (1) to defrost/de-ice the windshield and/or button (2) to defrost the rear
window and door mirrors. The indicator lights
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

113

03 Your driving environment
Mirrors
NOTE

114

Obstructing the forward sensor with e.g.,
parking stickers, transponders, etc., or the
rear sensor by loading the cargo area or
the rear seat in such a way that light is
prevented from reaching the sensor will
reduce the auto-dim function in the rearview mirror.

03 Your driving environment
Digial compass*
Operation

brated if the vehicle is driven into a new one
(see the magnetic zones on the map in the
following section "Selecting a magnetic
zone"). To do so:
1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area,
safely out of traffic and away from steel
structures and high-tension electrical
wires.

G029737

2. Start the vehicle.

Rearview mirror with compass.

The rear-view mirror has an integrated display
that shows the compass direction in which
the vehicle is pointing. Eight different directions are shown with the abbreviations: N
(north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south), SW (southwest), W (west)
and NW (northwest).
The compass is displayed automatically when
the vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To
switch the compass on/off use a pen, paperclip or similar object and press in the button
on the rear side of the mirror.

Calibration
North America is divided into 15 magnetic
zones and the compass will need to be cali-

NOTE

•

5. Press the button repeatedly until the
number of the desired magnetic zone
(1-15) is displayed. See the magnetic
zones on the map in the following section
"Selecting a magnetic zone").
6. Wait until C is again displayed in the mirror.

7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
more than 6 mph (10 km/h) until a direction is displayed. This indicates that calibration is complete.
8. Drive around in a circle an additional two
times to fine-tune the calibration.

For best calibration results, switch off
all electrical equipment in the vehicle
(climate system, windshield wipers,
audio system, etc.) and make sure that
all doors are closed.

9. Vehicles with an electrically heated
windshield:* if C is displayed when the
heating function is activated, perform
step 7 with the heating function on. See
also page 221 for additional information
about the heated windshield.

Calibration may not succeed or be
incorrect if the vehicle's electrical
equipment is not switched off.

3. Using a pen, paperclip or similar object,
press and hold the button on the rear side
of mirror for approx. 6 seconds until C is
displayed in the mirror.

Repeat the calibration procedure if necessary.

4. Press and hold the button for 3 seconds
until the number of the current magnetic
zone is displayed.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

115

03 Your driving environment
Digial compass*
Selecting a magnetic zone
1
2

15
14

13
4
12
8

G018632

9 10
6

Magnetic zones.

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The correct zone must be selected for the
compass to work correctly.
1. Put the ignition in mode II.
2. Using a pen or similar object, press and
hold the button on the rear side of mirror
for at least 3 seconds. The number for the
current area will be shown.
3. Press the button repeatedly until the
number for the required geographic area
(1 – 15) is shown.
4. The display will revert to showing the
compass direction after several seconds.

116

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Power moonroof*
Introduction

Sliding moonroof

Manual closing
–

The moonroof controls are located in the ceiling console near the rearview mirror. The
moonroof can be opened vertically and horizontally. The vehicle's ignition must be in
mode I or II for the moonroof to be operated.

Automatic closing

CAUTION
Remove ice and snow before opening
the moonroof.

•

Do not operate the moonroof if it is
frozen closed.

•

Never place heavy objects on the
moonroof.

–

G017823

•

Push the switch forward to the first stop
(the position for manual closing) and hold
it until the moonroof has closed to the
position of your choice, or has closed
completely.
03

Push the switch as far forward as possible (the position for automatic closing)
and release it to automatically close the
moonroof.

Sliding moonroof, forward/rearward

Opening, automatic
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic

Automatic opening
–

Pull the switch as far back as possible (to
the position for automatic opening) and
release it to automatically fully slide open
the moonroof.

Manual opening
–

Pull the switch back to the first stop (the
position for manual opening) and hold it
until the moonroof has opened to the
position of your choice.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

117

03 Your driving environment
Power moonroof*
WARNING
During manual closing, if the moonroof
is obstructed, immediately open it
again.

•

Never open or close the moonroof if it
is obstructed in any way.

•

Never allow a child to operate the
moonroof.

•
•

•

Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, ensure that
the ignition is in mode 0 (see page 88
for information about the various ignition modes) to disable the moonroof.
Never leave the remote key/PCC* in
the vehicle.
Never extend any object or body part
though the open moonroof, even if the
vehicle's ignition is completely
switched off.

G028900

•

Tilt position, raised at the rear edge

Open by pressing the rear edge of the
control upward.
Close by pulling the rear edge of the control downward and hold it until the moonroof has closed completely.

Visor
The moonroof features a sliding visor. The
visor slides open automatically when the
moonroof is opened, and must be closed
manually.

118

Wind blocker

Tilt position

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The moonroof is equipped with a wind
blocker that folds up when the moonroof is
open.

03 Your driving environment
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*
Introduction

•

If you use HomeLink to open a garage
door or gate, be sure no one is near
the gate or door while it is in motion.

•

When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park outside of
the garage.

•

The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three
hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters
used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks,
security systems, even home lighting. Additional HomeLink information can be found on
the Internet at www.homelink.com or by
phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.

Programming HomeLink

WARNING

Do not use HomeLink with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and
reverse features as required by U.S.
federal safety standards (this includes
any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A
garage door that cannot detect an
object - signaling the door to stop and
reverse - does not meet current U.S.
federal safety standards. For more
information, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com.

NOTE
Some vehicles may require the ignition to
be switched on or be in the “accessories”
position for programming and/or operation
of HomeLink. It is also recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training
and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. The HomeLink buttons
must be reset first. When this has been
completed, Homelink is in learning mode
so that you can perform programming.

1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in
view.

Retain the original transmitter of the RF
device you are programming for use in other
vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes.
Refer to “Resetting HomeLink Buttons” on
page 121.

HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

119

03 Your driving environment
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

2. Simultaneously press and hold both the
chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light. Now you may release both
the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter
buttons.

3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and
release the programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate
the door. If the door does not activate,
press and hold the just-trained HomeLink
button and observe the indicator light.

•

NOTE
Some devices may require you to replace
this Programming Step 2 with procedures
noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming” section. If the HomeLink
indicator light does not change to a rapidly
blinking light after performing these steps,
contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com
or by phoning the hotline at
1–800–355–3515.

•

If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the HomeLink button is pressed and
released.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a
constant light continue with “Programming” steps 4-6 to complete the
programming of a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage
door opener).

4. At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
the “learn” or “smart” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motorhead unit.
5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button. (The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.)
There are 30 seconds to initiate step 6.

120

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button. Repeat the
“press/hold/release” sequence a second
time, and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code
equipped device), repeat this sequence a
third time to complete the programming
process.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling
code equipped device.

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not
be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator or
garage door opener by using the “Programming” procedures, replace “Programming
HomeLink” step 2 with the following:

•

Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
button while you press and release every two seconds (“cycle”) your handheld transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release

03 Your driving environment
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*
both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons.
Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to complete.

Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and hold the programmed HomeLink button until the trained
device begins to operate (this may take several seconds). Activation will now occur for
the trained device (i.e., garage door opener,
gate operator, security system, entry door
lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event
that there are still programming difficulties or
questions, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com or by phoning the hotline
at 1–800–355–3515.

NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink
will function for 30 minutes after the driver's door has been opened.

Resetting HomeLink Buttons
Use the following procedure to reset (erase
programming) from the three HomeLink buttons (individual buttons cannot be reset but
can be “reprogrammed” as outlined in the following section):
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink
buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash.
2. Release both buttons.
> HomeLink is now in the training (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with
“Programming” - step 1.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or phone 1–800–
355–3515.
This device complies with FCC rules part 15
and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any
interference that may be received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE
The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the
device.2

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink
Button
To program a device to HomeLink using a
HomeLink button previously trained, follow
these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with “Programming”
- step 1.

The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

121

03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
Start

WARNING

•

Ignition slot with remote key inserted ( see
page 88 for more information on ignition modes)

WARNING
Before starting the engine:

1
2

122

•
•

Fasten the seat belt.

•

Make sure the brake pedal can be
depressed completely. Adjust the seat
if necessary.

Check that the seat, steering wheel
and mirrors are adjusted properly.

Never use more than one floor mat at
a time on the driver's floor. An extra
mat on the driver's floor can cause the
accelerator and/or brake pedal to
catch. Check that the movement of
these pedals is not impeded.
Volvo's floor mats are specially manufactured for your car. They must be
firmly secured in the clips on the floor
so that they cannot slide and become
trapped under the pedals on the driver's side.

1. Press the remote key into the ignition slot
as far as possible, with the metallic key
blade pointing outward (not inserted into
the slot)1.
2. Depress the brake pedal2.

On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger’s compartment.
If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

3. Press and release the START/STOP
ENGINE button. The autostart function
will operate the starter motor until the
engine starts or until its overheating function stops it.
The starter motor operates for a maximum of 10 seconds. If the engine has not
started, repeat the procedure.

CAUTION
If the engine does not start after the third
try, wait for approximately 3 minutes
before trying to start it again to give the
battery time to recover its starting
capacity.

NOTE
Keyless drive*
To start a vehicle equipped with the keyless drive feature, one of the remote keys
must be in the passenger compartment.
Follow the instructions in steps 2 and 3 to
start the vehicle.

03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
WARNING

•

Always remove the remote key from
the ignition slot when leaving the vehicle and ensure that the ignition in
mode 0 (see page 89 for information
about the ignition modes), especially if
there are children in the vehicle.

•

On vehicles with the optional keyless
drive, never remove the remote key
from the vehicle while it is being driven
or towed.

•

Always place the gear selector in Park
and apply the parking brake before
leaving the vehicle. Never leave the
vehicle unattended with the engine
running.

•

Always open garage doors fully before
starting the engine inside a garage to
ensure adequate ventilation. The
exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is invisible and odorless but
very poisonous.

NOTE

•

After a cold start, idle speed may be
noticeably higher than normal for a
short period. This is done to help bring
components in the emission control
system to their normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which
enables them to control emissions and
help reduce the vehicle's impact on
the environment3.

CAUTION

•

When starting in cold weather, the
automatic transmission may shift up at
slightly higher engine speeds than normal until the automatic transmission
fluid reaches normal operating temperature.

•

Do not race a cold engine immediately
after starting. Oil flow may not reach
some lubrication points fast enough to
prevent engine damage.

•

The engine should be idling when you
move the gear selector. Never accelerate until after you feel the transmission
engage. Accelerating immediately after
selecting a gear will cause harsh
engagement and premature transmission wear.

•

Selecting P or N when idling at a
standstill for prolonged periods of time
will help prevent overheating of the
automatic transmission fluid.

If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature.

}}

123

03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
Engine Remote Start (ERS)*
Introduction
ERS is a feature that makes it possible to
remotely start the engine to cool or heat the
passenger compartment before driving.
03

The climate control system will start using the
same settings as when the engine was
switched off.
When the engine is started using ERS, it will
run for a maximum of 15 minutes before
automatically switching off again. After 2 ERS
starts, the engine must be started in the normal way before ERS can be used again.

WARNING
Keep the following in mind before using
ERS

•
•
•

The vehicle should be in view.
The vehicle should be unoccupied.
The vehicle must not be parked
indoors or in an enclosed area.
Exhaust fumes are harmful to the
health.

Using ERS

Always adhere to applicable State,
Province and/or Local laws regarding
engine idling when using ERS.

•

The service life of the remote key's
battery is affected by ERS use. If this
feature is used frequently, the battery
should be replaced once a year, see
page 60).

The maximum range for ERS is approximately
100 ft (30 meters) if the view of the vehicle is
unobstructed. The vehicle must also be
locked.
To start the engine:
1. Press the lock button (1 ) briefly.
2. Immediately press the approach lighting
button (4) for approximately 2 seconds.

2. The engine will start.
3. The turn signals will illuminate for
3 seconds to indicate that the engine has
started.
After the engine has started, the vehicle
remains locked but the alarm is disarmed.
Remote key buttons used for remote engine start

Unlock

124

Starting the engine

1. The turn signals will flash several times.

Lock

Approach lighting

If the requirements for ERS have been met,
the following will occur:

NOTE

•

Information4.

PCC keys only, see page 62

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine

The indicator light for approach
lighting will flash several times and
then glow continuously if all of the
requirements for ERS have been
met. However, this does not indicate that
ERS has started the engine.
To check if ERS has started the engine, press
the information button (3). If the engine has
started, the indicator light for buttons
(1) och (4) will illuminate.

Active functions
When the engine is started with ERS, the following functions are activated:

•
•

The climate control system
The infotainment system.

Deactivated functions
When the engine is started with ERS, the following functions are deactivated:

•
•
•
•

Headlights

Switching off the engine

Switching off an engine started with
ERS
Any of the following will switch off the engine
if it has been started with ERS:

•

Pressing the lock button (1) or the unlock
button (2) on the remote key

•
•
•
•

Unlocking the vehicle
Opening a door
Depressing the accelerator or brake pedal

With the engine running, press the START/
STOP ENGINE button.
If the gear selector is not in the P position or
if the vehicle is moving, press the START/
STOP ENGINE button twice or press and
hold it in until the engine switches off.

Jump starting

Moving the gear selector from the P position

•

If there are less than approx. 2.5 gallons
(10 liters) of fuel in the tank

•

More than 15 minutes have elapsed.

If the engine has been started with ERS and
switches off, the turn signals will illuminate for
3 seconds.

Message in the instrument panel
display

G021347

Models with a Personal Car
Communicator (PCC) remote key* (see
page 62)

If ERS is interrupted, a text message will be
displayed in the instrument panel.

Connecting the jumper cables

Parking lights
License plate lights
Windshield wipers

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

125

03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

Follow these instructions to jump start your
vehicle's dead battery or to jump start
another vehicle's dead battery using your
vehicle. If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be
used is in another vehicle, check that the
vehicles are not touching to prevent premature completion of a circuit. Be sure to follow
jump starting instructions provided for the
other vehicle.
To jump start your vehicle:
1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition to
mode 0, see page 88).
2. First connect the red jumper cable to the
auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal (1).
3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+)
terminal on your vehicle's battery (2),
marked with a "+" sign, located under a
folding cover.

126

4. Connect the black jumper cable to the
auxiliary battery's negative (–) terminal (3)
and to the ground point in your vehicle's
engine compartment (right engine mount
at the top, on the outer screw) (4).
5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle,
then start the engine in the vehicle with
dead battery.
6. After the engine has started, first remove
the negative (–) terminal jumper cable
(black). Then remove the positive (+) terminal jumper cable (red).

CAUTION
Connect the jumper cables carefully to
avoid short circuits with other components
in the engine compartment.

WARNING

•

Do not connect the jumper cable to
any part of the fuel system or to any
moving parts. Avoid touching hot
manifolds.

•

Batteries generate hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive.

•

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,
skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If
contact occurs, flush the affected area
immediately with water. Obtain medical help immediately if eyes are affected.

•

Never expose the battery to open
flame or electric spark.

•
•

Do not smoke near the battery.
Failure to follow the instructions for
jump starting can lead to injury.

03 Your driving environment
Transmission
Automatic transmission

CAUTION
The transmission’s temperature is monitored to help prevent damage to the transmission or other drivetrain components. If
there is a risk of overheating, the warning
symbol on the instrument panel will illuminate and a text message will be displayed.
Follow the instructions provided there.

G021351

Hill Start Assist (HSA)1

Shiftgate positions

Depress the button on the front of the gear
selector knob to move the gear selector
between the R, N, D, and P positions.
The gear selector can be moved freely
between the Geartronic (manual shifting) and
Drive (D) positions while driving.

HSA makes it easier to start or back up on a
hill by retaining pressure on the brake pedal
for several seconds after the pedal has been
released in order to keep the vehicle at a
standstill.

before the gear lever can be moved from the
P position.

WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when the
vehicle is parked, particularly when parking on a hill. The transmission's P mode
may not be able to keep the vehicle stationary if it is parked on an incline.

Press the control to apply the parking brake,
see page 144.

The brakes will be released after several seconds or when the driver presses the accelerator pedal.

Park: position P
Select the P position when starting or parking.

Shiftlock
When P has been selected, the transmission
is mechanically blocked in this position. The
brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition must be in at least mode II (see page 88)

Certain models only

CAUTION
The vehicle must be stationary when position P is selected.

}}

127

03 Your driving environment
Transmission
Gear indicator
The gear currently being
used is displayed on the right
side of the instrument panel.
The "S" symbol turns orange
if Sport mode is being used.

Reverse: position R
The vehicle must be stationary when position
R is selected.

To shift gears manually, move the
gear selector to the side from D
toward +S–. The +S– symbol in the
instrument panel will change from
white to orange and the number of the gear
currently being used (1, 2, 3, etc.) will be displayed (see the following illustration).

•

To return to automatic shifting mode from
+S–, move the gear selector to the side
toward D.

While driving

•

If you select the manual shifting position
while driving, the gear that was being
used in the Drive position will also initially
be selected in the manual shifting position.

•

Move the gear selector forward (toward +)
to shift to a higher gear or rearward
(toward –) to shift to a lower gear.

•

If you hold the gear selector toward "–",
the transmission will downshift one gear
at a time and will utilize the braking power
of the engine. If the current speed is too
high for using a lower gear, the downshift
will not occur until the speed has
decreased enough to allow the lower gear
to be used.

•

If you slow to a very low speed, the transmission will automatically shift down.

Gear shift indicator*

Neutral: position N
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started with the gear selector in this position.
Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is stationary with the gear selector in position N.

Drive: position D
D is the normal driving position. The car automatically shifts between the various forward
gears, based on the level of acceleration and
speed. The car must be at a standstill when
shifting from position R to position D.

Geartronic: manual shifting (+S–)

Gear shift indicator in a digital instrument panel*2

Geartronic allows you to manually shift
among your vehicle's forward gears. Geartronic can be selected at any time.

This option indicates when to shift up or
down to help conserve fuel. A white arrow will
appear above or below the number of the
current gear to prompt the driver to shift up
or down.

128

Shiftlock: Neutral (N)

Analog instrument panel: the gear shift indicator is displayed in the center of the speedometer

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

If the gear selector is in the N position and
the vehicle has been stationary for at least
3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine
is running) then the gear selector is locked.
In order to move the gear selector from N to
another gear position, the brake pedal must
be depressed and the ignition must be in at
least position II, see page 88.

03 Your driving environment
Transmission
ment panel will change to the number of
the gear currently being used.

Geartronic: steering wheel paddles*
In addition to the manual gearshift function
using the gear selector, this option makes it
possible to manually shift gears from the
steering wheel.

Shifting gears:

•

Pull the paddle toward the steering wheel
and release it.

NOTE
If the gear selector was in D when paddle
shifting was activated (D changed to the
number of the gear being used), the transmission will automatically revert to D after
approximately 5 seconds if the paddles
are not used to shift gears.
This will not occur:

•
Steering-wheel mounted gear shift paddles

"–": Shift down to a lower gear.
"+": Shift up to a higher gear.
In order to shift gears with the paddles, they
have to first be activated. The gear selector
can be in either the D or S position.
Activating the paddles:

•

Pull either paddle toward the steering
wheel and release it; the D in the instru-

during active driving (e.g., on a winding road, while accelerating, etc)

•

if the gear selector was in S when the
paddles were activated
If the transmission reverts to D, the paddles will have to be reactivated (pull either
paddle toward the steering wheel and
release it) before they can be used to shift
gears again.
The paddles can also be manually deactivated by pulling both paddles toward the
steering wheel and holding them until the
gear number shown in the instrument
panel changes to D.

Geartronic: Sport mode (S)3
This transmission mode provides sportier
shifting characteristics and enables a more
active driving style by making it possible to
drive at higher rpm in each gear before shifting up. The engine also responds faster when
the accelerator pedal is pressed.

To access Sport mode from Drive (D), move
the gear selector to the left. The transmission
will not switch to manual shifting mode until
the gear selector is moved forward or rearward toward + or –.
Sport mode can be selected any time.

NOTE

•

On vehicles equipped with Sport
mode, the transmission symbol in the
main instrument panel will change
from D to S when the gear selector is
moved to the manual shifting mode. If
the gear selector is moved toward "+"
or "-", the number of the gear currently
being used will be displayed, see
page 79).

•

Please be aware that using Sport
mode may result in a slight decrease in
fuel economy. Driving in D can help
improve fuel economy.

Certain models only

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

129

03 Your driving environment
Transmission
Geartronic: starting on slippery
surfaces

Shiftlock override

All Wheel Drive: AWD5

If the vehicle cannot be driven, for example
because of a dead battery, the gear selector
must be moved from the P position before
the vehicle can be moved4.

Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent
All Wheel Drive, which means that power is
distributed automatically between the front
and rear wheels. Under normal driving conditions, most of the engine's power is directed
to the front wheels. However, if there is any
tendency for the front wheels to spin, an electronically controlled coupling distributes
power to the wheels that have the best traction.

Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic’s manual
shifting mode can help provide better traction
when starting off on slippery surfaces. To do
so:
03

1. Depress the brake pedal and move the
gear selector to the side from D toward
+S–.
2. Press the gear selector forward and
release it (this selects 2nd gear). Press
the selector forward again and release it
to select 3rd gear. The optional steering
wheel paddles can also be used; see the
previous section "Geartronic: steering
wheel paddles."
3. Release the brake pedal and press gently
on the accelerator pedal.

Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of
the storage compartment behind the center console to expose the small opening
for overriding the shiftlock system.
Insert the key blade into the opening.
Press the key blade down as far as possible and keep it held down.
Move the gear selector from the P position. For information on the key blade,
see page 64.

4
5

130

If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see page 125.
Standard on certain models.

03 Your driving environment
Transmission
NOTE
The message AWD disabled Service
required will be appear in the information
display if an electrical fault should occur in
the AWD system. A warning light will also
illuminate in the instrument panel. If this
occurs, have the system checked by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

131

03 Your driving environment
Eco Guide* and Power Meter*
Introduction

Current (instantaneous) reading

Power Meter

These gauges help improve driving economy.

This is the current level of economical driving;
the higher the reading, the more economically
the vehicle is being driven.

This gauge indicates the engine power that
has been utilized and the amount of power
remaining.

To display or remove these functions from the
instrument panel, select the "Eco" theme (see
page 80).
03

Driving statistics are also stored and can be
displayed in the form of a bar chart (see
page 230).

Eco Guide
This gauge gives an indication of how economically the vehicle is being driven.

This value is calculated based on the vehicle's speed, engine speed (rpm), engine load
and brake use.
The optimal speed range is between approximately 30–50 mph (50–80 km/h), preferably at
as low rpm as possible. The markers fall
when the brake or accelerator pedal is
pressed.
If the current reading is very low, the red field
in the gauge will illuminate after a slight delay,
indicating low driving economy.

Average
The average reading changes gradually
according to changes in the current reading
to indicate how economically the vehicle has
been driven recently. The higher the average
reading, the more economically the vehicle
has been driven.

132

Available power
Utilized power

Available power
The smaller, upper indicator shows the
engine's available power1. The higher the
reading on the scale, the greater the amount
of power remaining in the current gear.

Current (instantaneous) reading

Utilized power

Average

The larger, lower indicator shows the amount
of engine power that has been utilized1. The

Depending on rpm

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Eco Guide* and Power Meter*
higher the reading on the scale, the greater
the amount of power that is being utilized.
The larger the gap between the two indicators, the greater the amount of power remaining.
03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

133

03 Your driving environment
Eco*
Introduction

NOTE

Eco is a function1 developed by Volvo to give
the driver the opportunity to actively drive
more economically and to help reduce fuel
consumption.
When Eco is activated, the
following functions are modified:

When Eco is activated, several climate
system parameters are changed and the
function of certain current-consuming systems will be reduced.
Pressing the AC button will reset the climate system but at a reduced level.

time the engine is started (with the exception
of certain engines).
The ECO symbol will be displayed in the
instrument panel and the indicator light in the
ECO button will be on when Eco is activated.

Eco on or off
When ECO is deactivated,
the ECO symbol will not be
displayed in the instrument
panel and the indicator light
in the ECO button will be off.
The function will remain
deactivated until the button
is pressed again.

Function

•

The automatic transmission's shifting
points

•

The engine management system and
accelerator pedal response

•

Stop/stop function (see page 137): the
engine can auto-stop before the vehicle
has come to a full stop

•

Eco Coast functionality is activated:
engine braking is disabled

•

Climate system settings: certain functions
(e.g., air conditioning) will be temporarily
reduced or deactivated

Eco Coast
Eco Coast is an integral part of the Eco function and essentially deactivates engine braking, allowing the vehicle to roll freely.

NOTE
ECO On/Off button in the center console
ECO symbol in the instrument panel
When the engine is switched off, ECO is
deactivated and must be reactivated each

134

Option on models equipped with certain 4-cylinder engines

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

To function optimally, Eco Coast should
primarily be used when the vehicle can
coast as far as possible.

When the driver releases the accelerator
pedal, the transmission is automatically dis-

03 Your driving environment
Eco*
engaged from the engine and engine rpm will
be reduced to the idle level
(approx. 700-800 rpm), which helps reduce
fuel consumption.

Activating Eco Coast

Eco Coast limitations

Eco Coast is activated when the accelerator
pedal is released completely if:

This function will not be available if:

•
•

Cruise control is activated

•

The steering wheel paddles* are used to
manually change gears

•

The engine and/or transmission have not
reached their normal operating temperature

Deactivating Eco Coast

•

In certain situations, it may be advisable to
switch off the Eco Coast function, such as:

The gear selector is moved from D to the
manual "S+/–" position

•

The vehicle's speed is not within the
40–85 mph (65–140 km/h). interval

•
•
•

Eco is activated

Eco Coast enables proactive driving with as
little braking as possible.

•

The gradient of a down-slope is less than
approximately 6%

Combinations of On and Off

This feature is primarily intended to be used
in driving situations where a decrease in
speed is expected, such as when approaching an intersection or a traffic light.

Depending on the driving situation, Eco can
be used in different ways to help reduce fuel
consumption:

•

Eco activated: this enables Eco Coast,
which allows the vehicle to roll freely for
as far as possible when the driver releases the accelerator pedal (e.g., when
approaching a traffic light or intersection).

•

Eco deactivated: engine braking can be
used when the vehicle will only roll for
a short distance (in heavy traffic, etc.) or
when driving down hills.

To help keep fuel consumption as low as
possible, Eco Coast should not be used in
traffic situations where the brakes have to
used frequently.

The gear selector is in D
The vehicle's speed is between approximately 40–85 mph (65–140 km/h). Always
observe posted speed limits

•

When driving down steep hills, in order to
utilize engine braking

•

Prior to passing another vehicle, in order
to do so as safely as possible

The gradient of a down-slope is more
than approximately 6%
03

Additional information and settings

Deactivating Eco Coast (and reactivating
engine braking) can be done in the following
ways:

•

Press the ECO button on the center console

•

Move the gear selector to the manual "S
+/–" position

•

Change gears using the steering wheel
paddles*

•

Press the brake or accelerator pedal
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

135

03 Your driving environment
Eco*
Other ECO-related settings can be made in
the vehicle's MY CAR menu. See page 209
for more information.

136

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop*
Introduction
Start/Stop is a function that is available with
certain engines/transmissions. It temporarily
switches off the engine when the vehicle is
not moving, for instance in heavy traffic or at
a traffic light to help reduce fuel consumption.

Function and use

Start/Stop symbol in the instrument panel

Start/Stop button on the center console

Start/Stop is activated automatically each
time the engine is started1. The symbol in the
instrument panel will be displayed for several
seconds when the engine starts and the indicator light in the On/Off button will remain
illuminated while the function is activated.
All of the vehicle's systems will function while
the engine is auto-stopped, although the

function of certain systems may reduced at
this time. For example, blower speed and
high infotainment system volume may be
reduced to help conserve the battery's
capacity.

Deactivating Start/Stop

Auto-stopping the engine

This is done by pressing the
button in the center console.
The indicator light in the button will go out.

Normally, when Start/Stop is activated and
the brakes are applied until the vehicle comes
to a standstill, the engine will auto-stop automatically if the driver keeps the brake pedal
depressed.
To remind the driver that the engine
has been auto-stopped, the
Start/Stop symbol will illuminate in
the instrument panel and remain on
until the engine restarts.
If the ECO function* (see
page 134) is activated, the
engine may auto-stop before
the vehicle comes to a complete standstill.

In certain situations (e.g.,
driving in heavy, stop-and-go
traffic), it may be preferable
to deactivate Start/Stop.
03

Start/Stop will remain deactivated until the
button is pressed again or until the engine is
switched off and restarted by the driver.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)
When starting on steep hills, HSA (see
page 127) retains pressure on the brake pedal
for several seconds after the pedal has been
released in order to keep the vehicle at a
standstill. The brakes will be released after
several seconds or when the driver presses
the accelerator pedal.

Auto-starting the engine
The engine restarts as soon as the driver
releases the brake pedal.

Not when the engine is started using the optional Engine Remote Start feature, see page 124

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

137

03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop*
Auto-stop exceptions

Condition/situation

In certain situations or conditions, the engine
may not auto-stop when the vehicle comes
to a standstill, such as if:
03

The main battery's temperature is below
freezing or too high.
The driver is turning the steering wheel
hard.

Condition/situation

The vehicle's speed has not reached a
speed of approx. 5 mph (ca 8 km/h) after
the most recent auto-start or after the
driver has started the engine.

The road's incline is very steep.

Condensation forms on the windows.

A trailer's electrical system is connected to
the vehicle.

The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt.

The hood has been openedA.

The climate system cannot keep the
desired settings in the passenger compartment.

The main battery's charge is below the
minimum level.

The transmission has not reached its normal operating temperature.

The engine has not reached its normal
operating temperature.
The ambient temperature is below freezing
or above approx. 85°F (30°C).

Atmospheric pressure is below a level
equivalent to an altitude of approx. 4,900–
8,200 ft (1500–2500 m) above sea level.
The actual pressure is also affected by current weather conditions.

The windshield's heating function* is activated.

The Adaptive Cruise Control's* Queue
Assist feature is activated.

The vehicle begins to move or increases
speed slightly (if the engine auto-stopped
before the vehicle was at a standstill (see
page 134)).

The climate system cannot keep the
desired settings in the passenger compartment; the blower will operate at high
speed.

The gear selector is in the SB or "+/–" position.

The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt while
the gear selector is in the D or N positions.

Certain engines only
Sport mode (where applicable)

The steering wheel is turnedA.

Condition/situation

A
B

The vehicle is backing up.

138

Auto-start exceptions
In certain situations or conditions, the engine
may auto-start even though the driver is still
pressing the brake pedal, such as if:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Electrical current consumption is temporarily high or the main battery's charge is
below the minimum level.
The brake pedal is pumped repeatedly.
The hood has been openedA.

03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop*

A
B

Condition/situation

If the engine does not auto-start, this
could be due to:

The gear selector is moved from D to SB, R
or "+/–".

•
•

The driver's door is opened with the gear
selector in D – an audible signal and a text
message will inform the driver that
Start/Stop is active.

In these cases, the driver will have to restart
the engine by pressing the START/STOP
ENGINE button.

Certain engines only
Sport mode (where applicable)

WARNING
Do not open the hood if the engine has
auto-stopped. The engine could suddenly
auto-start.
Before opening the hood:

•

Switch off the ignition using the
START/STOP ENGINE button.

•

Be aware that if the engine has been
running, components in the engine
compartment will be very hot.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened
The gear selector is in P and the driver's
door is opened
03

Settings
Settings for the Start/Stop function can be
made in the MY CAR menu system.

Symbols and messages
Text messages
Combined with the information symbol in the instrument panel, the
Start/Stop function may also display
messages in certain situations. Follow the
instructions provided in the message. The following table gives several examples.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

139

03 Your driving environment
Start/Stop*
Symbol

Message

Information/action

Auto Start/Stop Service
required

Start/Stop is not functioning properly. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.

Autostart Engine running + an
audible signal

This is triggered if the driver's door is opened while the engine is auto-stopped.

Press Start button

The engine will not auto-start. Start the engine normally by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE
button.

Select P or N to start

Start/Stop has been deactivated. Move the gear selector to N or P and start the engine normally
be pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.

Press Start button

The engine will not auto-start. Move the gear selector to N or P and start the engine normally be
pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.

If the message does not disappear after the
suggested action has been taken, contact a
Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.

140

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment
Brakes
Brake system

Brake pad inspection

The brake system is a hydraulic system consisting of two separate brake circuits. If a
problem should occur in one of these circuits,
it is still possible to stop the vehicle with the
other brake circuit.

On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condition of the brake pads can be checked by
raising the vehicle (see page 331 for information about using the jack and removing a
wheel) and performing a visual inspection of
the brake pads.

If the brake pedal must be depressed farther
than normal and requires greater foot pressure, the stopping distance will be longer.
A warning light in the instrument panel will
light up to warn the driver that a fault has
occurred.
If this light comes on while driving or braking,
stop immediately and check the brake fluid
level in the reservoir.

NOTE
Press the brake pedal hard and maintain
pressure on the pedal – do not pump the
brakes.

WARNING
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in
the reservoir or if a brake system message
is shown in the information display: DO
NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected.

WARNING

•

If the vehicle has been driven immediately prior to a brake pad inspection,
the wheel hub, brake components,
etc., will be very hot. Allow time for
these components to cool before carrying out the inspection.

•

Apply the parking brake and put the
gear selector in the Park (P) position.

•

Block the wheels standing on the
ground, use rigid wooden blocks or
large stones.

WARNING

•

Use the jack intended for the vehicle
when changing a tire. For any other
job, use stands to support the vehicle.

•

The jack should be kept well-greased
and clean, and should not be damaged.

•

Be sure the jack is on a firm, level,
non-slippery surface.

•

No objects should be placed between
the base of jack and the ground, or
between the jack and the attachment
bar on the vehicle.

•

The jack must correctly engage the
jack attachment.

•

Never allow any part of your body to
be extended under a vehicle supported by a jack.

Brake lights
The brake lights come on automatically when
the brakes are applied.

Adaptive brake lights
The adaptive brake lights activate in the event
of sudden braking or if the ABS system is
activated. This function causes an additional
taillight on each side of the vehicle to illuminate to help alert vehicles traveling behind.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

141

03 Your driving environment
Brakes
The adaptive brake lights activate if:

•

The ABS system activates for more than
approximately a half second

•

In the event of sudden braking while the
vehicle is moving at speeds above
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)

When the vehicle has come to a stop, the
brake lights and additional taillights remain on
for as long as the brake pedal is depressed or
until braking force on the vehicle is reduced.

Power brakes function only when the
engine is running
The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure
which is only created when the engine is running. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with
the engine switched off.
If the power brakes are not working, considerably higher pressure will be required on the
brake pedal to compensate for the lack of
power assistance. This can happen for example when towing your vehicle or if the engine
is switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The
brake pedal feels harder than usual.

Water on brake discs and brake pads
affects braking
Driving in rain and slush or passing through
an automatic car wash can cause water to
collect on the brake discs and pads. This will
cause a delay in braking effect when the

142

pedal is depressed. To avoid such a delay
when the brakes are needed, depress the
pedal occasionally when driving through rain,
slush, etc. This will remove the water from the
brakes. Check that brake application feels
normal. This should also be done after washing or starting in very damp or cold weather.

Severe strain on the brake system
The brakes will be subject to severe strain
when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or
when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually
slower, which means that the cooling of the
brakes is less efficient than when driving on
level roads. To reduce the strain on the
brakes, shift into a lower gear and let the
engine help with the braking. Do not forget
that if you are towing a trailer, the brakes will
be subjected to a greater than normal load.

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps to
improve vehicle control (stopping and steering) during severe braking conditions by limiting brake lockup. When the system "senses"
impending lockup, braking pressure is automatically modulated in order to help prevent
lockup that could lead to a skid.
The system performs a brief self-diagnostic
test when the engine has been started and
driver releases the brake pedal. Another automatic test may be performed when the vehi-

cle first reaches a speed of approximately
6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate
several times and a sound may be audible
from the ABS control module, which is normal.

Cleaning the brake discs
Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
may result in delayed brake function. This
delay is minimized by cleaning the brake linings.
Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet
weather, prior to long-term parking, and after
the vehicle has been washed. Do this by
braking gently for a short period while the
vehicle is moving.

Emergency Brake Assistance
EBA is designed to provide full brake effect
immediately in the event of sudden, hard
braking. The system is activated by the speed
with which the brake pedal is depressed.
When the EBA system is activated, the brake
pedal will go down and pressure in the brake
system immediately increases to the maximum level. Maintain full pressure on the
brake pedal in order to utilize the system
completely. EBA is automatically deactivated
when the brake pedal is released.

03 Your driving environment
Brakes
NOTE

•

When the EBA system is activated, the
brake pedal will go down and pressure
in the brake system immediately
increases to the maximum level. You
must maintain full pressure on the
brake pedal in order to utilize the system completely. There will be no braking effect if the pedal is released. EBA
is automatically deactivated when the
brake pedal is released.
When the vehicle has been parked for
some time, the brake pedal may sink
more than usual when the engine is
started. This is normal and the pedal
will return to its usual position when it
is released.

Symbols in the instrument panel

Symbol

Specification
Steady glow – Check the brake
fluid level. If the level is low, fill
with brake fluid and check for
the cause of the brake fluid
loss.

Steady glow for two seconds
when the engine is started –
There was a fault in the brake
system's ABS function when
the engine was last running.

WARNING
If
and
come on at the
same time and the brake level is below the
MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake system-related message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the
vehicle towed to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician and have the
brake system inspected.

143

03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
Electric parking brake

Applying the electric parking brake

NOTE

An electric parking brake has the same function as a manual parking brake.

•

In an emergency the parking brake can
be applied when the vehicle is moving
by holding in the control. Braking will
be interrupted when the accelerator
pedal is depressed or the control is
released.

•

An audible signal will sound during this
procedure if the vehicle is moving at
speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE
03

•

A faint sound from the parking brake's
electric motor can be heard when the
parking brake is being applied. This
sound can also be heard during the
automatic function check of the parking brake.
The brake pedal will move slightly
when the electric parking brake is
applied or released.

Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low, the parking brake cannot be applied or released.
Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery
voltage is too low, see page 125.

Parking on a hill
Parking brake control

2. Push the control.
>
symbol in the instrument
The
panel flashes while the parking brake is
being applied and glows steadily when
the parking brake has been fully
applied.
3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that
the vehicle is at a standstill.
4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear
selector must be in position P.

144

•

If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the
front wheels so that they point away from
the curb.

•

If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the
front wheels so that they point toward the
curb.

1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

The parking brake should also be applied.

03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
Releasing the electric parking brake

3. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

Heavy load uphill

4. Pull the parking brake control.

A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
vehicle to roll backward when the parking
brake is released automatically on a steep
incline. To help avoid this:

Automatic release
1. Start the engine.

NOTE

•

•
Parking brake control

Manual release

For safety reasons, the parking brake is
only released automatically if the engine
is running and the driver is wearing a
seat belt.
The electric parking brake will be
released immediately when the accelerator pedal is pressed and the gear
selector is in position D or R.

1. Fasten the seat belt.
2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot
and press the START/STOP ENGINE
button (or press the START/STOP
ENGINE button with a valid remote key in
the passenger compartment on vehicles
with the optional keyless drive).

Symbol

2. Fasten the seat belt.

1. Keep the electric parking brake lever
pushed in with the left hand while shifting
into Drive with the right.

2. While pressing the accelerator pedal to
pull away, release the parking brake lever
only after the vehicle begins to move.

Symbol and messages in the
instrument panel
See page 207 for information about displaying or erasing messages.

3. Move the gear selector to position D or R
and press the accelerator pedal. The
parking brake will release when the vehicle begins to move.

Message

Description/action

"Message"

Read the message in the information display
A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is being applied. If the symbol flashes in any other situation
then this means that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the information display.
}}

145

03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
Symbol

Message

Description/action

Park brake not
fully released

A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released. Try to apply the parking brake and release it several times. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message showing, a warning signal sounds.

Parking brake not
applied

A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied. Try to apply the parking brake and release it several
times. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message
showing, a warning signal sounds.

Parking brake
Service required

A fault has occurred. Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault remains

WARNING
If the vehicle must be parked before the
fault has been corrected, always put the
gear selector in P and turn the wheels so
that they point away from the curb if the
vehicle is pointing uphill or toward the curb
if it is pointing downhill.

146

03 Your driving environment
Hill Descent Control (HDC)*
Introduction

Function

Using HDC

Normally, when the accelerator pedal is
released while driving down hills, the vehicle's
speed slows as the engine runs at lower rpm
(the normal engine braking effect). However, if
the downhill gradient becomes steeper and if
the vehicle is carrying a load, speed increases
despite the engine braking effect. In this situation, the brakes must be applied to reduce
the vehicle's speed.
HDC is a type of automatic engine brake and
makes it possible to increase or decrease the
vehicle's speed on downhill gradients using
only the accelerator pedal, without applying
the brakes. The brake system functions automatically to maintain a low and steady speed.
HDC is particularly useful when driving down
steep hills with rough surfaces, and where the
road may have slippery patches.

HDC allows the car to roll forward at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h), and 4 mph
(7 km/h) in reverse. However, the accelerator
pedal can be used to select any speed that is
possible in first or reverse gears. When the
accelerator pedal is released, speed is
quickly reduced again to 6 mph (10 km/h) or
4 mph (7 km/h), depending on the gear
selected, regardless of the hill's gradient. It is
not necessary to apply the brakes.

•

WARNING
HDC does not function in all situations,
and is a supplementary braking aid. The
driver has full responsibility for driving in a
safe manner.

•

HDC can be switched on and off with the
button in the center console. An indicator
light in the button illuminates when HDC
is activated.
in the instruThe indicator light
ment panel illuminates and a message is
displayed when the system is controlling
the vehicle's speed.
HDC only functions when first or reverse
gears are selected (1 will be shown in the
instrument panel display when first gear
is selected).

•

The brake lights illuminate automatically
when HDC is controlling the vehicle's
speed.

•

The driver can slow or stop the vehicle at
any time by applying the brakes.

HDC is deactivated when:

•

The button on the center console is
pressed

•
•

A gear higher than first gear is selected
D is selected on vehicles with an automatic transmission

HDC can be deactivated at any time. If this is
done while driving down a steep hill, the system's braking effect will decrease gradually.

NOTE
HDC cannot be activated if the gear selector is the D position.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

147

03 Your driving environment
Hill Descent Control (HDC)*
NOTE
Engine response to pressure on the accelerator pedal may be slightly slower than
normal when HDC is activated.
03

148

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Your driving environment

149

150

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

152
154
156
158
169
172
178
188
193
197
200

G000000

Stability system.....................................................................................
Road sign information (RSI)* ................................................................
Cruise control........................................................................................
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*............................................................
Distance Alert* .....................................................................................
City Safety™ ........................................................................................
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake*.......................
Driver Alert System* .............................................................................
Park assist*...........................................................................................
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* ..........................................................
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*.................................................

DRIVER SUPPORT

04 Driver support
Stability system
Introduction
The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control
system (DSTC) consists of a number of functions designed to help reduce wheel spin,
counteract skidding, and to generally help
improve directional stability.

CAUTION
A pulsating sound will be audible when the
system is actively operating and is normal.

Traction control (TC)
This function is designed to help reduce
wheel spin by transferring power from a drive
wheel that begins to lose traction to the
wheel on the opposite side of the vehicle (on
the same axle).
TC is most active at low speeds.
This is one of DSTC's permanent functions
and cannot be switched off.

Active Yaw Control (AYC)
This function helps maintain directional stability, for example when cornering, by braking
one or more of the wheels if the vehicle
shows a tendency to skid or slide laterally.

152

Included when a Volvo trailer hitch is installed

This is one of DSTC's permanent functions
and cannot be switched off.

by allowing more lateral movement of the rear
wheels before DSTC is activated.

Spin control (SC)

Under certain circumstances, such as when
driving with snow chains, or driving in deep
snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to
temporarily use Sport mode for maximum
tractive force.

The spin control function is designed to help
prevent the drive wheels from spinning while
the vehicle is accelerating.

Trailer Stability Assist – TSA1
Trailer Stability Assist helps stabilize a vehicle
that is towing a trailer when the vehicle and
trailer have begun to sway. See page 304 for
more information.

If the driver releases pressure on the accelerator pedal, DSTC will also activate to help
stabilize the vehicle.
To switch to Sport mode:

This system is automatically deactivated if the
driver selects Sport mode.

1. Press the My Car button in the center
console control panel and select My
XC70 DSTC in the menu.

Operation

2. Unselect the symbol and leave the menu
by pressing EXIT.
> This puts DSTC in Sport mode.

Sport mode
The stability system is always activated and
cannot be switched off.
However, the driver can select Sport mode,
which offers more active driving characteristics. In this mode, the engine management
system monitors movement of the accelerator
pedal and steering wheel for sportier driving

Sport mode remains active until the driver
switches it off in the menu or until the engine
is switched off. DSTC will return to normal
mode when the engine is restarted.

04 Driver support
Stability system
Symbols and messages in the main instrument panel

Symbol

Message

Description

DSTC Temporarily
OFF

The DSTC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. DSTC
reactivates automatically when the brakes have cooled.

DSTC Service required

The DSTC system is not functioning properly.

•
•

Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it.
If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the system inspected.

"Message"

Read the message in the instrument panel

Steady glow for 2 secs.

The system is performing a self-diagnostic test.

Flashing symbol

DSTC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.

Sport mode has been activated.

and

WARNING
The stability system is intended to help
improve driving safety. It supplements, but
can never replace, the driver's judgment
and responsibility when operating the vehicle. Speed and driving style should always
be adapted to traffic and road conditions.

153

04 Driver support
Road sign information (RSI)*
Introduction

Operation

Displaying the speed limit indication can be
deactivated. To do so:

•

Deselect the alternative in MY CAR
Settings Car settings Road Sign
Information or cancel by pressing EXIT.

Speed alert
The driver can opt to be alerted if the vehicle
exceeds the posted speed limit by more than
3 mph (5 km/h). The alert is given when the
symbol with the posted speed limit in the
instrument panel begins to flash.

To activate speed alert:
Examples of readable road signs

Speed limit information

Road Sign Information (RSI) is a feature that
helps the driver see road signs with the posted speed limit.

When RSI registers a road sign showing the
speed limit, this sign is displayed as a symbol
on the instrument panel.

If the vehicle passes a sign showing the
speed limit, this will be displayed in the center
console.

Settings in MY CAR

WARNING

Check the Speed alert box in MY CAR
Settings Car settings Speed alert
or cancel by pressing EXIT.

Limitations
RSI's camera has the same limitations as the
human eye. See page 182 for more information about the camera's limitations.
Signs that indirectly indicate the speed limit
(such as a sign with a town's name and the
permitted speed limit) will not be registered
by RSI.

RSI does not function in all situations and
is only intended to provide supplementary
information.
The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle safely.

Other factors that may interfere with RSI
include:
Possible settings in MY CAR

154

•

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

•
•

Faded signs
Signs located in a curve

04 Driver support
Road sign information (RSI)*
•
•
•

Twisted or damaged signs
Obstructed signs
Signs that are partially covered by snow,
ice, etc.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

155

04 Driver support
Cruise control
Operation

Engaging the cruise control function

Adjusting the set speed

Before a speed can be set, the cruise control
system must be engaged (put in standby
mode).

After a speed has been set, it can be
increased or decreased by using the
buttons.

–

NOTE

04
Steering wheel-mounted controls and display

Putting cruise control in standby mode
does not set a cruising speed.

Standby mode

Setting a speed

Resume set speed

Use the
or
buttons set the vehicle's
current speed. The set speed is shown in the
display.

Deactivating
Activate/set speed
Selected speed (gray symbol indicates
standby mode)
Cruise control active: white symbol (gray
symbol indicates standby mode)

156

Press the CRUISE button (1).
> The symbol
illuminates and the text
(---) mph (5) indicates that cruise control is in standby mode.

1. Press
or
briefly and release the
button to increase or decrease vehicle
speed by approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
> This will become the set speed when
the button is released.
2. To adjust the speed in increments of
1 mph (approx. 2 km/h), press and hold
or
until the vehicle reaches
down
the desired speed.

NOTE

•

A temporary increase in speed by
pressing the accelerator pedal, for less
than 1 minute (e.g. when passing
another car), does not affect the current cruise control setting. The vehicle
will automatically return to the previously set speed when the accelerator
pedal is released.

•

If one of the cruise control buttons is
kept depressed for more than approx.
1 minute cruise control is disengaged.
The engine must then be switched off
in order to reset cruise control.

NOTE
Cruise control cannot be engaged at
speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).

04 Driver support
Cruise control
Automatic deactivation
Cruise control is automatically deactivated
temporarily if one of the following occurs:

•

If the speed drops below approximately
20 mph (30 km/h).

•
•

When the brake pedal is depressed.

•
•

During wheel spin or wheel lock-up.

If the gear selector is moved to position
N.
If the vehicle's speed is increased by
using the accelerator pedal for more than
1 minute.

The currently set speed will be saved in the
system's memory.

Temporary deactivation

WARNING
There may be a significant increase in
speed after the
button has been
pressed.

Deactivation
Cruise control is disengaged by pressing
or by switching off the engine. The set speed
is cleared.

WARNING

Cruise control should not be used in heavy
traffic or when driving on wet or slippery
roads. Cruise control may not maintain set
speed on steep downgrades.

The driver can temporarily deactivate cruise
control by pressing 0. The saved speed is
shown in brackets in the information display.

Resume set speed
If cruise control has been deactivated tempo.
rarily, it can be reactivated by pressing
The vehicle's speed returns to the most
recently set speed.

157

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Introduction
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an optional
system designed to assist the driver by maintaining a set speed or a set time interval to
the vehicle ahead. It is primarily intended for
use on long straight roads in steady traffic,
such as on highways and other main roads.

When the driver has set the desired speed
and the time interval to the vehicle ahead,
ACC functions as follows:

•

If there are no other vehicles in the lane
ahead of you, your vehicle will travel at
the set speed.

•

If ACC's radar sensor detects a slower
moving vehicle in the lane ahead, the system will adapt your vehicle's speed to
help maintain the set time interval to the
vehicle ahead. When there are no longer
slower moving vehicles ahead, your vehicle will accelerate to resume the set
speed.

WARNING

•

Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover
all driving situations and traffic,
weather and road conditions. The
"Function" section provides information about limitations that the driver
must be aware of before using this
feature.

•

This system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed and must intervene if
Adaptive Cruise Control does not
maintain a suitable speed or suitable
distance to the vehicle ahead.

•

If ACC is switched off completely or in
standby mode and your vehicle comes too
close to another vehicle ahead, the driver will
be warned by the Distance Alert system (see
page 169).

158

The illustration is generic; details will vary, depending on the model

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Maintenance of ACC components may
only be performed by a trained and
qualified Volvo technician.

Function

Function overview1

Warning light, braking by driver required
Controls in steering wheel
Radar sensor in front grille
Adaptive Cruise Control consists of:

•

A cruise control system to maintain a set
speed

•

A system to maintain a set distance to the
vehicle ahead, which is expressed as a
time interval. For example, you can
choose to remain approximately 2 seconds behind the vehicle ahead. The
actual distance required to maintain a

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
2-second interval will vary according the
speed of the vehicles.

WARNING

•

Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is
always responsible for applying the
brakes if the system does not detect
another vehicle.

•

Adaptive Cruise Control does not react
to people or animals, or small vehicles
such as bicycles and motorcycles. It
also does not react to slow moving,
parked or approaching vehicles, or
stationary objects.

•

Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in
demanding driving conditions such as
city driving or other heavy traffic situations, in slippery conditions, when
there is a great deal of water or slush
on the road, during heavy rain or
snow, in poor visibility, on winding
roads or on highway on- or off-ramps.

The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the
same lane) is monitored by a radar sensor.
Your vehicle's speed is regulated by accelerating and braking. The brakes may emit a
sound when they are being modulated by the

adaptive cruise control system. This is normal.

WARNING

WARNING
The brake pedal moves when the adaptive
cruise control system modulates the
brakes. Do not rest your foot under the
brake pedal.

The ACC system is designed to smoothly
regulate speed. However, the driver must
apply the brakes in situations that require
immediate braking. This applies when there
are great differences in speed between vehicles, or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly.

WARNING
Due to limitations in the radar sensor,
braking may occur unexpectedly or not at
all, see page 165.

When Adaptive Cruise Control is in
standby mode or is switched off completely, the brakes will not be modulated
automatically. The driver must assume full
control over the vehicle.

Warning light—driver braking required
Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force
that is equivalent to approximately 40% of
the vehicle's total braking capacity. In situations requiring more brake force than ACC
can provide and if the driver does not apply
the brakes, an audible signal from the Collision Warning system will sound and warning
light will illuminate (see page 179) in the
windshield to alert the driver to react.

NOTE

Adaptive Cruise Control can be put in active
mode at any permitted speed. However, if the
vehicle's speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h)
or if engine speed (rpm) becomes too low,
ACC disengages (goes into standby mode)
and will no longer modulate the brakes. The
driver will then have to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light
contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead may
make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

159

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
WARNING

Operation

Before ACC can be used to regulate speed
and/or the distance to a vehicle ahead, it
must first be put in standby mode.

Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of
vehicles detected by the radar sensor, see
page 165. In some cases there may be no
warning or the warning may be delayed.
The driver should always apply the brakes
when necessary.

To do so:

Steep inclines and/or heavy loads
04

ACC is primarily intended for use on fairly
level roads. The system may have difficulty
maintaining the correct distance to a vehicle
ahead on steep inclines, if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load or is towing a trailer. In
these situations, the driver should always be
prepared to apply the brakes if necessary.

Putting ACC in standby mode

•

Press

The same symbol (7) appears (in white) in
the instrument panel to indicate that ACC
is in standby mode.

NOTE
The driver's door must be closed and the
driver's seat belt must be fastened before
ACC can be put in active mode. If the driver's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's
door is opened, ACC will return to standby
mode.

Controls and display

Resume previous settings.
Off/On/Standby mode
Decrease/increase time interval
Put in active mode and set a speed (each
additional press increases/decreases
speed by 1 mph (approximately 2 km/h))
Set speed (shown in green when active,
shown in white when in standby mode)
Time interval
ACC active (green symbol) or in standby
mode (white symbol)

160

(2).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Setting a speed
Once ACC has been put in standby mode:

•

Press

The set speed, for example 60 mph (5),
will be magnified for several seconds and
the frame around the speed will change
colors from white to green to indicate
that this speed has been stored (set).

(4).

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
When this symbol has changed colors from white to green, ACC is in
active mode and the vehicle will
maintain the set speed.

pedal, the vehicle's speed when the button is pressed will be set.

•

Press and hold one of the buttons to
increase/decrease the speed by 1 mph
(approximately 1 km/h) at a time. Release
the button when you have reached the
desired speed.

This symbol indicates that
you are approaching a vehicle ahead.

that vehicle.

ACC will switch from maintaining a set speed to maintaining a set distance from

NOTE

•

When this happens, a speed
range will be indicated on
the speedometer:
The higher speed (the currently set speed (5)) will be
marked in green.
The lower speed in the range is the speed of
the vehicle ahead.

Changing the set speed

•

After a speed has been set, it can be
increased or decreased by briefly pressor
buttons. Each time one
ing the
of these buttons is pressed, the vehicle's
speed changes by 3 mph
(approximately 5 km/h). If the speed is
increased by pressing the accelerator

•

If one of the Adaptive Cruise Control
buttons is pressed for more than
approximately one minute, ACC will be
deactivated. The engine must then be
switched off and restarted to reset
ACC.
In some situations Adaptive Cruise
Control cannot be put in active mode.
Cruise control Unavailable is shown
in the display, see page 167.

Setting a time interval
The set time interval to vehicles ahead can be
and decreased by
increased by pressing
pressing
. The current time interval is
shown briefly in the display following adjustment.

Different time intervals can
be selected and are shown in
the instrument panel2 as 1–5
horizontal bars. The greater
the number of bars, the
longer the time interval. One
bar represents a time interval
of approximately 1 second; 5 bars is approximately 3 seconds.
To set/change a time interval:

•

Press the

buttons (3).

At low speeds, when the distance to the vehicle ahead is short, ACC increases the time
interval slightly. In order to follow the vehicle
ahead as smoothly as possible, ACC allows
the time interval to vary considerably in certain situations.

WARNING

•

Only use a time interval that is suitable
in current traffic conditions.

•

A short time interval gives the driver
limited reaction time if an unexpected
situation occurs in traffic.

The same symbol appears if Distance Alert (see page 169) is activated

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

161

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Standby mode (temporary deactivation)

NOTE

To temporarily deactivate ACC (put it in
standby mode):

•

Press

This symbol and the marking for the set
speed with change colors from green to
white.

The previously set speed and time interval are
.
resumed by pressing

WARNING
The vehicle may accelerate quickly after
has been pressed if its current speed is
considerably lower than the set speed.

Standby mode due to action by the
driver

Automatic standby mode
ACC is linked to other systems such as the
stability and traction control system (DSTC). If
this system is not functioning properly, ACC
will switch off automatically.
In the event of automatic deactivation, an
audible signal will sound and the message
Cruise control Cancelled is shown in the
instrument panel. The driver must then intervene and adapt the vehicle's speed to the
surrounding traffic and regulate the distance
to the vehicle ahead.

ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in
standby mode:

An automatic switch to standby mode may be
caused if:

•
•
•

•
•
•
•

engine speed (rpm) is too high/low

•
•

the wheels lose traction

if the brakes are applied
if the gear selector is moved to N
if the driver drives faster than the set
speed for more than 1 minute.

In this happens, the driver will have to regulate the vehicle's speed.

162

If the accelerator pedal is only depressed
for a short time, such as when passing
another vehicle, ACC is deactivated temporarily and is reactivated when the pedal
is released.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The driver's door is opened
The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt
the vehicle's speed goes below 18 mph
(30 km/h)
brake temperature is high

•

the radar sensor is obstructed by, for
example, wet snow or rain.

Resuming the set speed
If ACC is in standby mode, it can be reactivated by pressing the
button on the steering
wheel keypad. The vehicle will return to the
most recently set speed.

WARNING
The vehicle may accelerate quickly after
has been pressed if its current speed is
considerably lower than the set speed.

Passing another vehicle
If your vehicle’s speed is being regulated by
ACC and the driver indicates that he/she
would like to pass the vehicle ahead by using
the left turn signal, ACC can assist by accelerating briefly.
This function is active at speeds above
approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
WARNING

moving at speed below 18 mph
(30 km/h))

WARNING

Please be aware that this function will also
cause the vehicle to accelerate briefly in
certain situations other than passing
another vehicle, for example using the left
turn signal to indicate a lane change or a
turn toward a highway exit at speeds
above approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).

Switching from ACC to CC means that:

•
•

Your vehicle will no longer automatically maintain a set distance to a vehicle ahead.
Only the set speed will be maintained
and the driver will have to apply the
brakes when needed.

Turning ACC off completely

•
•

From standby mode, press
From active mode, press

once.
twice.

The set speed and time interval are then
cleared from the system's memory and cannot be resumed by pressing
.

Switching from CC to ACC
Switch off cruise control by pressing
once
or twice as needed according to the instructions in the previous section "Turning ACC off
completely." The next time the system is
switched on, ACC will be reactivated.

Toggling between ACC and CC
(standard Cruise Control)

Queue Assist

Switching from ACC to CC

Queue Assist is an added ACC feature that is
linked to your vehicle's automatic transmission.

This may be useful if, for example, the radar
sensor is obstructed in some way. See the
section "The radar sensor and its limitations"
on page 165 for additional information.

•

Press and hold the
button; the symbol
in the instrument panel will switch from
to
.

This activates the standard cruise control
function (see page 156).

Introduction

Queue Assist consists of the following functions:

•

Enhanced speed interval (including when
the vehicle is at a complete stop or is

•

Automatic standby mode when ACC
changes target vehicles

•
•

No automatic braking when at a standstill
The parking brake is applied automatically

Please note that the lowest speed that can be
set is 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC can
maintain a set speed/distance to a vehicle
ahead down to a standstill. Queue Assist
consists of the following features:

Enhanced speed interval

Your vehicle can maintain the set time interval
to the vehicle ahead at any permissible
speed, including a complete stop.
In order to activate ACC at speeds below
18 mph (30 km/h):

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

163

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
•
•

The vehicle ahead must be within a reasonable distance (not farther away than
approx. 100 ft/30 meters)
The lowest speed that can be selected is
18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC will also
help maintain the set time interval to the
vehicle ahead at lower speeds, including
a complete stop.

During short stops (less than approximately
3 seconds) in slow-moving traffic, your vehicle will begin moving again automatically as
soon as the vehicle ahead begins to move.

NOTE

WARNING
At speeds above 18 mph (30 km/h), ACC
will not react to a stationary vehicle and
apply the brakes but will instead accelerate to the previously set speed. The driver
must actively apply the brakes to stop the
vehicle.

ACC can remain active and keep your
vehicle at a standstill for up to 4 minutes.
After 4 minutes have elapsed, the parking
brake will be engaged and ACC will go into
standby mode.
To reactivate ACC, the driver must release
the parking brake (see page 145).

Automatic standby mode when ACC
changes target vehicles

ACC disengages and goes into standby
mode if:

•

Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph
(15 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if
the target object is a stationary vehicle or
some other type of object such as e.g., a
speed bump.

•

Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph
(15 km/h) and the vehicle ahead turns so
that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to
follow.

If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicle
ahead to begin moving, ACC will be automatically go into standby mode.
The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in
one of the following ways:

•
•

By pressing
By accelerating up to at least 3 mph
(4 km/h). ACC will then resume following
the vehicle ahead.

Your vehicle will then resume following the
vehicle ahead at the set time interval.

If the vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may be
a stationary vehicle ahead

The following only applies at speeds below
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h):
If ACC changes target vehicles (the vehicle
that the radar sensor has detected) from a
moving vehicle to a stationary one, the system will apply the brakes in your vehicle.

164

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

No automatic braking when at a
standstill
In certain situations, ACC will no longer apply
the brakes and go into standby mode while
the vehicle is not moving. This means that the
driver will have to apply the brakes.
This happens if:

•
•

The driver presses the brake pedal
The parking brake is activated

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
•
•

The gear selected is moved to P,N or R
The driver presses the
ACC in standby mode

WARNING

button to put

•

The parking brake is applied
automatically
In certain situations, ACC will apply the parking brake in order to continue keeping the
vehicle at a standstill.
This happens if:

If there is visible damage to the front
grille or you suspect that the radar
sensor may be damaged in any way,
contact a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician as soon as possible.
The radar sensor may only function
partially (or not at all) if it is damaged
or is not securely fastened in place.

•

Accessories or other objects, such as
extra headlights, must not be installed
in front of the grille.

•

Modification of the radar sensor could
make its use illegal.

•

The driver opens the door or takes off
his/her seat belt

•

DSTC is put in Sport mode (see
page 152)

•

ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill
for more than 2 minutes

•
•

The engine has been switched off

The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles ahead is impeded:

The brakes have overheated

•

The radar sensor and its limitations
In addition to being used by ACC, the radar
sensor is also used by Distance Alert (see
page 169) and Collision Warning with Full
Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection (see
page 178). This sensor is designed to detect
cars or larger vehicles driving in the same
direction as your vehicle, in the same lane.

Situations where ACC may not function
optimally

WARNING

•

The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. In some situations it may detect
a vehicle later than expected or not
detect other vehicles at all.

•

If ACC is not functioning properly,
cruise control will also be disabled.

if the radar sensor is obstructed and cannot detect other vehicles, for example in
heavy rain, or if snow or other objects are
obscuring the radar sensor.

NOTE
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor
clean.

•

if the speed of vehicles ahead is significantly different from your own speed.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

165

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
In curves, the radar sensor may detect
the wrong vehicle or lose sight of the target vehicle.

WARNING

•

Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is
always responsible for applying the
brakes if the system does not detect
another vehicle.

•

WARNING

•

Radar sensor's field of vision (shown in pink)

In certain situations, the radar sensor
cannot detect vehicles at close quarters,
for example a vehicle that suddenly
enters the lane between your vehicle and
the target vehicle.

•

Maintenance of ACC components may
only be performed by a trained and
qualified Volvo technician.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the center of the
lane may remain undetected.

166

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Fault tracing and actions
If the message Radar blocked See manual
is displayed, this means that the radar signals
from the sensor have been obstructed and
that a vehicle ahead cannot be detected.
This, in turn, means that the functions of the
ACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
System with Auto-brake and Pedestrian
Detection will not function.

The table lists possible causes for this message being displayed, and suitable actions.

Cause

Action

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some
way.

Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.

No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the
radar.

Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere
with the radar signals.

No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect
the function of the radar.

The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the
display.

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that
it is no longer obstructed.

Symbols and messages in the display
Symbol

Message

Description

Green symbol

A speed has been set.

White symbol

ACC is in standby mode but no speed has been set.

Standard cruise control has been selected manually.

DSTC Normal to enable
Cruise

ACC cannot be put in active mode until the stability system DSTC is switched normal operating mode,
see page 152 for more information.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

167

04 Driver support
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Symbol

Message

Description

Cruise control Cancelled

ACC has been automatically switched off. The driver has to regulate the vehicle’s speed/distance to the
vehicle ahead.

Cruise control Unavailable

ACC cannot be put in active mode. This may be due to:

Radar blocked See
manual

•
•

high brake temperature
the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.)

ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot
detect other vehicles.
In this situation, the driver can switch to standard cruise control, see page 163
See page 165 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Cruise control Service
required

ACC is not functioning.

Press Brake To hold +
an audible signal

The vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will release the brakes before the parking brake engages to keep
the vehicle stopped but a problem with the parking brake means that the vehicle may begin to roll.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

The driver will have to apply the brakes. The message will remain in the display and the audible signal
will continue until the driver applies the brakes or presses the accelerator pedal.
-

168

Below 30 km/h Only
following

This is displayed if you try to activate ACC at speeds below approx. 18 mph (30 km/h) without a vehicle
ahead within range (approx. 100 ft/30 meters).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Driver support
Distance Alert*
Introduction

Depending on the optional equipment
selected, there may not be room for a Distance Alert button in the center console. In
this case, the function is controlled through
the menu system. Press MY CAR and go to
Settings Car settings Distance alert
On/Off.

NOTE

Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Control and is a function that provides information about the time interval to the vehicle
ahead.

Distance Alert only monitors distance to
the vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise
Control is in standby mode or off.

Distance Alert is active at speeds above
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h). Time interval information is only given for a vehicle that
is driving ahead of your vehicle in the same
direction. No information is provided for vehicles driving toward you, moving very slowly,
or at a standstill.

Distance Alert only indicates the distance
to the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the
speed of your vehicle.

WARNING

Setting a time interval
04

Operation

Controls and display

Time interval: Increase/decrease
Time interval On
Amber warning light1

An amber warning light in the windshield
glows steadily if your vehicle is closer to the
one ahead than the set time interval.
1

Press the button in the center instrument
panel to switch this function on or off. The
indicator light in the button illuminates when
the function is on.

Press
to increase the interval or
decrease it.

The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

169

04 Driver support
Distance Alert*
Five different time intervals
can be selected and are
shown in the display as 1–5
horizontal bars. The greater
the number of bars, the
longer the time interval. One
bar represents approximately
1 second to the vehicle ahead; 5 bars is
approximately 3 seconds.
04

170

NOTE

•

The higher your vehicle’s speed, the
greater the distance to the vehicle
ahead, measured in feet (meters), for a
given time interval.

•

The set time interval is also used by
Adaptive Cruise Control, see
page 160.

WARNING
Only use a time interval that is suitable in
current traffic conditions.

Limitations
Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor
used by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Collision Warning system. See page 165 for
more information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light
contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead may
make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see.

WARNING

•

Bad weather or winding roads may
affect the radar sensor’s capacity to
detect vehicles ahead.

•

The size of the vehicle ahead, such as
a motorcycle, may also make it difficult
to detect. This may result in the warning light illuminating at a shorter distance than the one that has been set,
or that the light will not come on at all.

04 Driver support
Distance Alert*
Symbols and text messages
Symbol

Message

Description

Radar blocked See
manual

Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect other vehicles. See page 165 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Service required

Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

171

04 Driver support
City Safety™
Introduction
City Safety™1 is a support system designed
to help the driver avoid low speed collisions
when driving in slow-moving, stop-and-go
traffic.

City Safety™ is not active if your vehicle’s
speed is below approximately 2 mph
(4 km/h). This means that City Safety™ will
not react if your vehicle approaches another
vehicle at very low speed, for example, when
parking.
The function is active at speeds up to
approximately 30 mph (50 km/h) and assists
the driver by applying the brakes automatically, thereby avoiding or helping to reduce
the effects of a collision.
City Safety™ is designed to intervene as late
as possible to help avoid unnecessary activation.
City Safety™ triggers brief, forceful braking if
a low-speed collision is imminent. However,
the system will not intervene in situations
where the driver actively steers the vehicle or
applies the brakes, even if a collision cannot
be avoided. This is done in order to always
give the driver’s actions highest priority.

172

City Safety is a registered trademark of the Volvo Car Corporation

City Safety™ activates in situations where the
driver has not applied the brakes in time,
which means that the system cannot help the
driver in all situations.
City Safety™ should not be used to alter the
way in which the driver operates the vehicle.
The driver should never rely solely on this
system to safely stop the vehicle.
Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will
not be aware of City Safety™ except when
the system intervenes when a low-speed collision is imminent.
If the vehicle is also equipped with the
optional Collision Warning with Full Autobrake and Pedestrian Detection system, the
two systems interact. For more information
about the Collision Warning with Auto-brake
system, see page 178.

WARNING

•

City Safety™ is a supplemental aid to
the driver. It can never replace the
driver’s attention to traffic conditions
or his/her responsibility for operating
the vehicle in a safe manner.

•

City Safety™ does not function in all
driving situations or in all traffic,
weather or road conditions.

04 Driver support
City Safety™
WARNING

•

City Safety™ only reacts to vehicles
traveling in the same direction as your
vehicle and does not react to small
vehicles or motorcycles or to people or
animals.

•

City Safety™ is not activated when
your vehicle is backing up.

•

City Safety™ functions at speeds up
to 30 mph (50 km/h). This system can
help prevent a collision if the difference in speed between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead is less than
9 mph (15 km/h). If the difference in
speed is greater, a collision cannot be
avoided but the speed at which the
collision occurs can be reduced. The
driver must apply the vehicle’s brakes
for full braking effect.

•

Function

City Safety™ will not intervene in a
potential collision situation if the vehicle is being driven actively. The driver
is always responsible for maintaining a
safe distance to a vehicle or object
ahead.

NOTE

Location of the laser sensor in the windshield2

City Safety™ monitors traffic ahead of you
using a laser sensor mounted in the upper
section of the windshield. If a collision is
imminent, City Safety™ will automatically
apply the brakes, which may feel like hard
braking.
If the difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is more than
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), City Safety™
alone cannot prevent a collision from taking
place. The driver must apply the brakes to
help avoid a collision or reduce its effect.
When the function activates and applies the
brakes, a message will appear in the informa-

tion display to indicate that the system is/has
been active.

The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

•

When City Safety™ applies the
brakes, the brake lights will illuminate.

•

In cases where City Safety™ has stopped the vehicle, the system will then
release the brakes. The driver must
apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at
a standstill.

Using City Safety™
NOTE
The City Safety™ function is activated
automatically each time the engine has
been switched off and restarted.

On and Off
In certain situations, it may be desirable to
switch City Safety™ off, such as when driving
in close quarters where leaves, branches, etc.
may obscure the hood and windshield.
When the engine is running, City Safety™ can
be switched off as follows:

}}

173

04 Driver support
City Safety™
Press My Car in the center console control
panel and go to Settings Car settings
Driver support systems City Safety.
Select Off.
If the engine is switched off, City Safety™ will
reactivate when the engine is restarted.

WARNING
The laser sensor emits light when the ignition is in mode II or higher, even if City
Safety™ has been switched off.

To switch City Safety™ on again:

•

Follow the same procedure as for switching City Safety™ off but select On.

Limitations
The sensor used by City Safety™ is designed
to detect cars and other larger motor vehicles
ahead of your vehicle in both daylight and
darkness.

174

WARNING
The laser sensor has certain limitations
and its function may be reduced (or it may
not function at all) in conditions such as
heavy rain or snowfall, or by dense fog or
thick, blowing dust or snow. Condensation, dirt, ice or snow on the windshield
may also interfere with the sensor’s function.

Objects such as warning flags hanging from
long objects on the roof or accessories such
as auxiliary lights or protective arches on the
front of the vehicle that are higher than the
hood may also impede the sensor’s function.
Braking distance to the vehicle ahead increases on slippery road surfaces, which may
reduce City Safety’s capacity to avoid a collision. In situations like this, the DSTC system
(see page 152) will help provide the best possible braking capacity and stability.
City Safety™ emits a laser beam and measures the way in which the light is reflected.
Therefore, vehicles or objects with low-reflective surfaces may not be detected. Normally,
the license plate and taillight reflectors give
the rear section of a vehicle ahead sufficient
reflective surfaces to be detected.

NOTE

•

Keep the windshield in front of the
laser sensor free of ice, snow, dirt, etc.
See page 173.

•

Snow or ice on the hood deeper than
2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sensor. Keep the hood free of ice and
snow.

•

Do not mount or in any way attach
anything on the windshield that could
obstruct the laser sensor.

Troubleshooting
If Windscreen Sensors blocked appears in
the information display, this indicates that the
City Safety™ laser sensor is obstructed in
some way and cannot detect vehicles ahead
of you, which means that the system is not
functioning.
However, this message will not be displayed
in all situations in which the sensor is
obstructed. For this reason, the driver must
ensure that the area of the windshield in front
of the sensor is always kept clean.
The following table shows some of the situations that can cause the message to be displayed and suggested actions.

04 Driver support
City Safety™
Cause

Action

The area of the windshield in front of the sensor is dirty or covered by
ice or snow.

Clean the
windshield or
remove the ice/
snow.

The laser sensor's field
of view is obstructed.

Remove the
obstruction.

CAUTION

The laser sensor

If a crack, scratch or stone chip should
occur in the section of the windshield in
front the laser sensor, contact a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician to
repair or replace the windshield (see the
illustration showing the location of the sensor on page 173). Failing to do so may
result in reduced City Safety™ functionality.
To help prevent limited or reduced functionality, please also observe the following:

•

Volvo recommends that cracks,
scratches or stone chips on the windshield in front of the laser sensor
should not be repaired; in such cases,
the entire windshield should be
replaced.
Before the windshield is replaced,
contact a Volvo retailer to ensure that
the correct windshield is ordered and
installed. If the wrong type of windshield is used, this may cause City
Safety™ to function improperly or not
at all. Volvo recommends the use of
only Genuine Volvo Replacement
Windshields.
When replacing windshield wipers, use
the same type or ones approved by
Volvo.

The upper decal describes the laser beam's
classification and contains the following text:
Invisible Laser radiation – Do not view directly
with optical instruments (magnifiers) – Class
1M laser product.
The lower decal describes the laser beam's
physical data and contains the text:
IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with
FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to Laser
Notice No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001
The laser beam's physical data is listed in the
following table:

}}

175

04 Driver support
City Safety™
Maximum pulse energy

WARNING

2.64 μJ

Maximum average output

45 mW

Eye injury may occur if any of the following
points are not followed:

Pulse length

33 ns

•

Divergence (horizontal × vertical)

28° × 12°

NOTE
04

The function of aftermarket laser detectors
may be affected by City Safety's laser sensor.

•

Do not remove the laser sensor
(including removal of the lenses). A
laser sensor that has been removed
belongs to laser class 3B according to
standard IEC 60825-1. Devices in laser
class 3B present a risk of injury to the
eyes.

•

The laser sensor’s connector must be
disconnected before the sensor is
removed from the windshield.

•

The laser sensor must be mounted in
place on the windshield before connecting the sensor’s connector.

•

Do not view the laser sensor (which
emits spreading, invisible laser beams)
with optical instruments from a distance of less than 4 inches (100 mm).

WARNING
The laser sensor emits light when the ignition is in mode II or higher, even if City
Safety™ has been switched off.

176

It is essential that all pertinent instructions be followed when handling laser
instruments. Testing, repairing, removing, adjusting and/or replacing any
components in the laser sensor may
only be done by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.

Symbols and messages in the display
When City Safety™ automatically applies the
brakes, one or more of the symbols in the
main instrument panel may illuminate and its
associated message will be displayed.
A text message can be erased by pressing
briefly on the OK button on the turn signal
lever.

04 Driver support
City Safety™
Symbol

Message

Meaning/action required

Auto braking by City
Safety

City Safety™ is applying/has applied the brakes automatically.

Windscreen Sensors
blocked

The laser sensor is temporarily not functioning due to an obstruction.

•

Remove the obstruction and/or clean the windshield in front of the sensor(s).

For more information on the sensor’s limitations, see page 174.

City Safety Service
required

City Safety™ is not functioning.

•

If this message remains in the display, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.

177

04 Driver support
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake*
Introduction
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake is designed to assist the driver if
there is a risk of a collision with a pedestrian,
a cyclist, a vehicle ahead that is at a standstill
or one that is moving in the same direction as
your vehicle.
This system consists of the following three
functions:
04

•

Collision Warning warns the driver of a
potential collision situation.

•

Brake Support helps the driver brake
efficiently in a critical situation.

•

Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automatically if a collision with a pedestrian, a
cyclist or another vehicle cannot be avoided and the driver does not apply the
brakes in time or steer around the person/vehicle. Auto-brake can help prevent
a collision or reduce the speed at which a
collision occurs.

The system should not be used in such a way
that the driver changes his/her way of operating the vehicle. If the driver relies entirely on
the system, the chances of an accident eventually occurring increase considerably.
The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake and City Safety™ systems supplement each other. See page 172 for
detailed information about City Safety™.

WARNING
No automatic system can be guaranteed
to function 100% correctly in all situations.
For that reason, never test the Auto-brake
system by driving toward a person or
object. This could result in serious injury or
death.

Since Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake is activated in circumstances
where the driver should have begun braking
much sooner, the system will not be able to
assist the driver in all situations.
This system is designed to activate as late as
possible to help avoid unnecessary intervention.

178

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

•

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake does not work in all
driving, traffic, weather and road conditions. It does not react to vehicles
not traveling in the same direction as
your vehicle.

•

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake does not react to animals.

•

Warnings are only provided when the
risk of collision is high. The "Function"
section provides information about
limitations that the driver must be
aware of before using Collision Warning.

•

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake will not provide a
warning or brake the vehicle for
pedestrians or cyclists at speeds
above 50 mph (80 km/h).

04 Driver support
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake*
WARNING

•

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake will not provide a
warning or brake the vehicle for
pedestrians in darkness or in tunnels,
even if there is street lighting in the
area.

•

The auto-brake function can help prevent a collision or reduce the speed at
impact but the driver should always
apply the brakes for the best possible
braking effect, even if auto-brake is
actively applying the brakes.

•

Never wait for a collision warning. This
system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however,
intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is
responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed, even when the collision warning system is in use.
Maintenance of the Pedestrian and
Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake
system's components must only be
performed by a trained and qualified
Volvo technician.

Function

Brake Support
If the risk of collision continues to increase
after the collision warning has been given,
Brake Support is activated. Brake Support
prepares the brake system to react quickly,
and the brakes are applied slightly. This may
be experienced as a light tug.
If the brakes are applied quickly, full braking
effect will be provided. Brake Support also
increases brake force if the system determines that the driver has not applied adequate pressure on the brake pedal.

Auto-brake

Function overview

Audio-visual warning signals, collision risk
Radar sensor
Camera

Collision Warning
The radar sensor and the camera work
together to detect a pedestrian, a cyclist, stationary vehicles and vehicles that are moving
in the same direction as your vehicle. If there
is a risk of collision with a vehicle, a cyclist or
a pedestrian, the driver is alerted by a flashing red warning light and an audible warning
signal. The system is active at speeds above
3 mph (4 km/h).

If a collision is imminent and the driver has
not applied the brakes or begun to steer
around the vehicle, pedestrian or a cyclist,
the auto-brake function is activated without
the driver pressing the brake pedal. Full brake
force is applied to help reduce the vehicle’s
speed when the collision occurs or limited
brake force is applied if this is sufficient to
avoid the collision.

NOTE
The auto-brake and brake support functions are always on and cannot be turned
off.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

179

04 Driver support
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake*
Operation
Settings are made by pressing MY CAR on
the center console control panel and using
the menus displayed.

Activating/deactivating both warning
signals

To switch the system's audible and visual
signals on or off at the same time, press MY
CAR on the center console control panel and
go to Settings Car settings Driver
support systems Collision Warning. If
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake is on, the system will perform a
self-test each time the engine is started by
briefly illuminating the warning light. See page
209 for a description of the menu system.
When the engine is switched on, the system
setting that was being used when it was
switched off will be the default setting.

NOTE

Activating/deactivating the audible
warning signal only

WARNING

The audible warning signal can be activated/
deactivated by pressing MY CAR on the center console control panel and going to
Settings Car settings Driver support
systems Warning sound if risk of
collision.

•

The setting Short should only be used
in situations where traffic is light and
moving at low speeds.

•

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake alerts the driver to the
risk of a collision but this function cannot reduce the driver’s reaction time.

Setting a warning distance

•

For the system to be as effective as
possible, it is recommended that Distance Alert be set to 4 or 5, see
page 169.

This setting determines the distance at which
the visual and audible warnings are triggered.
Select Long, Normal or Short by pressing
MY CAR on the center console control panel
and going to Settings Car settings
Driver support systems Collision
Warning Warning distance.
The warning distance determines the level of
sensitivity used by the system. The warning
distance Long provides an earlier warning.
Begin by using Long and if the system gives
too many warnings, try changing to Normal.

The auto-brake and pedestrian/cyclist
detection features are always on, even if
the audible and visual warning signals
have been deactivated.

NOTE

•

When Adaptive Cruise Control is used,
the warning light and signal will be
used by that function, even if the
warnings provided by Pedestrian and
Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake
have been deactivated by the driver.

•

In situations where traffic is moving at
considerably different speeds, or if the
vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warnings may be considered to be late,
even if the setting Long has been
selected.

Checking settings
The current system settings can be checked
by pressing MY CAR on the center console

180

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Driver support
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake*
control panel and going to Settings
settings Driver support systems
Collision Warning.

Car

Maintenance

Limitations
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light
contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead may make
the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see. For this reason, always activate
the audible warning signal.
Slippery driving conditions increase braking
distance, which can reduce the system's
capacity to avoid a collision. In these conditions, the ABS and DSTC systems provide
the best possible braking effect while helping
to maintain stability.

NOTE
Camera and radar sensor1

In order to function properly, the camera and
radar sensor must be kept clean. Dirt, ice,
snow, etc., will reduce the function of these
components.
Remove ice and snow when necessary and
wash these areas regularly with a suitable car
washing liquid.

The visual warning signal may be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature due to
strong sunlight, etc. If this occurs, the
audible warning signal will be used, even if
it has been deactivated in the menu system.

WARNING

•

In certain situations, the system cannot provide warnings or warnings may
be delayed if traffic conditions or other
external factors make it impossible for
the radar sensor or camera to detect a
pedestrian, a cyclist or a vehicle
ahead.

•

Warnings may not be provided if the
distance to the vehicle ahead is short,
or if movements of the steering wheel/
brake pedal are great, such as during
active driving.

•

The sensor system has a limited range
for pedestrians/cyclists and provides
warnings and braking effect most
effectively at speeds up to 30 mph
(50 km/h). For stationary or slow-moving vehicles, the system functions best
if your vehicle’s speed is below
approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).

•

Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles may not be provided in
dark conditions or in poor visibility.

The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake system uses the same radar sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control. For more

The illustration is generic; details will vary, depending on the model

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

181

04 Driver support
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake*
information on the radar sensor and its limitations, see page 165.

WARNING
The system is not activated at speeds
under approx. 2 mph (4 km/h). Therefore, it will not brake your vehicle if you
approach a vehicle ahead at very low
speed, such as when parking.

•

To help protect the camera in very hot
conditions, it may be temporarily
switched off for approximately 15
minutes after the engine has been
started.

•

The driver's actions always have highest priority and override the Pedestrian
and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto
Brake system. This means that the
system will not intervene in situations
where the driver is actively steering,
braking or pressing the accelerator
pedal, even if a collision is imminent.

•

Keep the section of the windshield in
front of the camera clean and free of
ice, snow, or condensation.

•

When Auto-brake has prevented a collision with a stationary object, your
vehicle will remain at a standstill for
approx. 1.5 seconds. If your vehicle
has been braked for a moving vehicle
ahead, your vehicle's speed will be
reduced to the same speed as that
vehicle's.

NOTE
If warnings are given too frequently, the
warning distance can be reduced (see
page 180). This causes the system to provide later warnings, which decreases the
total number of warnings provided.
04

The camera’s limitations
The camera is used by Pedestrian and Cyclist
Detection with Full Auto Brake, Driver Alert
Control (see page 188), and Lane Departure
Warning (see page 190).

182

NOTE

•

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Driver support
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake*
WARNING

•

entire body and the person must be at
least 32 in. (80 cm) tall.

Pedestrian detection

The camera has the same limitations
as the human eye. In other words, its
“vision is impaired” by adverse
weather conditions such as heavy
snowfall, dense fog, etc. These conditions may reduce the function of systems that depend on the camera or
cause these systems to temporarily
stop functioning.
Never place any objects, decals, etc.,
on the windshield in front of the camera. This could reduce or block the
camera’s function, and could cause
one or more of the systems that utilize
the camera to stop functioning.
Strong sunlight, reflections from the
road surface, ice or snow covering the
road, a dirty road surface, or unclear
lane marker lines may drastically
reduce the camera’s capacity to
detect the side of a lane, a pedestrian,
a cyclist or another vehicle.

•

The system cannot detect a pedestrian
carrying a large object.

•

The camera's capacity to see a pedestrian at dawn or dusk is limited, much as
it is for the human eye.

•

The camera's function is deactivated and
will not detect a pedestrian in darkness or
in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in
the area.

WARNING

The system cannot identify all pedestrians

The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake system can only identify and
detect a pedestrian who is standing upright.
This person can be standing still, walking or
running.
This means that the system has to be able to
identify a person's head, arms, shoulders,
legs, the upper and lower parts of the body
and a person's pattern of movement when
walking or running.
If parts of the body are not visible to the camera, the system cannot detect the pedestrian.

•

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake is designed to be a
supplementary driving aid. It is not,
however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner.

•

The system cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations, such as in darkness/at night and cannot detect partially hidden pedestrians, people who
are less than approx. 32 in. (80 cm)
tall, or people wearing clothing that
obscures the contours of their bodies.

The following conditions apply:

•

In order to detect a pedestrian, the system must have a full view of the person's
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

183

04 Driver support
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake*
Cyclist detection

04
Optimal example of what the system considers
to be a cyclist: clear body/bike contours, straight
from behind and directly in front of the vehicle

In order to help detect a cyclist, the system
has to receive clear information about the
contours of the cyclist's body and the bike. It
has to able to clearly detect the bike, the
cyclist's head, arms, shoulders, legs and
upper and lower body combined with the person's pattern of movement when cycling.

184

The function only detects cyclists from behind
who are moving in the same direction as your
vehicle

The Cyclist Detection feature requires the following in order to function:

•

The cyclist must be an adult riding an
"adult-size" bike

•

The bike must be equipped with an
approved and clearly visible rear-facing
red reflector that is mounted at least
27 in. (70 cm) above the road surface

•

The feature can only detect a cyclist
straight from behind and who is moving in
the same direction as your vehicle

•

A cyclist who is to the left or right of your
vehicle may be detected late or not at all.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

•

The camera's capacity to see a cyclist at
dawn or dusk is limited, much as it is for
the human eye.

•

The camera's function is deactivated and
will not detect a cyclist in darkness or in
tunnels, even if there is street lighting in
the area.

•

For optimal cyclist detection, City
Safety™ must be activated (see
page 172)

04 Driver support
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake*
WARNING
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however,
intended to replace the driver's attention
and judgement. The driver is always
responsible for operating the vehicle in a
safe manner.

Fault tracing and actions
If the message Windscreen Sensors
blocked is displayed, this means that the
camera is obscured and cannot detect
pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles or road marker
lines in front of the vehicle.

•

He/she is wearing loose-fitting clothing
that may obscure body contours

This, in turn, means that Pedestrian and
Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake, Lane
Departure Warning, and Driver Alert Control
will not have full functionality.

•

The bike is approaching your vehicle
from the side

•

The table lists possible causes for this message being displayed, and suitable actions.

The bike is not equipped with a rearfacing red reflector

The system cannot detect a bike/cyclist if:

•
•

The bike is carrying large objects
Most of the cyclist's body or the bike
itself cannot be "seen" by the system's
camera

Cause

Action

The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered
with ice or snow.

Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera.

Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera.

No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the
camera.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

185

04 Driver support
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake*
Cause

Action

The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the
display.

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to register visibility.

The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is
dirty.

Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this
surface cleaned.

Symbols and messages in the display

Symbol
04

186

Message

Description

Collision Warning
Off

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is switched off. This message is displayed when the
engine is started and will disappear after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the OK button.

Collision Warning
Unavailable

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake cannot be activated. This message is displayed when
the driver attempts to activate the function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by
pressing the OK button.

Auto braking was
activated

Auto-braking has been active. This message can be erased by pressing the OK button.

Windscreen Sensors blocked

The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by snow,
ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see page 182 for
more information on the camera’s limitations.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Driver support
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake*
Symbol

Message

Description

Radar blocked See
manual

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is
blocked, for example by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect
other vehicles, see page 165 for more information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn.
Service required

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is partially or completely not functioning.
Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

187

04 Driver support
Driver Alert System*
Introduction

Driver Alert Control (DAC)

The Driver Alert System is designed to help a
driver who may be becoming fatigued or who
is inadvertently leaving the lane and consists
of two different functions that can be
switched on together or separately.

•
•
04

WARNING

•

DAC is not intended to extend the
duration of driving. Always plan breaks
at regular intervals to help remain alert.

•

In certain cases, fatigue may not affect
the driver’s behavior. In situations of
this type, no warning will be provided.
Therefore, it is important to take
breaks at regular intervals, regardless
of whether or not DAC has given a
warning.

Driver Alert Control (DAC)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see
page 190

When one or both of the functions has been
switched on, it is in standby mode and is activated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of
40 mph (65 km/h).
The function deactivates if the vehicle's
speed goes under 37 mph (60 km/h).
Both functions use a camera that is dependent on the road/lane being clearly marked by
painted lines on each side.

WARNING
The Driver Alert System does not function
in all situations and is designed to be a
supplementary aid. It is not, however,
intended to replace the driver’s attention
and judgement.

This function is intended to alert the driver if
his/her driving becomes erratic, such as if the
driver is distracted or fatigued.

NOTE
The camera has certain limitations, see
page 165.

A camera monitors the painted lines marking
the lane in which the vehicle is traveling and
compares the direction of the road with the
driver’s movements of the steering wheel.
The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not
follow the lane smoothly.
DAC is designed to help detect a slowly
changing driving pattern. It is primarily

188

intended to be used on main roads and is not
meant for use in city traffic.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Limitations
In certain situations, DAC may provide warnings even if the driver’s driving pattern has
not become erratic.

•

if the driver is testing the LDW function,
see page 190

•
•

in strong crosswinds
on grooved road surfaces.

Operating DAC
Settings are made using menu system and
the display in the center console. See page
209 for more information on the menu system.

04 Driver support
Driver Alert System*
On/Off

•

Press the OK button to erase a message.

remain active as long as the speed is over
approx. 37 mph (60 km/h).

To put Driver Alert in standby mode:
In the MY CAR menu, scroll to Car
settings Driver support systems
Driver Alert and check the box. If the box
is not checked, the function is off.

Function
Driver Alert is activated when the vehicle
exceeds a speed of 40 mph (65 km/h) and will

If the vehicle is being driven erratically, the driver will be alerted by an
audible signal and the message
Driver Alert Time for a break is
displayed. The warning will be repeated after
a short time if the driving pattern remains the
same.

WARNING

•

An alert should be taken seriously
since it is sometimes difficult for a
driver to realize that he/she is fatigued.

•

In the event of a warning or if the
driver feels fatigued, stop as soon as
possible in a safe place and rest.
04

Symbols and messages
Instrument panel

Symbol

Message

Description

Driver Alert Time for a
break

The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message.

Windscreen Sensors
blocked

The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of
the windshield in front of the camera. See page 182 for information on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service
required

The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message
remains in the display.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

189

04 Driver support
Driver Alert System*
Center console display

Symbol

Message

Description

Driver Alert OFF

The function is not switched on.

Driver Alert Available

The function is active.

Driver Alert Standby <65
km/h

The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h).

Driver Alert Unavailable

The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the
area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 182 for information on the camera’s limitations.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

cle unintentionally leaves its lane and there is
a risk of driving off the road or into the opposite lane. LDW uses the camera located at the
center, upper edge of the windshield to monitor the road's/lane’s side marker lines. If the
vehicle crosses a side marker line or the
road’s center dividing line, the driver will be
alerted by an audible signal.

Operation and function

WARNING
This feature is only intended to assist the
driver and does not function in all driving,
weather, traffic or road conditions.
The illustration is generic

This function is designed to help reduce the
risk of accidents in situations where the vehi-

190

As the driver, you have full responsibility
for operating the vehicle in a safe manner.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

LDW can be switched on or off by pressing
the button on the center console. A light in
the button illuminates when the function is

04 Driver support
Driver Alert System*
because the vehicle's speed is below
40 mph (65 km/h).

on. This is supplemented by graphic displays
in the instrument panel, for example:

•

Settings
Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be
made in the menu system by pressing My
Car. Go to Settings Car settings
Driver support systems Lane Departure
Warning.

The LDW symbol has no side marker
lines: – the function is deactivated.

WARNING
The driver will only be warned once for
each time the wheels cross a marker line.
No alarm will be given if a marker line is
between the wheels.

There are two alternatives:

Limitations
LDW displayed in the instrument panel

•

The LDW symbol has white side marker
lines: the function is active and "sees"
one or both of the road's side marker
lines.
The LDW symbol has gray side marker
lines: the function is active but cannot
"see" one or both of the road's side
marker lines.

•

The LDW symbol has gray side marker
lines: the function is in standby mode

The camera used by LDW has the same limitations as the human eye. See page 182 for
more information about the camera's limitations.

NOTE
No warning signal will be given in the certain situations, such as:

•
•
•
•
•

On at start-up: This selection switches LDW
on each time the engine is started. Otherwise,
the system will be in the mode that it was in
when the engine was switched off.

Increased sensitivity: This selection increases the function’s sensitivity. Warnings will be
given at an earlier stage and fewer limitations
apply. When this setting is being used, the
system only needs to monitor lane marker
lines on one side of the vehicle to change status to Lane Depart Warn Available.

If the turn signal is being used
The driver’s foot is on the brake pedal1
The accelerator pedal is pressed
quickly1
If the steering wheel is moved quickly1
In sharp turns that cause the vehicle’s
body to sway

When Increased sensitivity has been selected, a warning will be issued if a side marker line is crossed in this situation.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

191

04 Driver support
Driver Alert System*
Symbols and messages

Symbol

Message

Description

Lane departure warning ON/
Lane departure warning OFF

The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds.

Lane Depart Warn Available

The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.

Lane Depart. Warning Unavailable at this speed

The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph
(65 km/h).

Lane Depart Warn Unavailable

The road lacks clear marker lines or the camera is not functioning properly. See page 182 for
information on the camera’s limitations.

Windscreen Sensors blocked

The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the
area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 182 for information on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service
required

The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the
message remains in the display.

192

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Driver support
Park assist*
Introduction

Function

Activating/deactivating
The system is activated automatically when
the vehicle is started.

The park assist system is designed to assist
you when driving into parking spaces,
garages, etc. It utilizes ultrasound sensors in
the front bumper and rear bumper(s) to measure the distance to a vehicle or an object that
may be close to the front or rear of your vehicle. An audible signal and symbols in the
audio system’s display indicate the distance
to the object.

–

Park assist will be automatically reactivated
the next time the engine is started, or if the
button is pressed (the indicator light in the
button will illuminate).

NOTE
A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated
with the vehicle's electrical system will be
included in the measurement of the available space behind the vehicle.

WARNING
Park Assist is an information system, NOT
a safety system. This system is designed
to be a supplementary aid when parking
the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to
replace the driver's attention and judgement.

Press the Park assist button on the center
console to temporarily deactivate the system(s).
> The indicator light in the button will go
out when the system has been deactivated.

Park assist button

The system is activated automatically when
the vehicle is started. The indicator light in the
button in the center console illuminates when
the system is on.

•

The front park assist system is active
from the time the engine is started until
the vehicle exceeds a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It is also active
when the vehicle is backing up.

•

Rear park assist is active when the engine
is running and reverse gear has been
selected.

NOTE
Park assist is disengaged automatically
when the parking brake is applied.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

193

04 Driver support
Park assist*
Signals from the park assist system

Audible signal

Rear park assist

NOTE

04
View in the display (warning for objects front left/
right rear)

Visual indicator
The audio system’s display gives an overview
of the vehicle’s position in relation to a
detected object.
The marked sectors in the display indicate
that one or more of the sensors has detected
an object. The closer the car symbol comes
to a sector, the closer the vehicle is to the
object.

The level of the audible signal can be lowered/raised with the infotainment volume
control. The level can also be set in the MY
CAR menu system. See page 209 for a
description of the menu system.

If the volume of another source from the
audio system is high, this will be automatically lowered.

If the infotainment system is switched off, the
park assist system will not be able to provide
a visual indicator. An audible signal will still
be provided.

194

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G017833

The Park Assist system uses an intermittent
tone that pulses faster as you come close to
an object, and becomes constant when you
are within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an
object in front of or behind the vehicle. If
there are objects within this distance both
behind and in front of the vehicle, the tone
alternates between front and rear speakers.

The distance monitored behind the vehicle is
approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal
comes from the rear speakers.
The system must be deactivated when towing
a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted
carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park
assist system's sensors.

04 Driver support
Park assist*

•

Rear park assist is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo
genuine trailer wiring is used. If a nonVolvo trailer hitch is being used, it may
be necessary to switch off the system
manually, see page 193.

•

The system will not detect high
objects, such as a loading dock, etc.

•

Objects such as chains, thin shiny
poles or low objects may temporarily
not be detected by the system. This
may result in the pulsing tone unexpectedly stopping instead of changing
to a constant tone as the vehicle
approaches the object. In such cases,
use caution when backing up or stop
the vehicle to help avoid damage.

Faults in the system

Front park assist

If the information symbol illuminates and
Park assist syst Service required is shown
on the information display, this indicates that
the system is not functioning properly and
has been disengaged. Consult a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.

CAUTION
G021424

NOTE

The distance monitored in front of the vehicle
is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible
signal comes from the audio system's front
speakers.

In certain circumstances, the park assist
system may give unexpected warning signals that can be caused by external sound
sources that use the same ultrasound frequencies as the system. This may include
such things as the horns of other vehicles,
wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,
motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does
not indicate a fault in the system.

It may not be possible to combine auxiliary
headlights and front park assist since these
lights could trigger the system's sensors.

NOTE
Front park assist is deactivated when the
parking brake is applied and or when the
gear selector is in the P position.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

195

04 Driver support
Park assist*
Cleaning the sensors

with water and a suitable car washing detergent.
Ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals.

NOTE
If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,
snow, or ice, this could result in false
warning signals from the park assist system.

04
Location of the front sensors

Location of the rear sensors

The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them

196

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Driver support
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
Introduction
The Park Assist Camera (PAC) uses the display in the center console to show the area
behind the car while you are backing up.
PAC also shows guiding lines in the onscreen image to indicate the direction that the
vehicle will take as it moves rearward, which
helps simplify parallel parking, backing into a
tight space or when attaching a trailer to the
vehicle.
The images of vehicles in this section are
generic and may not depict your specific
model.

NOTE
A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated
with the vehicle's electrical system will be
included in the measurement of the available space behind the vehicle.

WARNING

•

PAC is designed to be a supplementary aid when parking the vehicle. It is
not, however, intended to replace the
driver’s attention and judgment.

•

The camera has blind spots where it
cannot detect objects or people
behind the vehicle.

•

Pay particular attention to people or
animals that are close to the vehicle.

•

Objects seen on the screen may be
closer than they appear to be.

Function

The driver sees what is behind the vehicle
and if a person or animal should suddenly
appear from the side.
PAC is mounted on the tailgate, near the
opening handle.
The camera has built-in electronics that help
reduce the “fish-eye” effect so that the image
shown on the screen is as natural as possible. This may cause some objects on the
screen to “lean,” which is normal.

Ambient lighting conditions

The camera automatically monitors the ambient lighting conditions behind the vehicle and
constantly adjusts sensitivity to light. This
may cause the brightness and quality of the
image on the screen to vary slightly. Sensitivity to light is increased in dark conditions or in
bad weather, which may affect image quality.
If the image on the screen seems too dark,
brightness can be increased with the thumb
wheel on the lighting panel.

NOTE
In order to function properly, the camera
lens should always be kept clean. This is
particularly important in bad weather.
Keep the lens free of dirt, ice or snow.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

197

04 Driver support
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
Using PAC
Activation

(21 mph/35 km/h in reverse). The screen will
then revert to the view that was displayed
before R was selected.

NOTE
If any button on the center console control
panel is pressed, the camera image will
disappear from the display. Pressing CAM
will return the camera image to the display.

Guiding lines

NOTE
When backing up with a trailer, the guiding
lines show the path that the vehicle will
take, not the trailer.

WARNING
Keep in mind that the image on the screen
only shows the area behind the vehicle.
The driver must always watch for people,
animals, other vehicles, etc., near the sides
of the vehicle when turning while backing
up.

Marker lines
PAC is activated when the gear selector is
moved to R if the system is selected in the
MY CAR menu system or by pressing the
CAM button in the center console. See page
209 for a description of the menu system.
PAC will automatically override the view currently displayed on the screen and display the
camera's view behind the vehicle.

Deactivation
Move the gear selector from R to another
gear. The camera remains active for approx.
5 seconds after the gear selector has been
moved from R or until the vehicle's forward
speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h)

198

The lines on the screen are projected as if
they were a path on the ground behind the
vehicle and are directly affected by the way in
which the steering wheel is turned. This enables the driver to see path the vehicle will
take, even if he/she turns the steering wheel
while backing up.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The PAC system's lines

04 Driver support
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*
An area approx. 1 ft (30 cm) behind the
vehicle
The line marking the unobstructed area
behind the vehicle
The red line (1) frames an area approx. 1 ft
(30 cm) behind the vehicle from the bumper.

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional
Park Assist system (see page 193), the distance to an object will be indicated more
exactly and colored markers in the display
indicate which of the sensor(s) has detected
the object.

The yellow horizontal line (2) frames an area
up to approx. 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the
bumper.

Color

Distance to object

Green

2.5–5 ft (0.8–1.5 m)

These lines also indicate the outermost limits
that any object (door mirrors, corners of the
body, etc.) extends out from the vehicle, even
when it turns.

Yellow

1.3–2.5 ft (0.4–0.8 m)

Red

0–1.3 ft (0–0.4 m)

Vehicles equipped with Park Assist

4. Press OK/MENU to make the setting and
exit the menu by pressing EXIT.

Summary

•

Pressing CAM will activate the camera
even if the gear selector is not in Reverse.

•

If there are two cameras installed on the
vehicle*, turn TUNE or press CAM to toggle between the cameras.

Limitations

Settings
To change PAC settings:
1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is
displayed.

Even if a fairly small section of the screen
image appears to be obstructed, this may
mean that a relatively large area behind the
vehicle is hidden and objects there may not
be detected until they are very near the vehicle.

NOTE

2. Turn OK/MENU to scroll to the desired
setting.

Bicycle carriers or other accessories
mounted on the tailgate may obstruct the
camera's field of view.

3. Press OK/MENU to make the setting and
exit the menu by pressing EXIT.
or
1. Press the CAM button on the center console.
2. Press OK/MENU.
Colored markers (one for each sensor) indicate
distance

3. Turn OK/MENU to scroll to the desired
setting.

Keep in mind

•

Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice
and snow. Remove ice and snow carefully to avoid scratching the lens.

•

Clean the lens regularly with warm water
and a suitable car washing detergent.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

199

04 Driver support
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*
Introduction

WARNING

•

BLIS is an information system, NOT a
warning or safety system.

•

BLIS does not eliminate the need for
you to visually confirm the conditions
around you, and the need for you to
turn your head and shoulders to make
sure that you can safely change lanes.

•
G021426

BLIS camera
Indicator light
BLIS symbol
The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is
an information system that indicates the presence of another vehicle moving in the same
direction as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind area."

CAUTION

As the driver, you have full responsibility for changing lanes in a safe manner.

The system is based on digital camera technology. The cameras are located beneath the
side-view mirrors.

NOTE
The door panel indicator light illuminates
on the side of the vehicle where the system has detected another vehicle. If your
vehicle is passed on both sides at the
same time, both lights will illuminate.

BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the
driver if a fault should occur with the system.
For example, if one or both of the system's
cameras are obscured, a message (see the
table on page 202) will appear in the information display in the instrument panel. If this
occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary, the system can be temporarily switched
off (for instructions, see page 202).

When one (or both) of the cameras have
detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to
approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side
of your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft.
(9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), see
the illustration, the indicator light in the door
panel illuminates. The light will glow continuously to alert the driver of the vehicle in the
blind area.

The BLIS system should only be repaired
by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
Areas monitored by BLIS Distance A = approx.
31 ft. (9.5 meters), Distance B = approx. 10 ft.
(3 meters)

200

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Driver support
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*
When does BLIS function
The system functions when your vehicle is
moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

When you pass another vehicle:
The system reacts when you pass another
vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h)
faster than that vehicle.

When you are passed by another
vehicle:
The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by
another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph
(70 km/h) faster than your vehicle.

WARNING

•

BLIS does not function in sharp
curves.

•

BLIS does not function when your
vehicle is backing up.

•

If you are towing a wide trailer, this
may prevent the BLIS cameras from
detecting other vehicles in adjacent
lanes.

motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses,
motorcycles, etc.

NOTE

Darkness
BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding
vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a
vehicle in the blind area must have its headlights on. This means, for example, that the
system will not detect a trailer without headlights that is being towed behind a car or
truck.

WARNING

•

BLIS does not react to cyclists or
mopeds.

•

BLIS does not react to vehicles that
are standing still.

•

The BLIS cameras have the same limitation as the human eye. In other
words, their "vision is impaired" by
adverse weather conditions such as
heavy snowfall, intense light directly
into the camera, dense fog, etc.

If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occasionally even when there are no other vehicles in the blind area, this does not indicate a fault in the system.
In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst.
Service required will be displayed.

The following are several examples of situations in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may
illuminate even when there are no other vehicles in the area monitored by the system.

Light reflected from a wet road surface

Limitations
How BLIS functions in daylight and
darkness
Daylight

In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s)
may illuminate even when there are no other
vehicles in the area monitored by the system.

BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehicles. The system is designed to help detect
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

201

04 Driver support
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*
switched off, and a text message is displayed.

CAUTION

The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light,
smooth surface such as barriers between lanes
on a highway

•

Clean the lenses carefully to avoid
scratching.

•

The lenses are electrically heated to
help melt ice or snow. If necessary,
gently brush away snow from the lenses.

Switching BLIS on and off

•

BLIS can be switched on again by pressing the button. The indicator light in the
button will illuminate and a new text message will be displayed. Press the OK button (see page 207) to erase the message.

Depending on the vehicle's optional equipment, there may not be space for the BLIS
button in the center console. In this case,
BLIS can be switched on and off in the menu
system by pressing MY CAR and going to
Settings Car settings BLIS. See page
209 for a description of the menu system.

BLIS system messages

Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is
low on the horizon

Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses
In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera lenses must be kept clean. They can be
wiped clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge.

202

BLIS is automatically activated when the ignition is switched on. The indicator lights will
provide confirmation by flashing 3 times.

•

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The system can be switched off by pressing the BLIS button in the center console
(see the illustration). The indicator light in
the button goes out when the system is

Text in the
display

System status

Blind spot
syst. Service
required

BLIS not functioning
properly. Contact an
authorized Volvo service
technician.

Blind spot
syst. Camera
blocked

BLIS camera obscured.
Clean the lenses.

Blind-spot
info system
ON

BLIS system on

04 Driver support
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*
Text in the
display

System status

Blind-spot
info system
OFF

BLIS system off

Blind spot
syst. Reduced
function

The BLIS cameras' function has been reduced
due to weak or impaired
data transfer between
the BLIS system's cameras and the vehicle's
electrical system. The
cameras will reset themselves when this data
transfer has returned to
normal.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

203

Volvo Sensus........................................................................................
Menus and messages...........................................................................
The MY CAR menus..............................................................................
Climate system.....................................................................................
Trip computer........................................................................................
Active chassis system–Four C*.............................................................
Passenger compartment convenience.................................................

204

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

206
207
209
215
225
232
233

COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Volvo Sensus
Introduction

systems as well as other options such as the
park assist camera(s), etc.
Volvo Sensus uses the screen in the center
instrument panel to display information and
selections are made using this panel’s controls and buttons. Certain features can also
be controlled using the steering wheel keypad.
Press MY CAR to present all of the available
settings related to driving and/or controlling
the vehicle, such as City Safety, setting the
clock, lock settings, etc.

Center console control panel
05

Volvo Navigation System (VNS)* – NAV:
see the separate VNS manual for operating instructions.
Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL): see
page 240 .
Vehicle-related settings - MY CAR: see
page 209.

Press RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, NAV* and CAM*
to change a source and to activated systems
or functions such as AM, FM1, CD, DVD,
Bluetooth, navigation* and the park assist
camera *.
See the respective sections in this manual for
more detailed information about your vehicle's various features and functions.

Park assist camera - CAM*: see
page 197.
Climate system: see page 215.
Volvo Sensus is the operating system in your
vehicle providing a coordinated interface for a
number of functions such as the individualized settings that can be made in the MY
CAR menus, the climate and infotainment

206

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
Main instrument panel

Menu overview
The following menu alternatives may vary,
depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle.

Analog instrument panel
Digital speed
Trip comp. opt.
Service status

Messages (##)1
Digital Instrument panel* and menu controls
Analog Instrument panel and menu controls

Digital instrument panel*
Settings

OK: access to the list of messages and
message confirmation.
Thumb wheel: browse among menus and
options in the list of functions.
RESET: reset the active function. Used in
certain cases to select/activate a function, see the explanation under each
respective function.
The menus shown on the information displays
in the instrument panel are controlled with the
left lever. The menus displayed depend on
ignition mode. Press OK to erase a message
and return to the menus.

Themes

Contrast mode/Color mode
Service status

Messages
Trip computer reset

Number of messages in parentheses

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

207

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
Messages
When a warning, information or indicator
symbol comes on, a corresponding message
appears in the information panel. An error
message is stored in a memory list until the
fault is rectified.
Press OK to acknowledge and scroll among
the messages.

NOTE

208

If a warning message appears while you
are using the trip computer, the message
must be read and confirmed by pressing
OK before the previous activity can be
resumed.

Message

Description

Stop
engineA

Stop and switch off the
engine as soon as possible. Serious risk of damage. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop.

Stop safelyA

Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage. Contact an
authorized Volvo workshop.

Message

Description

Message

Description

Service
urgentA

Have the vehicle checked
by an authorized Volvo
workshop immediately.

Maintenance overdue

Service
requiredA

Have the vehicle checked
by an authorized Volvo
workshop as soon as possible.

If the service intervals are
not followed, the warranty
does not cover any damaged parts. Contact an
authorized Volvo workshop for service.

Temporarily
OFFA

A function has been temporarily switched off and
is reset automatically while
driving or after starting
again.

Low battery
Power save
mode

The audio system is
switched off to save current. Charge the battery.

See manualA

Read the owner's manual.

Book time
for maintenance

Time to book service at an
authorized Volvo retailer.

Time for
regular
maintenance

Time for regular service at
an authorized Volvo workshop. The timing is determined by the number of
miles driven, number of
months since the last
service, engine running
time.

There will also be a system-specific part of this message

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
The MY CAR menus
Introduction
The menu system provides access to
menus for operating many of the vehicle's functions, such as setting the
clock, door mirrors, locks, etc.

Operation
Center console controls

Navigating in the menus is done using the
buttons on the center console control panel
or with the right-side steering wheel keypad.

•
•
•

Reject and incoming phone call
The current function will be cancelled
Characters that have been entered will be
erased

•

The most recent selection will be cancelled

•

Go back (upward) in the menu system

A long press will take you to the highest
menu level (the main view), giving you access
to all of the vehicles/menus. See page 241
for additional information.

Some of the features mentioned in this section are optional.

Steering wheel keypad
Center console controls for menu navigation

Press MY CAR to access the My Car
menus.
Press OK/MENU to select a highlighted
selection or to store a certain function in
the system's memory.
Turn to navigate up/down among menu
selections.
EXIT

EXIT functions
The results of a short press on EXIT vary,
depending on where the cursor is and where
you are in the menu structure.

The keypad varies according to the vehicle's
equipment

Turn the thumb wheel to go up/down
among menu selections. Press the thumb
}}

209

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
The MY CAR menus
wheel to make a selection or store a func฀
tion in the system's memory.
EXIT.

MY CAR menu paths
The current menu level is displayed at the
upper right of the center console display.
Menu paths are displayed as follows, for
example:
Settings Car settings Lock settings
Doors unlock Driver door, then all

The following is an example of how to set a
function in the menu system:
1. Press the MY CAR button on the center
console control panel.
2. Navigate to a menu, for example
Settings using the thumb wheel (1) and
press it to open a submenu.

5. Navigate to Doors unlock and press the
thumb wheel to open a submenu with
alternatives that can be selected.

DRIVe1

6. Use the thumb wheel to move to the
desired choice and press the thumb
wheel to put an X in the box.

• Start/Stop

7. Finish by exiting the menu system either
one step at a time with short presses on
EXIT (2) or press and hold this button to
return to the main menu.

• Eco driving guide

The OK/MENU (2), EXIT (4) and control (3) in
the center console can be used in the same
way.

Driver support systems

MY CAR
When the MY CAR button has been pressed,
the following menu alternatives are displayed.

3. Navigate to the desired submenu such as
Car settings.

•
•
•
•

4. Navigate to Lock settings and press the
thumb wheel to open a new submenu.

MY CAR

My XC70
DRIVe1
Support systems
Settings

My XC70
My XC70

The display shows all of the driver support
systems installed in the vehicle, which can be
activated/deactivated here.
1

210

Vehicles equipped with the optional Start/Stop function

This selectoin describes Volvo's DRIVe concept and displays the following headers:
Information on the Start/
Stop feature (see page 137).
Provides information about driving economically.
MY CAR

Support systems

The screen shows the current status (settings) for the vehicle's driver support systems.

Settings
MY CAR

Settings

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
The MY CAR menus
Menu settings

See page 59 and 68 for more information.

The following pages list the main menus/
submenus and possible selections. The
menus are set up as follows:

Side mirror settings
Fold mirrors
Tilt left mirror

Menu level 1

Tilt right mirror
See page 112 for more information.

Menu level 2
Menu level 3
Menu level 4
Car key memory
See pages 92 and 59 for more information.
Lock settings

See page 102 for more information.

Unlock confirmation light

Tire pressure system

See page 59 for more information.
Approach light duration
30 sec

Doors unlock

60 sec

Keyless entry
All doors
Any door
Doors on same side
Both front doors
Audible confirmation

Daytime running lights
See page 100 for more information.

Door lock confirmation light

Automatic door locking

Driver door, then all

Triple indicator
See page 104 for more information.

Active bending lights

Light settings

Off

All doors

See page 105 for more information.

90 sec
See page 61 for more information.
Home safe light duration

Warns if tyre pressure is too low
Calibrate tire pressure
See page 334 for more information. This system is optional in Canada.
Steering wheel force
High
Medium
Low
See page 232 for more information.

Off

Reset car settings

30 sec

This feature returns the "Car settings" menu
to the original factory settings.

60 sec

90 sec
}}

211

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
The MY CAR menus
MY CAR
systems

Settings

Driver support

Collision Warning
Collision Warning
Warning distance
Long
Normal
Short
Warning sound
See page 180 for more information.
05

Lane Departure Warning
Lane Departure Warning
On at start-up
Increased sensitivity
See page 190 for more information.

Road Sign Information
On
Off

Speed alert
On

212

if one of the buttons (1-4) is pressed, see
page 209.

Off
DSTC
See page 152 for more information.
City Safety
See page 172 for more information.
BLIS
See page 200 for more information.
Distance Alert
See page 169 for more information.
Driver Alert
See page 188 for more information.
MY CAR

Settings

System options

Uncheck the selection to turn the screen
saver off.
Language
Select the language for menu texts.
Show help text
This displays help texts for the current menu.
Distance and fuel units
MPG (UK)
MPG (US)
km/l
l/100km

Set/change time

See page 225 for more information about the
trip computer.

See page 86 for more information.

Temperature unit

Time format
12 h
24 h
Screen saver
The contents of the screen are replaced by
another image if this selection is marked. The
contents of the screen will be displayed again

Celsius
Fahrenheit
Select the temperature scale to be displayed
by the climate control unit.
Volume levels
Voice output volume
Front park assist volume

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
The MY CAR menus
Rear park assist volume

Cancel

Phone ringing volume

Voice tutorial

Reset system options
This feature returns the "System options"
menu to the original factory settings.
MY CAR
A

Settings

Voice settingsA.

Only on vehicles with the optional Volvo Navigation System

Voice tutorial
Select this menu alternative and press OK for
spoken information about how the system
works.
Voice command list
Phone commands
Phone
Phone call contact
Phone dial number
Navigation commands
Navigation
Navigation repeat instruction
Navigation go to address
General commands
Help

The menu alternatives under Phone
commands show examples of the voice
commands available when a cell phone is
connected to the Bluetooth® hands-free system. See page 278 for more detailed information.
The menu alternatives under Navigation
commands show examples of the voice
commands available for the optional Volvo
Navigation System. Refer to the navigation
system's manual for detailed information.
Voice user setting
Default setting
User 1
User 2
Two user profiles can be set, which is useful if
more than one person uses voice commands
regularly. Default setting resets the factory
settings.
Voice training
User 1
User 2

Voice training enables the system to
become familiar with the driver's voice and

pronunciation. A list of phrases is presented
on the screen for the driver to read aloud.
When the system has registered the driver's
pronunciation, no additional phrases will be
displayed. After completed voice training,
select User 1 or User 2 in Voice user
setting to set the system to the current user.
Voice output volume

•

A volume control will be displayed. To set
the volume level:

1. Adjust the volume using the thumb wheel
2. Test the setting by pressing OK
3. Store the setting and leave the menu by
pressing EXIT.
Voice POI list

Edit list
The navigation system has a large number of
points of interest (POIs). A maximum of 30
POIs can be stored in this list.
The menu alternative Voice POI list is only
displayed if the vehicle is equipped with the
optional Volvo Navigation System. Refer to
the navigation system's manual for detailed
information.
MY CAR

Settings

Audio settings

}}

213

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
The MY CAR menus
See page 240 for more information about the
infotainment system.
MY CAR

Settings

Climate settings

Automatic blower adjustment

See page 383 for more information.
DivX® VOD code
See page 262 for more information.
Bluetooth software version in car

High

See page 249 for more information.

Low

Map and software version

Automatic rear defroster
Interior air quality system
Reset climate settings
This feature returns the "Climate settings"
menu to the original factory settings.
For more information about the climate system, see page 215.
MY CAR

Settings

Favourites (FAV)

See page 245 for more information about
this feature.
MY CAR

Settings

Number of keys

214

VIN number

Normal

Recirculation timer

See page 58 for more information.

Information

Refer to the optional Volvo Navigation System
manual for more information.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Introduction

NOTE

Air conditioning

The sunlight sensor monitors which side of
the car that is most exposed to sunlight.
This can mean that the temperature may
differ between the right and left-side air
vents, even if the temperatures set for both
sides of the passenger compartment are
the same.

The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Climate Control (ECC). The climate control system cools, heats or dehumidifies the air in the
passenger compartment.

NOTE

•

The air conditioning can be switched
off, but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compartment and to prevent the windows
from misting, it should always be on.

•
•

The outside (ambient) temperature sensor
is located on the door mirror.

In warm weather, a small amount of
water may accumulate under the car
when it has been parked. This water is
condensation from the A/C system
and is normal.

•

The humidity sensor* is located in the
interior rearview mirror.

Sensor location

•

The sunlight sensor is located on the top
side of the dashboard.

The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is located below the climate control panel.

NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.

spray will also help prevent fogging or misting.

Temporary shut-off of the air
conditioning
The air conditioning is momentarily disengaged during full acceleration or when driving
uphill with a trailer. This may result in a temporary increase in cabin temperature.

Ice and snow
Always keep the air intake grille at the base of
the windshield free of snow.

Climate system maintenance
Special tools and equipment are required to
maintain and carry out repairs on the climate
system. Work of this type should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.

Refrigerant

Side windows and moonroof
To ensure that the air conditioning works
optimally, the side windows, and the optional
moonroof should be closed.

Fog on the inside of the windows
The defroster function should be used to
remove fog or mist from the inside of the windows. Keeping the windows clean with a
commercially available window washing

Volvo cares about the environment. The air
conditioning system in your car contains a
CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance
will not deplete the ozone layer. See page
389 for the amount of refrigerant in the A/C
system. The system uses PAG oil.

Passenger compartment filter
Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at
the recommended intervals. Please refer to

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

}}

215

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system

NOTE
There are different types of cabin air filters.
Ensure that the correct type is installed.

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)
05

A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles
in the incoming air, thereby reducing the levels of odors and contaminants entering the
vehicle. The air quality sensor detects
increased levels of contaminants in the outside air. When the air quality sensor detects
contaminated outside air, the air intake closes
and the air inside the passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air enters
the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated
passenger compartment air.

NOTE
Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air filter replacement intervals.

216

Materials used in the cabin

Air distribution

The materials used in the cabin have been
developed to help minimize the amount of
dust and make the cabin easier to keep
clean. All floor mats can be easily removed
for cleaning. Use car cleaning products recommended by Volvo. See also the information beginning on page 375.

Menu settings
The default settings for four of the climate
system's functions can be changed in the
menu system.

•
•
•
•

Blower speed in automatic mode.
Recirculation timer for passenger compartment air.
Automatic rear window defrosting.
The optional Interior Air Quality System
(IAQS).

The functions can also be returned to factory
settings in the menu system.
See page 209 for a description of the menu
system.

G017699

your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet, or consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for these intervals.
The filter should be replaced more often when
driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The
filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should
always be replaced with a new one.

The incoming air is distributed from a number
of different vents in the passenger compartment.
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
mode.
If desired, air distribution can be controlled
manually, see page 224.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Air vents in the door pillars

G021368

Air vents in the dashboard

Open

Closed

Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow
Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost.

Vertical airflow
Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost.
Direct the vents into the passenger compartment to help maintain the desired temperature in the rear seat.

}}

217

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Electronic climate control, ECC

Temperature control, driver's side
Heated driver's seat1*

Heated rear window and door mirrors,
see page 113
Heated front passenger's seat*

Defroster (maximum effect), electrically
heated windshield*

Temperature control, passenger's side

Blower

Recirculation

Manual air distribution—floor

AUTO

Manual air distribution—dashboard air
vents

A/C on/off

Manual air distribution—defroster

Ventilated driver's seat*
Ventilated passenger's seat*

218

The location of the button varies, depending on whether the vehicle is equipped with the optional ventilated front seats

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Climate system controls
Ventilated front seats*
The ventilation system consists of fans in the
seats and backrests that draw air through the
seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases
as the air in the passenger compartment
becomes cooler.
The ventilation is controlled by the ECC system, which takes into account the seat temperature, sunlight in the passenger compartment, and the ambient temperature.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
The ventilation can be used at the same time
as seat heating.

Heated front seats*

Starting the seat heating automatically
This setting starts heating the driver's seat (at
the highest level) automatically when the
engine is started if the ambient temperature is
below approx. 45° F (7° C).

The ventilation system can be activated when
the engine is running. There are three comfort
levels that produce different cooling and
dehumidifying effects:

•

Level three: press the button once for
maximum output – three indicator lights
come on.

•

Level two: press the button twice for a
lower output – two indicator lights come
on.

•

Level one: press the button three times
for the lowest output – one indicator light
comes on.

•

Press the button a fourth time to switch
off the function – the indicator light will go
out.

Activate/deactivate this function in the
MY CAR menu system, under Settings
Climate settings Auto start driver seat
heater.

Heated rear seats*2
The current seat temperature setting is shown in
the center console display
05

Press the lower section of
the button repeatedly until
the desired number of indicator lights illuminate:
Highest heat level – three
indicator lights.
Medium heat level – two indicator lights.
Lowest heat level – one indicator light.
If no indicator lights are illuminated, the seat
heating is switched off.

Heat control for the outboard seating positions is done in the same way as for the front
seats.

Seat heating will automatically switch off
when the engine is switched off.
2

Not available on models equipped with the optional integrated booster cushions

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

219

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Blower control

Air distribution

Turn the control clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise
to decrease the blower
speed. If AUTO is selected,
blower speed will be regulated automatically and this
will override manual adjust-

ment.

NOTE
If the blower is turned off completely, the
air conditioning is disengaged, which may
result in fogging on the windows.
05

Manual air distribution—defroster
Manual air distribution—dashboard air
vents
Manual air distribution—floor
The figure consists of three buttons. When a
button is pressed, the corresponding figure
will appear in the display with an arrow indicating which manual air flow has been
selected (see the following illustration). See
also the air distribution chart on page 224.

220

Air distribution is shown in the center console
display

Auto
The function automatically
regulates cooling, heating,
blower speed, recirculation,
and air distribution to maintain the chosen temperature.
If you select one or more
manual functions, the other
functions continue to be controlled automatically. The air quality sensor is engaged and all
manual settings are switched off when AUTO
is pressed. The display shows AUTO
CLIMATE.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Blower speed in automatic mode can be set
under Climate settings Automatic blower
adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal
or High.

NOTE
Selecting the lowest blower speed may
increases the risk of fog forming on the
windows.

Temperature control
The temperatures on the
driver and passenger sides
can be set separately. When
the vehicle is started, the
most recent setting is
resumed.

A/C – ON/OFF
When the indicator light in
the button is on, the air conditioning is controlled automatically. This cools/heats
and dehumidifies the incoming air. When the indicator
light in the button is off, the
air conditioning is disengaged. Other functions are still controlled automatically. When
maximum defroster is selected, the air conditioning system is set for maximum blower
speed and dehumidifies the cabin as quickly
as possible.

Max. defroster and electrically heated
windshield*

The selected settings are shown in the center
console display

Electrical heating*
Max. defroster

NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up
by selecting a higher/lower temperature
than the actual temperature required.

Models without an electrically heated windshield

•

Press the button once to start
defrosting/de-icing the windshield and
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

221

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
front side windows. The indicator light (2)
in the defroster button illuminates when
the function is active.

•

NOTE

Press the button twice to switch off the
defroster (the indicator light will switch
off).

Models with an electrically heated windshield*

•

If this feature is switched off, press the
button once to start heating the windshield3. Symbol (1) will illuminate in the
center console display.

•

Press the button twice to start both the
defroster and the windshield heating.
Symbols (1) and (2) will illuminate in the
center console display.

•

If these features are on, press the button
to switch them off. The symbols will no
longer be displayed.

•

Triangular areas at the far sides of the
windshield are not heated electrically
and will take slightly longer to
defrost/de-ice.

•

The heated windshield may affect the
performance/range of e.g., transponders used to automatically pay highway
tolls or other communication equipment.

The following occurs when the defroster/
windshield heating functions have been activated:

•

Blower speed increases automatically
and the air conditioning will switch on (if
not already on and if the passenger compartment blower is not turned off) to
dehumidify the air in the passenger compartment. Air conditioning can be
switched off by pressing the AC button.
Recirculation will not function while
defrost is engaged.

The climate system will return to its previous
settings when the defroster/windshield heating function is switched off.
See also page 113 for additional information.
3

222

If a "C" appears in the rear-view mirror when the button is pressed, the compass* has to be recalibrated, see page 115.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Recirculation/air quality system
Recirculation
This function can be used to
shut out exhaust fumes,
smoke, etc., from the passenger compartment. The air
in the passenger compartment is then recirculated,
i.e., no air from outside the
car is taken into the car when this function is
activated. The indicator light in the button will
illuminate when recirculation is selected.
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of condensation forming on the
insides of the windows, especially in winter.

Timer
The timer function minimizes the risk of fogging, or stale air when the recirculation function is selected by automatically switching off
the function after a certain length of time,
depending on the ambient temperature. Activate/deactivate the function under Climate
settings Recirculation timer. See page
209 for a description of the menu system.

NOTE
When Defroster is selected, recirculation is
always deactivated.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Interior Air Quality System–IAQS*
This system consists of a multifilter and an air
quality sensor. The filter helps remove gases
and particles from the incoming air, thereby
reducing the amounts of odors and contaminants entering the vehicle. The air quality sensor detects increased levels of contaminants
in the outside air. When the air quality sensor
detects contaminated outside air, the air
intake closes and the air inside the passenger

compartment is recirculated, i.e., no outside
air enters the vehicle. The filter also cleans
recirculated passenger compartment air.
When the AUTO button is depressed the air
quality sensor is always engaged.
Activate or deactivate this function in Climate
settings Interior air quality system.

NOTE

•

The air quality sensor should always
be engaged in order to obtain the best
air in the passenger compartment.

•

Recirculation is limited in cold weather
to avoid fogging.

•

If the insides of the windows start fogging, disengage the air quality sensor.
Use the defroster function to increase
airflow to the front, side, and rear windows.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

223

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate system
Air distribution table
Air distribution

Use

Air distribution

Use

Air to windows. Some air
flows from the dashboard air
vents. The air is not recirculated. Air conditioning is always
engaged.

To remove de-fog/deice the front side windows and windshield
quickly.

Air to the floor and
windows. Some air
flows from the dashboard air vents.

To ensure comfortable
conditions and good defogging in cold or humid
weather.

Air to windshield and side windows. Some air flows from the
air dashboard vents.

In cold or humid
weather (blower
speed should be
moderate to high).

Air to floor and from
dashboard air vents.

In sunny weather with
cool outside temperatures.

Airflow to windows and from
dashboard air vents.

To ensure good comfort in warm, dry
weather.

Air to floor. Some air
flows to the dashboard
air vents and windows.

To warm or cool the
feet.

Airflow to the head and chest
from the dashboard air vents.

To ensure efficient
cooling in warm
weather.

Airflow to windows,
from dashboard air
vents and to the floor.

To cool the feet or provide warmer air to the
upper body in cold
weather or hot, dry
weather.

224

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
Introduction
The content and appearance of the trip computer varies depending on whether the vehicle is equipped with an analog or digital
instrument panel.

•
•

Trip computer functions

Functions

Trip computer information headings in the
instrument panel

To open and make settings in the trip computer functions:
1. Ensure that none of the trip computer
controls are being used in a command
sequence; reset them by pressing RESET
twice.

The instrument panel illuminates as soon as
the vehicle is unlocked and trip computer settings can be made. If none of the trip computer's controls are used within 30 seconds
after the driver's door has been opened, the
instrument panel lighting will go out and the
trip computer cannot be used again until:

•
•

2. Press OK to open the list of functions.
3. Use the thumb wheel to scroll among the
functions and select/confirm your choice
by pressing OK.
4. After completing your selection, exit by
pressing RESET twice.

the ignition is put in mode II1
the engine is started

NOTE
If a warning message appears while you
are using the trip computer, this message
must be acknowledged in order to return
to the trip computer function. Acknowledge a message by pressing OK.

Trip computer in models with an
analog instrument panel

Information display and controls

OK–press to access the trip computer's
functions or acknowledge/confirm/erase
a message

The following table lists the analog trip computer's functions:

Thumb wheel–turn to access the list of
trip computer information headings and
to scroll among the alternatives
RESET–press to cancel/reset/exit a function after a selection has been made

The trip computer has two different menu
groups:

See page 89 for information about the various ignition modes.

}}

225

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
Function

Description

Digital speed

This displays the vehicle's speed digitally in the center of the instrument panel

– km/h

•

– mph

Open by pressing OK, scroll using the thumb wheel, confirm by pressing OK and exit by pressing
ENTER.

– None

Trip comp. opt.
– Distance to empty
– Fuel consumption
– Average speed
– Trip odometer T1 and total dist.
05

Selections among the trip computer information headings are made here. The symbols that have
already been selected have a check mark and are displayed in white. Those not selected are not
checked and are displayed in gray:
1. Open the function by pressing OK and scroll to the desired heading using the thumb wheel.
2. Confirm by pressing OK. The symbol will change colors from gray to white and will be checked.
3. Continue this procedure or exit by pressing RESET.

– Trip odometer T2 and total dist.

Service status

Shows the number of months and mileage until the next scheduled service.

Messages (##)

For additional information, see page 207.

Information headings
Any of the information headings in the following table can be displayed. To do so:
1. Ensure that none of the trip computer
controls are being used in a command
sequence; reset them by pressing RESET
twice.

226

2. Turn the thumb wheel to begin displaying the information headings. Stop on the
desired heading.
3. See the table for an explanation of the
heading or the actions that can be taken.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
Information headings in the instrument
panel

Description

Trip odometer T1 and total dist.

•

Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T1.

Trip odometer T2 and total dist.

•

Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T2.

Distance to empty

See Distance to empty on page 229.

Fuel consumption

Current fuel consumption.

Average speed

Press and hold RESET to reset Average speed.

No information will be displayed. This also indicates the beginning/end of the list of information headings.
Thumb wheel–turn to access the list of
trip computer information headings and
to scroll among the alternatives

Scroll among the trip computer information
headings at any time by turning the thumb
wheel until the desired heading is displayed.

RESET–press to cancel/reset/exit a function after a selection has been made

Trip computer in models with a digital
instrument panel

Functions

The trip computer has two different menu
groups:

•
•

To open and make settings in the trip computer functions:

Trip computer functions
Trip computer information headings in the
instrument panel

Information displays and controls

OK–press to access the trip computer's
functions or to activate a selection

1. Ensure that none of the trip computer
controls are being used in a command
sequence; reset them by pressing RESET
twice.
2. Press OK to open the list of functions.
}}

227

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
3. Use the thumb wheel to scroll among the
functions and select/confirm your choice
by pressing OK.

4. After completing your selection, exit by
pressing RESET twice.

The following table lists the digital trip computer's functions:

Function

Description

Trip computer reset

NOTE: This function does not reset the trip odometers, see page 230 for a description of how
this is done.

– Average fuel consumption
– Average speed

Messages

For additional information, see page 207.

Themes

Set the way in which information is displayed in the instrument panel, see page 80.

Settings*

Select Auto On or Off.

Contrast mode/Color mode

Adjust the instrument panel's contrast and color.

Service status

Shows the number of months and mileage until the next scheduled service.

Information headings
Three trip computer headings can be displayed at the same time; one in each of the
displays (see the previous illustration). One of
the combinations of information headings in
the following table can be displayed. To do
so:

228

1. Ensure that none of the trip computer
controls are being used in a command
sequence; reset them by pressing RESET
twice.
2. Turn the thumb wheel to begin displaying the combinations of information headings. Stop on the desired combination.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

3. See the table for an explanation of the
heading or the actions that can be taken.
Scroll among the combinations of trip computer information headings at any time by
turning the thumb wheel until the desired
combination is displayed.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
Heading combinations

Description

Average fuel consumption

Trip odometer T1 + mileage

Average speed

•

Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T1.

Current fuel consumption

Trip odometer T2 + mileage

Distance to empty

•

Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T2.

Current fuel consumption

Mileage

mph<>kmh

Change between mph<>kmh – see "Digital speed display" on
page 229.

No trip computer information displayed

No information will be displayed. This also indicates the beginning/end of the list of information headings.

Scroll among the trip computer information
headings at any time by turning the thumb
wheel until the desired heading is displayed.

Supplementary information
Average fuel consumption
Fuel consumption since the last time this
function was reset.

Average speed
The vehicle's average speed since the last
time this function was reset.

Current fuel consumption
Current fuel consumption is calculated
approximately once a second. When the vehicle is moving at low speed, fuel consumption
is displayed per unit of time. At higher
speeds, it is displayed in terms of distance.

Miles or kilometers can be displayed, see the
heading "Changing units" on page 230

Distance to empty
This function shows the approximate distance that can be driven on the fuel remaining
in the tank. When Distance to empty shows
"----", there is very little useable fuel remaining in that tank; refuel as soon as possible.
The calculation is based on average fuel consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) of
driving and the amount of fuel remaining in
the tank (the accuracy of this figure may vary
if your driving style changes). An economical
driving style will generally increase this distance.

Digital speed display*
Speed is expressed in the unit not used by
the instrument panel's speedometer e.g., if
the normal speedometer is in mph, the trip
computer will display in the speed in km/h
and vice versa.

Resetting an analog instrument panel
Trip odometer(s) and average speed
1. Display trip odometer T1 or T1, or Average speed.
2. Press and hold RESET until selected
function is reset.
Each trip computer heading must be reset
individually.

See page 284 for information about driving
economically.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

229

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
Resetting a digital instrument panel
Trip odometer
1. Turn the thumb wheel to select the combination of headings containing the trip
odometer to be reset.
2. Press and hold RESET until selected trip
odometer is reset.

Average speed and fuel consumption
1. Select Trip computer reset and press
OK.

2. Select one of the following alternatives
using the thumb wheel and press OK:

•
•
•

NOTE
In addition to changing units in the trip
computer, this also changes the units used
in the Volvo Navigation System (VNS)*.

Trip statistics*
Trip information from previous trips regarding
average fuel consumption and average speed
is stored and can be displayed in the form of
a bar chart.

Function

mpg

Settings
Settings can be made in the MY CAR menu
system as follows:
MY CAR

My XC70

Trip statistics:

• Start new trip: press ENTER to erase all
pervious statistics. Exit the menu by
pressing EXIT.

pressing ENTER. Exit the menu by pressing EXIT.

Reset both

Selecting Reset for every driving cycle erases all trip statistics automatically if the ignition is switched off for at least 4 hours. When
the engine is restarted, new statistics will be
stored.

Changing units
To change the unit (miles/km) used to measure distance and speed, go to MY CAR
Settings System options Distance
and fuel units.
Trip statistics2

Each bar represents a driving distance of
1 mile or 10 miles, depending on the current

230

Use TUNE to change between 1 mile and
10 miles; the marker at the right will also
change according to the scale selected.

• Reset for every driving cycle: select by

mph

3. Finish by pressing RESET.

scale; the bar at the far right shows the value
for the current mile/10 miles.

The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

To get new statistics if the engine is restarted
before 4 hours have elapsed, the existing
ones have to be erased manually by selecting
Start new trip.
For additional information, see page 207.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
See also the information about Eco Guide on
page 132.

231

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Active chassis system–Four C*
Active chassis (Four C)

Advanced

Adjustable steering force*

Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Controlled Chassis Concept), regulates the characteristics of the shock absorbers so that the
vehicle's driving characteristics can be
adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort,
Sport and Advanced.

In this mode, body sway in curves is minimal
and steering response is very direct. Gear
shifting is done at high rpm in each gear for
dynamic and active driving.

Steering force increases with the speed of the
vehicle to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.
At low speed the vehicle is easy to steer in
order to facilitate parking, etc.

Operation

Steering force can be changed under MY
CAR Car settings Steering wheel
force. Select Low, Medium or High. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 209.

NOTE
This system is available on Canadian models only.

NOTE

Comfort
05

Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride
and the transmission shifts gears at lower
rpm. This mode is particularly suitable for
long-distance highway driving. The indicator
light in the button will be on when this mode
is selected.

Sport
In this mode, the vehicle's body sway is
reduced during cornering and steering
response is more immediate. The transmission shifts up at higher rpm for sportier driving. The indicator light in the button will be on
to indicate that Sport mode has been
selected.

232

This steering force level menu function
cannot be accessed when the vehicle is in
motion.

NOTE
Chassis settings

Use the buttons in the center console to
change setting. The setting in use when the
engine is switched off is activated the next
time the engine is started.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

In certain situations, the power steering
may become too warm and will have to be
temporarily cooled down. While this is
happening, the power steering effect will
be reduced slightly and somewhat more
effort may be required to turn the steering
wheel.
If this occurs, a message will be displayed
in the instrument panel.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Passenger compartment convenience
Storage spaces

}}

233

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Passenger compartment convenience
Compartment in door panel

Tunnel console

Glove compartment

Storage pocket on the front edge of the
front seat cushions
Glove compartment
Storage compartment, 12-volt socket and
AUX input
Jacket holder
Rear seat cup holders
Storage pocket

Jacket holder
05

234

The jacket hanger is located on the inboard
side of the front passenger's seat head
restraint. It is only intended for hanging light
garments.

Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.)
under armrest, AUX input/USB connector.
Includes cup holder for driver and passenger, 12-volt socket and a small storage compartment.

The owner's manual and maps can be kept
here. There are also holders for pens and fuel
cards. The glove compartment can be locked
manually with the key blade, see page 72.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Passenger compartment convenience
Vanity mirror

12-volt sockets

ignition must be in at least mode I, see
page 88.

Vanity mirror with lighting

G021439

G021438

The maximum current consumption is 10A
(120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets in
the passenger compartment is in use. If both
the front and rear sockets are used at the
same time, the maximum current consumption per socket is 7.5A (90W).

12-volt socket in the front tunnel console

The auxiliary sockets can also be used to
power a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette
lighters and ashtrays can be purchased from
your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

The light comes on automatically when the
cover is lifted.

G021440

Always keep the sockets covered when
not in use.

12-volt socket in the rear center console

The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt
accessories such as cell phone chargers and
coolers. For the socket to supply current, the

235

05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Passenger compartment convenience
12-volt socket in the cargo area*

Fold down the cover to access the electrical
socket.

NOTE
The 12-volt socket in the cargo area provides electrical current even when the ignition is switched off. Using the socket while
the engine is not running will drain the battery.

236

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

05 Comfort and driving pleasure

237

Introduction...........................................................................................
Radio.....................................................................................................
Media player.........................................................................................
AUX/USB sockets.................................................................................

240
250
259
264

Bluetooth® media ................................................................................. 267
Bluetooth® hands-free connection ....................................................... 269
Cell phone voice control*...................................................................... 278

238

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

INFOTAINMENT

06 Infotainment
Introduction
General information
The infotainment system consists of radio
and media player features and also makes it
possible to communicate via a cell phone.
The information is displayed on a 7" screen in
the center console. Infotainment functions
can be controlled from the center console or
via the buttons on the steering wheel keypad.
On models equipped with the navigation system*, voice commands can also be used to
e.g., set destinations, make calls from a
Bluetooth®-connected cell phone, etc.
If the infotainment system was on when the
ignition was switched off, the most recently
used source (FM1, etc.) will restart the next
time the ignition is put in mode I or higher.
The driver's door must also be closed on
vehicles with keyless drive*.
06

The infotainment system can be operated for
15 minutes at a time while the engine is
switched off by pressing the On/Off button.
While the engine is being started, the infotainment system will be temporarily interrupted
and will resume when the engine has started.

240

NOTE

Audyssey MultEQ1

To help avoid excessive battery drain,
remove the remote key from the ignition
slot if the infotainment system is used
while the engine is switched off.

Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic

The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used
to optimize sound quality to help ensure a
world-class listening experience.

The system is manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic and the
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.

Applies only to models with Premium Sound Multimedia.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

06 Infotainment
Introduction
Infotainment system overview

Basic infotainment functions

Left/right arrow keys – short press
moves between preset radio stations, tracks
on a disc or chapters on a DVD. Press and
hold to search within tracks or to tune to the
next/previous available radio station.
SOUND – press to access the menu for
adjusting bass, treble, etc., see page 245 for
additional information.
VOL – turn to raise or lower the volume
level.
ON/OFF/MUTE – short press - switch
the system ON. Press and hold (until the
screen turns black) - switch the system
OFF. A short press when the infotainment
system is on will mute/unmute the sound.
The entire infotainment system, including the
navigation* and telephone functions, is
switched on/off at the same time by using
this button.

Sockets for external audio sources (AUX
and USB)
Steering wheel keypad
Center console control panel
7" display
Rear seat control panel with headphone
socket*

CD/DVD* slot.

Not in use

Corresponding controls - steering wheel keypad
and center console

Mode buttons – select a mode (e.g.,
RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, etc.) by pressing its
button on the center console. The most
recent source in the selected mode (e.g.,
FM1 in RADIO mode) will be displayed. In
TEL or NAV* modes, pressing the respective
source button will display a shortcut menu.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

241

06 Infotainment
Introduction
Eject a disc.
OK/MENU – press the thumb wheel on
the steering wheel keypad or this button on
the center console to confirm a menu selection or accept an incoming phone call. From
RADIO or MEDIA mode's main view, pressing this button displays a menu for the
selected source. Arrows at the right of the
screen indicate submenus.
TUNE – turn the thumb wheel on the
steering wheel keypad or this button on the
center console to scroll among tracks/folders,
radio stations, phone contacts or to navigate
among the alternatives shown on the screen.

EXIT – short press - go upward in the
menu system, cancel a current function,
reject an incoming phone call or erase characters that have been entered on the screen.
Press and hold - to go to the mode's main
view. From a mode’s main view, pressing and
holding EXIT takes you to the infotainment
system's main view, which enables you to
access the same modes as by pressing the
respective mode keys on the center console.

Keypad for entering text/numbers, storing
radio stations, etc.
* FAV – this button can be used to store a
shortcut to a commonly used function in
AM/FM/SIRIUS/DISC, etc. See the section "*
FAV—storing a shortcut" on page 245 for
information on using this button.
MUTE (models without the navigation system*) – press to mute/unmute infotainment
system sound.
Voice control (models with the navigation
system*) – press to activate voice commands
(for Bluetooth®-connected cell phones and
the navigation system*).

# INFO – if more information is available
than is currently displayed on the screen,
press # INFO to display the remaining information.

242

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

06 Infotainment
Introduction
Menu navigation

An example of menu navigation in MEDIA mode when a CD is playing

}}

243

06 Infotainment
Introduction
Mode button (in this example, the MEDIA
button). The number of buttons varies,
depending on your vehicle’s specifications). Each mode has four basic views:

Scroll/search forward and back
Press briefly on (2) to scroll between CD
tracks/audio files or to search for the next
available radio station.

Normal view

Limitations

Shortcut view

NOTE

Quick scroll view
Menu view
Select a mode by pressing its button (1)
(RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, etc.). Navigate using
TUNE, OK/MENU or EXIT.

Volume control (right/left sides)
Scroll/search forward and back

Rear control panel with headphone
sockets*
06

Headphones with an impedance of
16 – 32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or
higher are recommended for best sound
reproduction.

MODE – select: AM, FM1, FM2,HD
Radio2, SAT1*, SAT2*, Disc, USB, iPod,
Bluetooth, AUX and ON/OFF.
Headphones sockets (3.5 mm)

Activating/deactivating
The control panel is activated by pressing
MODE when the infotainment system is
switched on. It is switched off automatically
when the infotainment system is switched off
or by a long press on MODE.

244

U.S. models only.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

•

The sound source (AM, FM1, Disc,
etc.) being played through the infotainment system's speakers cannot be
controlled from the rear control panel.

•

In order to select and play an external
device using MODE, the device must
be connected to the infotainment system.

06 Infotainment
Introduction
* FAV—storing a shortcut

•
•
•

iPod

Basic sound settings

Bluetooth

Press SOUND to display the basic sound setting menu (Bass, Treble, etc). Continue
pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to display the
other setting alternatives.

AUX

Favorites can also be stored for MY CAR,
CAM* and NAV*. See page 209 for a description of the menu system.
To program a function on the * FAV button:
1. Select a mode (e.g., RADIO, MEDIA,
etc.).

In RADIO mode

•
•
•

AM
FM1/FM2
SIRIUS1/SIRIUS2*

In MEDIA mode

•
•
3

DISC
USB

Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to
display:

• Surround:3 Can be set to On or Off.

2. Select e.g., a waveband (FM1, etc.) or
source (Disc), etc.
The * FAV button can be used to store frequently used functions, making it possible to
start the stored function by simply pressing * FAV. One favorite (for example,
Equalizer) can be programmed for each of
the following infotainment system functions:

Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save
the new setting by pressing OK/MENU.

3. Press and hold * FAV until the "favorite"
menu is displayed.
4. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of
alternatives displayed and press OK/
MENU to confirm (store) your choice.
> The next time the infotainment system
mode (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.) is
selected, a short press on * FAV will
start the stored function.

When switched on, the system will automatically select settings for the best
sound quality, which is normally DPLII
and
will appear in the display. If the
recording was made using Dolby Digital
technology, playback will be provided
will appear
with this setting and
in the display. If Surround is switched off,
audio will be provided using 3 channel
stereo.

• Bass: Bass level.
• Treble: Treble level.
• Fader: Balance between the front and
rear speakers.

• Balance: Balance between the right and
left speakers.

Premium Sound Multimedia only

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

245

06 Infotainment
Introduction
• Subwoofer*: subwoofer volume level.
• DPL II centre level/3 channel centre
level3: Volume for the center speaker.

• DPL II surround level3/4: Surround level.
Advanced sound settings
Equalizer
Sound levels for different frequencies can be
adjusted separately using this feature.
To do so:
1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio
settings and select Equalizer
2. Turn TUNE to select one of the frequencies and press OK/MENU.

3. Turn TUNE to adjust the sound setting
and confirm the change by pressing OK/
MENU. Do the same for the other frequencies.
4. When you have finished making your settings, press EXIT to save and return to
normal view.
For general information regarding menu navigation, see page 243 and menu overview see
page 247.
3
4
5

246

Sound stage5
The sound experience can be optimized for
the driver's seat, both front seats or the rear
seat. If the front and rear seats are occupied,
the sound stage setting Front seats is recommended. Select one of the options under
Audio settings Sound stage.

Audio volume and automatic volume
control
The infotainment system compensates for
disrupting noises in the passenger compartment by increasing the volume according to
the speed of the vehicle. The level of sound
compensation can be set at low, medium,
high or off. Select the level under Audio
settings Volume compensation.

External audio source volume
If an external device such as an MP3 player
or an iPod ® is connected to the AUX socket,
the device's volume may be different than the
volume of the internal sound sources such as
the disc player or the radio. If the external
sound source's volume is too high, the quality
of the sound may be impaired. To help prevent this, adjust the input volume of the external audio source:

Premium Sound Multimedia only
Only when Surround is on.
Premium Sound Multimedia only

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE
Sound quality may be affected if the MP3
player is being charged while the system is
in AUX mode. To help prevent this, avoid
charging the MP3 player in a 12-volt
socket while it is being played.

1. Press MEDIA and turn TUNE to AUX.
Press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on
the steering wheel keypad.
2. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to AUX
input volume. Confirm by pressing OK/
MENU.
3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume.

Optimal sound reproduction
The infotainment system is pre-calibrated for
optimal sound reproduction using digital signal processing.
This calibration takes into account factors
such as the speakers, amplifier, cabin acoustics, the listeners' seating positions, etc., for
each combination of vehicle/infotainment
system.

06 Infotainment
Introduction
There is also a dynamic calibration that takes
into consideration the volume level, radio
reception, and the speed of the vehicle.

Main FM1/FM2 menu
FM menu

The settings that are described in this manual, (Bass, Treble, Equalizer etc.) are only
intended to enable the user to adapt sound
reproduction to his/her personal tastes.

RADIO menus

Station name

Show presets

Artist

Scan

Title
Reset all FM settings

Audio settings7

Main SAT1*/SAT2* menu (SiriusXM™
satellite radio)

Main AM menu

SAT1

AM menu
Scan

Audio settings7

SAT2
SIRIUS radio off. Press RADIO
button to activate SIRIUS.

stage8

Equalizer9

Information
Show presets
Category list
Advanced SIRIUS settings
Skip options
Channel skip list

SIRIUS radio off. Press RADIO
button to activate SIRIUS.

Show presets6

Sound

Show radio text

Advanced settings

Infotainment system menus

View song memory
Channel list information

Song memory

Volume compensation

Add song

Reset all audio settings

Song Seek

Lock options
Channel lock list
Unlock all channels
Temporarily
unlock all channels

Change code

Audio settings7

Delete song

6
7
8
9

High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia only.
The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes
Premium Sound Multimedia only.
To reach sub menus, see "Main menu AM.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

247

06 Infotainment
Introduction
MEDIA menus

Stop

Change audio track

Main CD Audio menu

Subtitles

Scan

Disc menu

Audio tracks

Audio settings7

Random
Scan

Angle

Audio settings7

DivX® VOD code

Main CD/DVD10 Data menu
Disc menu

Play/Pause

iPod menu

AUX input volume

Audio settings7

TEL menus
Main Bluetooth media menu

Random

Scan

Bluetooth menu

Repeat folder

Audio settings7

Main USB menu
USB menu

Scan

Play/Pause

Audio settings7

Stop

Main DVD10 Video menu
DVD Video Menu

248

Main iPod menu

AUX menu

Random

Change audio track

7
10

Audio settings7

Main AUX menu

Stop

Change subtitles
06

Advanced settings

Random

Random
Change device
Remove Bluetooth device
Scan
Bluetooth software version in car

Audio settings7

Repeat folder

DVD disc menu

Select USB device

Play/Pause/Continue

Change subtitles

The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes
The media player can only play DVDs in models equipped with the optional navigation system. Images are only displayed when the vehicle is not in motion.

06 Infotainment
Introduction
Main Bluetooth® hands-free menu
Phone menu

Call options
Auto answer

Call lists
All calls

Voicemail number
Disconnect phone

Missed calls
Answered calls
Dialled calls
Call duration
Phone book
Search
New contact
Speed dials
Receive vCard
Memory status
Clear phone book

Change phone
Remove Bluetooth device
Phone settings
Discoverable
Sounds and volume
Download phone book
Bluetooth software
version in car

249

06 Infotainment
Radio
General functions

Menu navigation
RADIO menu selections can be made from
the center console or the steering wheel keypad, see page 241 for more information.

Selecting a station (in wavebands
AM/FM1/FM2)
Automatic tuning
1. Press RADIO, turn TUNE to toggle to the
desired waveband (AM, FM1, etc.) and
press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on
the steering wheel keypad.
RADIO button for selecting the AM, FM1,
FM2, SAT1* or SAT2* wavebands.
Keypad (buttons 0-9)

Navigate among the menu alternatives in
the display by turning TUNE or the thumb
wheel on the steering wheel keypad.
Confirm your selection or access the
radio menus by pressing OK/MENU or
the thumb wheel on the steering wheel
keypad.
Left/right arrow keys: Press and hold to
go to the next/previous strong station,
press briefly to tune to a preset station.

2. Press
/
keys on the center console control panel or steering wheel keypad to search for the next available station.

List of stations (in wavebands FM1/FM2
only)
The radio automatically compiles a list of the
strongest FM stations whose signals are currently being received. This enables you to find
stations when driving in areas where radio
stations and their frequencies are unfamiliar.
To access this list:
1. Select the desired waveband (FM1 or
FM2).

2. Turn TUNE slightly in either direction.
This displays the list of stations in the
area. The currently tuned station will be
indicated in the list by magnified text.
3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to
select a station on the list.
4. Confirm by pressing OK/MENU or the
thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad.

NOTE

•

This list will only display the frequencies of the stations currently being
received, not a complete list of all
radio frequencies on the currently
selected waveband.

•

If the signal from the currently tuned
station is weak, this may prevent the
radio from updating the list of stations.
If this occurs, press # INFO while the
list of stations is displayed to switch to
manual tuning mode and select a station. If the list of stations is no longer
displayed, turn TUNE in either direction to display the list again and press
# INFO.

The list will disappear from the display after
several seconds.

250

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

06 Infotainment
Radio
If the station list is no longer displayed, turn
TUNE in either direction and press
on
the keypad on the center console to switch to
manual tuning (or to switch back from manual
tuning to the "list of stations" function).

Manual tuning
By default, the list of stations of the strongest
stations in the area will be displayed when
you turn TUNE (see the preceding section,
"List of stations"). While the list of stations is
displayed, press
on the center console
keypad to switch to manual tuning, which
enables you to select a frequency from the
complete list of all radio frequencies available on the currently selected waveband. In
other words, in manual tuning mode, turning
TUNE one step will change from e.g., 93.3 to
93.5, etc.).
To manually tune a station:
1. Press RADIO. Turn TUNE to scroll to the
desired waveband (AM, FM1, etc.) and
press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on
the steering wheel keypad to confirm.
2. Turn TUNE or the thumb wheel to select
a frequency.

NOTE
The radio is initially set to automatically
search for stations in the area in which you
are driving (see the preceding section,
"List of stations").
However, if you have switched to manual
tuning (by pressing # INFO on the keypad
on the center console while the list of stations is displayed), the radio will remain in
manual tuning mode the next time it is
switched on. To switch back to "list of stations" mode, turn TUNE one step (to display the full list of stations) and press #
INFO.
Please note that if you press # INFO when
the list of stations is not displayed, this will
activate the INFO function.

Storing preset stations
Ten preset stations can be stored for each
waveband (AM, FM1, etc.).
Stored preset stations are selected using the
buttons on the keypad on the center console.

Manually storing preset stations
1. Tune to a station (see "Selecting a station" on page 250).

2. Press and hold one of the number key
buttons.
> The sound will be muted for several
seconds and when it returns, the station has been stored on the number
key button used.
A list of preset stations can be displayed. This
function can be activated/deactivated in
AM/FM mode in FM menu Show presets
or in AM menu Show presets

Scan
The function automatically searches the current waveband for radio stations. When a station is found, it is played for several seconds
before scanning is resumed. While the station
is playing it can be stored as a preset in the
usual way (see "Manually storing preset stations").
–

To start scanning in AM/FM mode, go to
FM menu Scan or in AM menu
Scan.

Stop station scanning by pressing EXIT.

NOTE
Storing a station interrupts the SCAN function.

}}

251

06 Infotainment
Radio
Radio text
Some stations transmit information on program content, artists, etc. This information
can be shown on the display.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under Show
radio text.

HD Radio™reception (U.S. models
only)
Introduction

Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio
broadcast

252

NOTE
HD radio volume may fade in and out at
times due to coverage limitations.

More information about HD radio and IBOC
can be found on Ibiquity's website,
www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com.

Benefits of digital broadcasting
HD radio is a brand name registered by the
Ibiquity digital corporation1. They are the
developer of a broadcasting technology
called IBOC or In Band On Channel, which
refers to the method of transmitting a digital
radio broadcast signal centered on the same
frequency as the AM or FM station's present
frequency.
The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid"
since it is both analogue and digital. During
hybrid operation, receivers still continue to
receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD
radio receivers incorporate both modes of
reception, where the receiver will automatically switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal cannot be decoded or is lost by the
receiver. When you have tuned to an HD
Radio station, the
symbol will appear in
the infotainment system display. The symbol
is "grayed-out" when HD Radio is in standby
mode and white when the radio is actively
receiving an HD broadcast.

•

Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality
and AM as analogue FM).

•

Some FM frequencies offer a greater
number of listening choices through “multicasting” (consisting of a frequency's
main channel and any sub-channels that
may also be available on that particular
frequency. See also the section "Subchannels" below).

•

When receiving a digital signal there is no
multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/
crackling due to outside influences.

How HD broadcasting works
HD Radio works similarly to conventional
radio and broadcasts of this type are available in many areas of the United States. However, there are a few key differences:

•

Instead of transmitting one analogue signal, stations send out a bundled signal –
both analogue and digital.

•

An HD radio receiver can receive both
digital and analogue broadcasts.
Depending on the terrain and location of
the vehicle (which will influence the signal

HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.

06 Infotainment
Radio
strength), the receiver will determine
which signal to receive.

Limitations

•

Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM
only): The main channel is the only channel that can receive in hybrid mode (both
digital and analogue). If a frequency has
sub-channels, they are broadcast in digital mode only. The main FM channel will
be displayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC
(Volvo uses the symbol ">" to indicate
there are sub-channels available) The
sub-FM channels will be displayed as
93.9 – 2 WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc.

Reception coverage area: Due to current IBOC transmitter power limitations,
the reception coverage area in digital
mode is somewhat more limited than the
station's analogue coverage area. Please
be aware that as with any radio broadcast
technology, terrain, time of day, foliage
level and building location can have positive or negative effects on radio reception.
Analogue to digital/digital to analogue
blending: Analogue to digital blending
will occur as the signal strength reaches a
preset threshold in the receiver. This will
be noticeable in fringe areas (areas with
weak reception) and is normal.

NOTE
There may be a noticeable difference in
sound quality when a change from analogue to digital or digital to analogue
occurs, such as:

•
•

Volume increase or decrease
Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/Treble cut or boost

•

Time alignment (Digital program material in extreme cases can be as much
as 8 seconds behind the analogue).
This will noticeable as a "stuttering"
effect.
The above items are dependant on the
broadcaster's equipment settings and
do not indicate a fault in the vehicle's
radio receiver or antenna systems.

Switching HD on or off
The factory setting for HD radio is off. If activated when driving through areas with weak
HD signals (fringe areas), you may experience
that the radio repeatedly switches between
analogue/digital and digital/analogue reception. If this happens, it may be desirable to
switch HD off. To do so:

1. Be sure the infotainment system is
switched on and in one of the AM or FM
modes.
2. Press OK/MENU in the center console
control panel.
3. Turn TUNE and move the marker to HD
Radio.
4. Press OK/MENU to turn HD off (the X will
disappear from the box on the display
screen).
This will disable the radio's capability to
receive digital broadcasts but it will continue
to function as a conventional (analogue)
AM/FM receiver. Please note that when HD is
switched off, it will not be possible to tune to
sub-channels (see the following section for a
more detailed explanation of sub-channels).
Repeat steps 2-4 above to reactivate HD (an
X will appear in the box on the display
screen). Please note that this will only switch
HD on or off for the selected waveband (AM,
FM1, etc.).

}}

253

06 Infotainment
Radio
Sub-channels

main channel, press and hold the left arrow
key on the center console or on the steering
wheel keypad for approximately 1 second. To
go to subchannel 2 (if available), press and
hold the right arrow key on the center console
or on the steering wheel keypad for approximately 1 second.
If you are currently tuned to a frequency's
main channel, pressing and holding the left
arrow key for approximately 1 second will
tune to the next lower radio frequency.

Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels

NOTE

•

In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM
wavebands only) will also have sub-channels
offering additional types of programming or
music.
06

In such cases, the “-” symbol will be displayed to the left of the frequency number
and a number will be displayed to the right of
the frequency number indicating that the currently tuned frequency has at least one subchannel.

•

Selecting sub-channels
To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), press
and hold the right arrow key on the center
console or on the steering wheel keypad for
approximately 1 second. To go back to the

254

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

When the radio has gone into HD
mode, it may take several seconds
before the ">" symbol (if the current
frequency has any sub-channels) is
displayed to the left of the frequency.
Pressing and holding the arrow keys
for approximately 1 second before the
main-/sub-channel icon is displayed
will cause the radio to tune to the next
available radio station, not to the current station's sub-channels.
When you are no longer in broadcasting range of the currently tuned subchannel, No reception will be displayed. The radio will then be muted
and it will be necessary to tune to or
search for a new radio station.

Sub-channels can also be stored as presets,
see page 251 for information on storing stations.
If you press a sub-channel's preset button, it
may take up to 6 seconds before the channel
becomes audible. If you press this button
while you are out of digital range of the transmitter, No reception will be displayed.

SiriusXM™ satellite radio*
Listening to satellite radio
The SiriusXM™ satellite system consists of a
number of high elevation satellites in geosynchronous orbit.

NOTE

•

The digital signals from the satellites
are line-of-sight, which means that
physical obstructions such as bridges,
tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere
with signal reception.

•

Avoid any obstructions, such as metallic objects transported on roof racks or
in a ski box, or other antennas that
may impede signals from the SiriusXM™ satellites.

06 Infotainment
Radio
Selecting SiriusXM™ radio mode

SiriusXM™ ID

Selecting a channel

1. With the infotainment system switched
on, press RADIO.

The SiriusXM™ ID (sometimes referred to as
the Electronic Serial Number or ESN) is
required when contacting the SiriusXM™ Call
Center. It is used to activate your account
and when making any account transactions.

There are three ways of tuning in a channel:

2. Turn TUNE or the thumb wheel on the
steering wheel keypad to scroll to the
desired waveband (SAT1 or SAT2) and
press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on
the steering wheel keypad.

Activating SiriusXM™ radio
1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no
audio, which means that the channel is
unsubscribed and the text Subscription
update needed is displayed (see also
"Selecting a channel").
2. Call SiriusXM™ at 1-888-539-SIRIUS
(7474).
3. If you tune to an unsubscribed channel,
the SiriusXM™ ID will be displayed. The
SiriusXM™ ID can also be accessed from
the menu (press OK/MENU, turn TUNE
to scroll to the Advanced settings
menu, press OK/MENU, scroll to SIRIUS
ID and press OK/MENU to display the
number).
4. Updating subscription will be displayed
while the subscription is being updated,
after which the display will return to the
normal view.

Selecting a channel category
1. Turn TUNE to display a list of channels.

•

Using the left and right arrow keys to go
to the next channel. Skipped channels
(see page 257) will be excluded.

•

By turning the TUNE control and selecting a channel from the list

•

Through direct channel entry.

2. Press EXIT.
3. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of
categories and press OK/MENU to make
a selection.
> The channels in the selected category
are displayed.

NOTE

•
•

The category All is default, which enables you to scroll through the entire list
of available satellite channels.
The channel categories are automatically updated several times a year.
This takes approximately two minutes
and will interrupt normal broadcasting.
A message will be displayed while
updating is in progress. Information on
channel or feature updates is available
at www.siriusxm.com.

NOTE

•

The numbers of skipped or locked
channels will not be displayed.

•

If a channel is locked, the access code
must be entered before the channel
can be selected. See "Unlocking a
channel" on page 258.

Direct channel entry
The SiriusXM™ satellite channels are in
numerical order throughout all of the categories. To access a channel directly:

1. Turn TUNE to access the channel list.
2. Use the keypad buttons to enter the
channel's number.
3. Press OK/MENU. The radio will tune to
this channel, even if it belongs to a category other than the currently selected
one.
}}

255

06 Infotainment
Radio
Scanning
Scan automatically searches through the list
of satellite channels. The search will only be
carried out in the selected category, see
page 251 for more detailed information on the
scan function.
Storing a channel
A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored;
10 channels each for SAT1 and SAT2, see
page 251 for detailed information on storing
channels.

•

A long press on one of the number keys
stores the currently tuned channel on that
key.

•

A short press on a number key while the
radio is in SAT1 or SAT2 mode will tune
to the preset satellite channel stored on
that button, regardless of the currently
selected channel category.

Searching for and storing songs
The Song Seek function provides notification

Press OK/MENU to listen to the song or EXIT
to cancel.
To activate/deactivate the song seek function:
1. Press OK/MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song memory
and press OK/MENU.
3. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song Seek and
press OK/MENU to activate or deactivate
the function.

NOTE
When the song has ended, the radio will
remain tuned to the channel on which the
song was played.

Song memory

when SiriusXM™ is broadcasting the songs
selected in song memory. Song memory
enables you to store the name of the song for
future advance notification when that song is
being played.

Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's
memory.

Song seek

2. Scroll to Song memory and press OK/
MENU.

When a satellite radio channel plays one of
the songs stored in the song memory while

256

the Song seek feature is activated, the listener will be alerted by a text message and an
audible signal.

To add the currently playing song to the list:
1. Press OK/MENU.

3. Scroll to Add current song to song
memory and press OK/MENU.
If a new song is selected when the memory is
full, you will be prompted to delete a song
from the list. To do so:
1. Press OK/MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of
songs. Select a song and press OK/
MENU to delete it from the list.

Radio text
This text provides information about the song
that is currently playing. To turn this feature
on or off, press OK/MENU and scroll to
Show radio text and press OK/MENU to
toggle between on or off.

Advanced SiriusXM™ settings
This menu function enables you to make settings on certain SiriusXM™ satellite radio
functions. To access this menu:
1. Press OK/MENU.
2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu
and press OK/MENU.

06 Infotainment
Radio
WARNING
Settings should be made when the vehicle
is at a standstill.

Channel skip settings can be made

6. Press OK/MENU to select Skip all
channels in the category or turn TUNE
to scroll to a channel and press OK/
MENU to select or deselect it. Multiple
channels can be selected.

Channel lock settings can be made

Unskip all channels

The channel access code can be displayed or changed (see also "Locking a
channel" on page 257)

This removes all channels from the skip list
and makes them available for selection.

The following settings can be made in the
satellite menus:

•
•
•
•
•

Your SiriusXM™ ID can be displayed
Reset SiriusXM™ settings

Skip options
This function is used to remove a channel
from the list of available channels.

Skipping a channel
1. Press OK/MENU.
2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu.
3. Press OK/MENU to enter the Skip
options menu.
4. Press OK/MENU to enter Channel skip
list.

5. Press OK/MENU to select All categories
or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and
press OK/MENU to select it.

Temporary unskip all channels
This function will temporarily unskip all channels and make them available for selection.
The channels remain on the skip list and will
again be skipped the next time the ignition is
switched on.

Channel lock
Access to specific channels can be restricted
(locked). A locked channel will not provide
audio, song titles, or artist information.

NOTE
All channels are initially unlocked.

The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."

Locking a channel
1. Press OK/MENU.
2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu.
3. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to scroll
to the Lock options menu and press
OK/MENU.
4. Use the keypad in the central control
panel to enter the channel access code2
and press OK/MENU.
5. Press OK/MENU to enter the Channel
lock list.
6. Press OK/MENU to select All categories
or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and
press OK/MENU to select it.
7. Press OK/MENU to select Lock all
channels in the category or turn TUNE
to scroll to a channel and press OK/
MENU to select it. Multiple channels can
be selected.

The selected channel is now locked and a
checked box will be displayed to indicate
this. It will be necessary to enter the channel
access code2 in order to listen to a locked
channel.

}}

257

06 Infotainment
Radio
Unlocking a channel

If you have forgotten the access code:

A channel's access code2 is required to
unlock a channel.

1. Select SIRIUS ID in the Advanced
settings menu and press OK/MENU.

Unlock all channels

2. Press and hold the OK/MENU button for
several seconds.

This permanently removes all channels from
the locked list and makes them available for
selection.

Temporarily unlock all channels
This function will temporarily unlock all channels and make them available for selection.
The channels remain on the locked list and
will again be locked the next time the ignition
is switched on.

3. The current code will be displayed.
Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with
assistance.

SiriusXM™ ID
This function displays the 12-digit SiriusXM™
activation ID.

CHANGE CODE
This function makes it possible to change the
channel access code. The default code is
0000.
06

To change the code:
1. Select Change code in the Lock
options menu and press OK/MENU.
2. Enter the new code and press OK/
MENU.
3. Confirm the new code and press OK/
MENU.
If an incorrect code is entered, the text
Incorrect code is displayed.
2

258

The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."

06 Infotainment
Media player
OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selection or access the menus for the currently
selected source (e.g., Disc) or press the
thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad.

CD/DVD1 functions

Left/right arrow keys: Fast back/forward
and change track or chapter2.
The media player supports and can play the
following main types of discs and files:

•
•
Center console control panel

Disc slot
MEDIA button, the most recently used
active source will start when MEDIA is
pressed. Pressing this key from Media
mode's main view will display a shortcut
menu.
Eject
Keypad
TUNE:Turn to navigate among menu
selections/folders/tracks (or turn the
thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad).
1
2

•
•

Purchased CDs (CD Audio)
Home-burned CDs with audio and /or
video files
Home-burned DVDs with audio and /or
video files
Purchased DVDs

For a list of compatible formats, see
page 262.
Media menu selections can be made from
the center console or the steering wheel keypad, see page 241.
For general information regarding menu navigation, see page 243 and menu overview see
page 247.

Playing a disc
Press MEDIA ans scroll to Disc. Press OK/
MENU or the thumb wheel on the steering
wheel keypad. If there is a disc in the player,
it will begin playing automatically. Otherwise,
Insert disc will be displayed. Insert the disc
into the slot with the text side upward and it
will begin playing automatically.
If a disc with audio/video files is inserted, its
folder structure will be read by the system. It
may take several seconds until the disc
begins playing, depending on its quality and
the amount of information it contains.

Disc eject
For reasons of traffic safety, an ejected disc
must be removed within 12 seconds or it will
be automatically drawn back into the slot.

Pause
When the infotainment system volume is
turned off completely or the sound is muted,
the player will pause. It will resume playing
when the volume is turned up again or if the
sound is unmuted. Pause is also available via
the menu system, select Play/Pause.

The media player can only play DVDs in models equipped with the optional navigation system. Images are only displayed when the vehicle is not in motion.
DVDs only

}}

259

06 Infotainment
Media player
Navigating a disc and playing tracks
CD audio discs
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and
to navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to
confirm a choice and begin listening. Press
EXIT to cancel. Press and hold EXIT to return
to the playlist's root level.
The
/
buttons on the center console
or steering wheel keypad can also be used to
change tracks.

Home-burned CD/DVD audio/video files
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and
to navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to
confirm a choice and begin listening. Use
EXIT to stop or to go back in the disc's folder
structure. Press and hold EXIT to return to
the playlist's root level.
06

The
/
buttons on the center console
or steering wheel keypad* can also be used
to change audio/video files.
The following symbols are used in the display:

•
•
•

260

- audio files

When a file has been played, the player will
continue to play the rest of the files (of the
same type) in the current folder. When all of
the files in the folder have been played, the
player will automatically go to the next folder
and play the files in it (unless Repeat folder
is activated).
The system automatically detects and
changes settings if a disc containing only
audio or only video files is inserted in the
player and will play these files. However, the
system will not change settings if a disc containing both audio and video files is inserted
and the player will continue to play the current type of file.

NOTE
Video images will only be visible when the
vehicle is not moving. When the vehicle is
traveling faster than approximately 4 mph
(6 km/h), No visual media available
while driving will be displayed. Sound
from the film will still be audible and video
images will be shown again when the vehicle stops.

- video files
- folders

Not video DVDs

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE
Some copy protected audio files or homeburned audio files may not be read by the
player.

DVD videos
For information, see page 259.

Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the
/
buttons to fast
forward/reverse. This is done at one speed
for audio files but several speeds can be
chosen for video files. Press the
/
buttons several times to increase the speed.
Release the button to return to normal viewing speed.

Scan3
This function plays the first ten seconds of
each track/audio file. To start scanning:
1. Press OK/MENU.
2. Scroll to Scan.
> The first ten seconds of each track/
audio file will be played.
3. Stop scanning by pressing EXIT. The current track/audio file will continue playing.

06 Infotainment
Media player
Random3

Playing video DVDs

This function plays the tracks in random order
(shuffle). The random tracks/sound files can
be scrolled through in the normal way. To listen to tracks in random order:

Play

1. Press OK/MENU,
2. Scroll to Random
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate
the random play function.
/
buttons on the center
Press the
console or steering wheel keypad to change
tracks/audio files.

Repeat folder4
This function makes it possible to play files in
a folder repeatedly. When the last file has
been played, the first file will begin again. To
activate:
1. Press OK/MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder.
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate
the function.

Navigating in a DVD's menus

When playing a video DVD, a disc menu may
appear on the display, giving you access to
extra functions and settings such as choice of
subtitle and language, scene selection, etc.

Buttons in the center console control panel,
shown in the illustration, are used to navigate
in a DVD's menus.

Changing chapters or title
Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and
navigate in this list (the film will pause if it is
currently playing). Press OK/MENU to
choose a chapter and return to the normal
view in the display (if a film was playing, it will
resume). Press EXIT to access the list of
titles.

In the list of titles, turn TUNE to make a
selection and press OK/MENU to confirm.
This also returns you to the list of chapters.

3
4

Not video DVDs
Applies to audio/video files on home-burned discs/USB only.

}}

261

06 Infotainment
Media player
Press EXIT to cancel and return to the normal
view (without having made a selection).

See also www.divx.com/vod for more information.

It is also possible to change chapters by
/
on the center console
pressing
control panel or on the steering wheel keypad.

Screen settings
Screen settings can be made (when the vehicle is not moving) for:

•
•

Advanced settings
Angle
If the DVD supports this function, it is possible to select a camera angle for a certain
scene.
This can be done in DVD mode under DVD
disc menu Advanced settings Angle.

DivX® Video On Demand

262

The media player can be registered to play
DivX VOD files from home-burned discs or
USB. The registration code can be found by
pressing the MY CAR button, and going to
Settings Information DivX® VOD
code. See page 209 for more information
about the menu system.

DivX Certified® to play DivX® video. DivX®,
DivX Certified® and associated logos are
registered trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are
used under license. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:
DivX® is a digital video format created by
DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified
device that plays DivX video. Visit
www.divx.com for more information and
software tools to convert your files into DivX
video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified® device must be registered in order
to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)
content. To generate the registration code,
locate the DivX VOD section in the device
setup menu. Go to http://vod.divx.com with
this code to complete the registration
process and learn more about DivX VOD.
Covered by one or more of the following U.S.
Patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
7,519,274.

Brightness
Contrast

1. Press OK/MENU and choose Image
settings and confirm by pressing OK/
MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to the desired setting and
press OK/MENU.
3. Change the setting by turning TUNE and
confirm the change by pressing OK/
MENU.
Press OK/MENU or EXIT to return to the
screen settings list.
To return to the factory settings, select
Reset .

Compatible formats
The media player can play a number of different types of files and disc formats, and is
compatible with the formats listed in the following table.

06 Infotainment
Media player
NOTE
Dual format (double-sided discs) such as
DVD Plus or CD-DVD are thicker than normal discs and may not play in your infotainment system.
If a disc containing both CDDA and MP3
tracks is played, all MP3 tracks will be
ignored.

Audio formats

CD-Audio, mp3, wma,
aac, m4a

Video formats

CD-Video, DVD-Video, divx,
avi, asf

263

06 Infotainment
AUX/USB sockets
Connecting external devices

connected to the USB socket (if the vehicle's
ignition is on or if the engine is running).
To connect a device:
1. Press MEDIA and turn TUNE to select
the desired source (iPod, USB or AUX).
Press OK/MENU.
> For example, if a USB device has been
selected, the text Connect USB will
be displayed.

Sockets for auxiliary devices in the storage compartment between the front seats

iPod®

An auxiliary device, such as an
or MP3
player can be connected to the infotainment
system via one of the sockets in the center
console storage compartment. A device connected to the USB socket can be operated
using the vehicle's infotainment system controls.
There is a notch at the right rear of the center
console for routing wires to external devices.
This notch helps prevent the wires from being
pinched when the cover is closed.
An iPod® or an MP3 player with rechargeable
batteries will also be charged if the device is
1

264

USB and iPod® only

2. Connect the device to one of the sockets
in the center console storage compartment (see the illustration).
The text Reading USB will be displayed
while the system reads the device's folders.
This may take a short time, depending on the
folder structure and the number of files.
When this information has been loaded, track
information will be displayed and a track can
be selected.

NOTE

•

The system supports a number of
iPod® models produced in 2005 or
later.

•

In order to help avoid damage to the
USB socket, it will be switched off if
there is a short circuit or if the connected device uses too much current
(which can happen if the device does
not comply with the USB standard).
The USB socket will reactivate the
next time the ignition is switched on if
the problem no longer exists. If the
problem persists, contact a trained
and authorized Volvo service technician.

Media menu selections can be made from the
center console or the steering wheel keypad,
see page 241 for more information.

Navigating and playing tracks1
Turn TUNE to access the device's playlist
and to navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU
to either select a sub-folder or confirm a
choice and begin playback. Press EXIT to
cancel and exit the playlist or to go back in
the folder structure. Press and hold EXIT to
go to the highest level in the playlist.

06 Infotainment
AUX/USB sockets
The
/
buttons on the center console
or steering wheel keypad can also be used to
change tracks/files.
The following symbols are used in the display:

•
•
•

- audio files
- video files
- folders

When a file has been played, the player will
continue to play the rest of the files (of the
same type) in the current folder. When all of
the files in the folder have been played, the
player will automatically go to the next folder1
(unless Repeat folder is activated) and play
the files in it.
The system automatically detects and
changes settings if a device containing only
audio or only video files is connected to the
USB socket and will play these files. However, the system will not change settings if
the device contains both audio and video files
and will continue to play the current type of
file.

Fast forward/reverse1
For information, see page 260.
1
2

USB and iPod® only
USB only

Scan1
For information, see page 260.

sound is unmuted. Pause is also available via
the menu system, select Play/Pause.

Random1

External sound sources

For information, see page 261.

USB flash drive

Search1
The keypad in the center console can be
used to search for a file in the currently
selected folder.
Start the search by either turning TUNE (to
access the folders) or by pressing one of the
character keys to enter a letter/number. Possible search results will be displayed as characters are entered.

To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is
advisable to only store music files on the
drive. It will take considerably longer for the
system to index the files on the drive if it contains anything other than compatible music
files.

NOTE

•

The system supports removable media
that uses the USB 2.0 standard and
the FAT32 file system. It can index up
to 1,000 folders and a maximum of
254 sub-folders/files for each folder.
However, the highest folder level can
support up to 1,000 sub-folders/files.

•

When using a longer type of USB
device, connecting it with a USB
adapter cable will help reduce
mechanical wear on the USB socket
and on the device.

Play the file by pressing OK/MENU.

Repeat2
This function makes it possible to play files in
a folder repeatedly. When the last file has
been played, the first file will begin again. For
information, see page 261.

Pause
When the infotainment system volume is
turned off completely or the sound is muted,
the player will pause. It will resume playing
when the volume is turned up again or if the

}}

265

06 Infotainment
AUX/USB sockets
USB hub
A USB hub can be connected to the USB
socket, making it possible to connect several
USB devices at the same time. To select one
of the devices, go to the menu USB menu
Select USB device.

MP3 player
Many MP3 players have a file indexing system that is not supported by the vehicle's
infotainment system. In order to use an MP3
player, the system must be set to USB
Removable device/Mass Storage Device.

iPod®
An iPod® receives current and its battery is
charged through the USB cable.
The system will only play audio files from an
iPod®.
06

NOTE
When an iPod® is used as a sound source,
the vehicle's infotainment system has a
menu structure similar to the one in the
iPod®. See the iPod's manual for detailed
information.

266

Compatible file formats via the USB
socket
The following audio and video files are supported by the system when playing a device
connected to the USB socket.
Audio formats

mp3, wma, aac, m4a

Video formats

divx, avi, asf

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® media
Introduction
The vehicle's media player is equipped with
Bluetooth® and can play streaming audio files
from a Bluetooth® device such as a cell
phone or mp3 player. Navigation and control
of the device can be done through the vehicle's center console control panel or the
steering wheel keypad. On certain external
devices, it is also possible to change tracks
from the device.

The vehicle's media player can only play
audio files through the Bluetooth® function.

Overview

Not all cell phones are fully compatible
with the vehicle's Bluetooth system. A list
of compatible phones is available at you
Volvo retailer or at www.volvocars.us.

Menu navigation
Choices can be made in the Bluetooth
menus from the center console control panel
or the steering wheel keypad. For additional
information about navigating the various
menus, see page 241.

Left/right arrow keys: Short press:
change tracks. Long press: fast forward/
reverse within a track. The arrow keys on
the steering wheel keypad can be used in
the same way.

Pairing and connecting an external
device

NOTE
Any Bluetooth cell phones used must support Audio/Video Remote Control Profile
(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile (A2DP). The phone must use
AVRCP version 1.3 and A2DP 1.2. If older
versions of these standards are used, certain features (e.g., scan or random) may
not function.

EXIT: Press to go back in the menu
structure or cancel a function.

Center console control panel

VOL: Volume control
MEDIA button, the most recently used
active source will start when MEDIA is
pressed. Pressing this key from Media
mode's main view will display a shortcut
menu.
TUNE: Turn to navigate among menu
alternatives and folders shown in the display.
OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selection or access the menus.

Before an external device can be connected,
it must be paired to the infotainment system.
The procedure for connecting an external
device varies, depending whether or not the
device has previously been paired to the infotainment system. A maximum of 10 external
devices can be paired and each device only
needs to be paired once. To pair a device,
see page 270.

Automatic connection
When the Bluetooth® function is active and
the most recently used device is within range,
it is automatically connected. When the infotainment system searches for the most
recently used device, its name is shown in the
display. To connect another paired device,
press EXIT. See the following section for
information about switching to another
device.
}}

267

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® media
Switching to another device

Disconnecting an external device

It is possible to switch among paired
Bluetooth® devices that are in the vehicle. To
do so:

The external device is automatically disconnected from the infotainment system if it is
moved out of range.

1. Press MEDIA,scroll to Bluetooth and
press the thumb wheel on the steering
wheel keypad or OK/MENU.

Removing a paired device

Bluetooth®

2. Be sure the
device is discoverable (refer to its user manual if necessary).
3. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.
4. Turn the thumb wheel or TUNE to
Change device and confirm by pressing
the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.
> After several seconds, the names of
any paired external devices will be displayed.
06

5. Scroll to the device to be connected and
press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.
> The device will be connected.
Audio files can now be selected using the
/
buttons in the center console or on
the steering wheel keypad.

1. In Bluetooth mode, press OK/MENU.

This function plays the first ten seconds of
each audio file. This function can be activated/deactivated under: Bluetooth menu
Scan. Scanning can be canceled by pressing
EXIT.

2. Scroll to Remove Bluetooth device and
press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.

Bluetooth® version information

3. Scroll to the device to be removed by
turning the thumb wheel or TUNE and
confirm by pressing the thumb wheel or
OK/MENU.
> A question asking if you would like to
remove the device will be displayed.
4. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU to
confirm or EXIT to cancel.

Random1
This function plays the audio files on the
external device in random order (shuffle). This
function can be activated/deactivated under:
Bluetooth menu Random
Press the
/
buttons on the center
console or steering wheel keypad to change
tracks.

268

Function is not supported on all cell phones.

Scanning audio files on an external
device1

This feature offers information about the
Bluetooth® version installed in the vehicle's
infotainment system. This information can be
found under Bluetooth menu Bluetooth
software version in car.

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
Introduction

Compliance

This feature makes it possible to set up a
wireless connection between a Bluetooth®enabled cell phone or other device and the
vehicle’s infotainment system. This enables
the infotainment system to function as a
hands-free connection and allows you to
remote-control a number of the phone’s functions. The microphone used by this system is
located near the driver's side sun visor (2).
The buttons and other controls on the cell
phone can always be used regardless of
whether or not the phone is connected to the
hands-free system.

FCC/IC common sentence

NOTE
Not all cell phones are fully compatible
with the hands-free system. A list of compatible phones is available at your Volvo
retailer or at www.volvocars.us

WARNING
Never use the hands-free feature or any
other device in your vehicle in a way that
distracts you from the task of driving
safely. Distraction can lead to a serious
accident.

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC
Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules and Industry
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of this device.
USA: FCC ID A269ZUA134

(20 cm) or more away from person’s body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and
ankles).
Canada: IC 700BIAM2103
Canada: IC 700BIAM2104

Menu navigation
TEL menu selections can be made from the
center console or the steering wheel keypad.
For additional information about navigating
the various menus, see page 241.

USA: FCC ID A269ZUA135
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
06

IC RSS-Gen
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC
radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
equipment has very low levels of RF energy
that it deemed to comply without maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it
is desirable that it should be installed and
operated keeping the radiator at least 8 in.

System overview

Cell phone
Location of the microphone
Steering wheel keypad
Center console control panel and display
}}

269

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
Bluetooth® functions in the center
console control panel

Control panel in the center console.

Keypad containing letters and numbers
for dialing numbers, adding phone book
entries, etc.
TEL: Press this button to activate/deactivate the Bluetooth® function. If TEL is
already active, pressing this button again
will display a shortcut menu with commonly used functions.

TUNE: From TEL mode's normal view,
turn clockwise to display the phone book
or counterclockwise for the phone list. It
can also be used for navigating in displayed menus. The thumb wheel in the
1

270

steering wheel keypad can be used in the
same way.

Pairing (connecting) external
Bluetooth® devices

OK/MENU: Press to answer an incoming
call, confirm your selection or access the
phone menus. Incoming calls can also be
answered by pressing the thumb wheel
on the steering wheel keypad.

A maximum of 10 cell phones or other devices can be paired with the hands-free system. Pairing only needs to be done once for
each phone. After pairing, the cell phone no
longer needs to be in sight or discoverable.

EXIT: Press to end or reject calls, erase
characters that have been entered, end
an ongoing function and goes back in the
menus. This button on the steering wheel
keypad can also be used in the same
way.

Two Bluetooth® devices (e.g., a phone and an
iPod®) can be active at the same. However,
two phones cannot be used at the same time
to make calls.

Getting started
Use the controls on the steering wheel keypad and in the center console to access, navigate and make selections in the hands-free
system’s menus.

Activation
A short press on the TEL button in the center
console activates the Bluetooth® hands-free
system. If the system is already activated
when the button is pressed, a shortcut menu
symbol at the
will be displayed. The
upper right of the display indicates that the
hands-free system is active.

There are two ways of pairing a cell phone to
the hands-free system for the first time:
Method 1: Search for the external device
using the infotainment menus
1. Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth® function to make it discoverable (refer to the
phone’s user manual if necessary) or go
to www.volvocars.com
2. Press TEL.
> The infotainment system will search for
previously paired devices.
3. Press the thumb wheel on the steering
wheel keypad or OK/MENU and select
Add phone.1

Select Change phone if the cell phone or device has already been paired with the infotainment system. If several phones or devices have already been paired, their names will also be displayed.
Scroll to the device to be connected and press the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad or OK/MENU.

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
4. With the cell phone in discoverable mode,
press OK/MENU.
> The infotainment system will search for
cell phones or devices that are in
range, which takes approximately 30
seconds. Any phones detected will be
displayed using their Bluetooth®
names. The hands-free system’s
Bluetooth® name will appear in the cell
phone’s display as My Volvo Car.
5. Turn the thumb wheel or TUNE to select
one of the cell phones shown in the center console display and press the thumb
wheel or OK/MENU.
6. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the
digits (PIN code) shown in the center console display and press the button on the
cell phone used to confirm a choice.
The external device is now paired and can be
controlled from the infotainment system.
If the connection failed: Press EXIT and connect with method 2 below.
Method 2: Search for the vehicle using the
external device’s Bluetooth® function.
1. Press TEL. If a phone or external device
is already connected, disconnect it.
> The Bluetooth® function will search for
previously paired devices.

2. Make the vehicle discoverable by pressing the thumb wheel or OK/MENU and
selecting Phone settings
Discoverable.
3. Search for the vehicle using the phone or
external device's Bluetooth® function.
Refer to its user manual if necessary.

connected phone, its name appears in the
display.

Connect manually
To connect a phone other than the one that
was most recently connected or to switch
between cell phones that are already paired
with the hands-free system, go to Phone
menu Change phone.

4. Select My Volvo Car on the phone or
external device’s screen and follow the
directions provided.

Changing phones or devices

5. Enter a PIN code of your choice in the
external device and press its button to
pair the device. When prompted, enter
the same PIN code in the vehicle using
the center console keypad.

Changing devices:

6. Pair My Volvo Car from the external
device.
When the external device has been paired, its
Bluetooth® name appear in the center console display. This device can now be controlled from the infotainment system.

Connect automatically
When the hands-free system is active and the
most recently connected cell phone is within
range, it will be connected automatically. If
this phone is not within range, the hands-free
system will attempt to connect one of the
other paired cell phones. When the infotainment system searches for the most recently

More than one device can be used in the
vehicle as long as this device has been
paired. To do so, see page 270.
1. Check that the external device is discoverable.
2. Press TEL and select Change phone.
> The infotainment system will search for
previously paired devices. Those that
are detected will be displayed on the
screen.

3. Select the desired device by turning the
thumb wheel or TUNE and confirm by
pressing the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.
> The device will be connected.

}}

271

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
Making a call
1. Ensure that
is shown at the top of
the center console display and that the
hands-free function is in telephone mode.
2. Dial the desired phone number using the
center console keypad or use the speed
dial function (see page 276). In normal
view (see page see page 241 for information about the various display views), it is
also possible to turn TUNE clockwise to
access the phone book and then counterclockwise for the call list. See page 277
for more information about the phone
book.
3. Press the thumb wheel or OK/MENU.
End or reject a call by pressing EXIT.

Disconnecting the cell phone
06

The cell phone is automatically disconnected
from the infotainment system if it is moved
out of range.
The cell phone can be manually disconnected
from the hands-free system by pressing and
holding TEL or in phone mode, going to
Phone menu Disconnect phone. See also
page 273 for more information about connections.

The hands-free system is also deactivated
when the ignition is switched off (or if the
driver’s door is opened).
When the cell phone is disconnected from the
hands-free system, a call in progress can be
continued using the cell phone’s own speaker
and microphone.
Even if the cell phone has been disconnected
manually, some phones may reconnect automatically, for example when a new call is initiated.

Removing a paired device
A paired phone or device can be removed
from the list. To do so:
1. Press TEL.
2. Select Phone menu
Bluetooth device.

Handling calls
Incoming calls
–

Press OK/MENU (or the thumb wheel on
the steering wheel keypad) to answer a
call, even if the infotainment system is
currently in another mode (e.g., RADIO or
MEDIA).

Press EXIT to reject a call.

272

Remove

Auto answer
This function means that incoming calls will
be answered automatically. Activate or deactivate the function in the menu system under
Phone menu Call options Auto
answer.

Call settings
While a call is in progress, press OK/MENU
or the thumb wheel on the steering wheel
keypad to access the following functions:

• Mute: mute the infotainment system’s
microphone.

• Mobile phone: transfer the call from

hands-free to the cell phone. On certain
cell phones, the connection will be broken, which is normal. The hands-free
function will ask if you would like to
reconnect.

• Dial number: dial a third party during an

ongoing call using the keypad (the current
call will be put on hold).

Call lists
Call lists are copied to the hands-free function each time a cell phone is connected and
the lists are updated while the phone is connected. In normal view, turn TUNE counterclockwise to see the All calls list.

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
In phone mode, the various call lists can be
displayed in Phone menu Call lists:

•
•
•
•

All calls
Missed calls
Answered calls
Dialled calls (certain cell phones show
this list in reverse order)

• Call duration
If no number has been stored, this menu can
be accessed by pressing and holding 1.

Voice mail
In normal view, a speed dial number for voice
mail can be programmed and accessed by
pressing and holding 1.
The number for voice mail can be changed in
phone mode in Phone menu Call options
Voicemail number Change number.

Sound settings
Call volume

Phone settings Sounds and volume
Ring signals Ring signal 1, etc.

Call volume can be only be adjusted during a
call. Use the buttons in the steering wheel
keypad or the infotainment system’s VOL
control.

NOTE
The connected cell phone’s ring tone may
not be switched off when one of the
hands-free system's ringing tones is used.

Infotainment system volume
If no phone call is in progress, volume for the
infotainment system can be adjusted in the
normal way with the infotainment system's
VOL control or from the steering wheel keypad.
Infotainment system sound can be automatically muted when a phone call is received in
Phone menu Phone settings Sounds
and volume Mute radio/media.

Ringing volume
In phone mode, go to Phone menu Phone
settings Sounds and volume Ring
volume and adjust the volume by turning
VOL. Save the setting by pressing EXIT.

If you prefer to use the connected cell
phone’s ring tone2, go to Phone menu
Phone settings Sounds and volume
Ring signals Mobile phone ring signal.

Phone book
The hands-free system uses two phone
books (one with the cell phone's list of contacts and one with contacts saved directly in
the infotainment system), which are combined to form one phone book.

•

The infotainment system downloads the
phone book from a connected cell phone.
This phone book will only be displayed
when this cell phone is connected to the
hands-free system.

•

The infotainment system also has an integrated phone book made up of contacts
that have been saved in the system,
regardless of which cell phone is currently

Ringing tones
The hands-free system’s integrated ringing
tones can be selected in Phone menu

Not supported by all cell phones.

}}

273

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
connected when the contact is saved.
These contacts will be displayed regardless of the cell phone that is connected. If
a contact has been saved in the infotainsymbol will be
ment system, the
displayed next to it.

NOTE
Changes made from the infotainment system to a contact in the cell phone's phone
book will result in a new contact being
added to the infotainment system's phone
book. However, this contact will not be
saved in the cell phone's phone book. The
infotainment system's display will show
duplicate contacts with different icons.

Please also note that if a speed dial number is saved or if a contact's information is
edited, this will result in a new contact in
the infotainment system's phone book.

The
symbol must be displayed before
the phone book can be used and the handsfree function must be in phone mode.
The infotainment system saves a copy of
each paired cell phone's phone book. This
phone book can be copied each time the
phone is connected.

–

Activate/deactivate this function in phone
mode in Phone menu Phone settings
Download phone book.

If the phone book contains information about
someone who is trying to call you, this information will be shown in the display.

Contact shortcuts
A quick way of searching the phone book for
contacts in normal view is to turn TUNE
clockwise to access the phone book and then
counter-clockwise to select a contact from
the list. Press OK/MENU to call.
Each name in the phone book has a default
symbol is displayed
phone number. If the
to the right of it, this indicates that there are
additional phone numbers for this contact. To
use a phone number other than the default
one, press the
button on the center
console control panel. Turn TUNE to select a
different phone number and press OK/MENU
to call.
It is also possible to search for a contact by
using the center console keypad to enter the
first letter(s) of the contact's name (see also
the following table "Buttons in the center console" for each button's function).
The list of contacts can also be accessed
from normal view by pressing and holding the
button on the center console keypad with the

274

first letter of the contact's name. For example, pressing and holding button 6 would provide direct access to the section of the list
with contacts whose names begin with M.

Buttons in the center console

Button

Function
Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1
ABCÅÄÆÀÇ2
DEFÈÉ3
GHIÌ4
JKL5
MNOÖØÑÒ6
PQRSß7
TUVÜÙ8
WXYZ9
Shift between upper and lower
case

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
Button

Function
+0pw
#*

Searching for contacts

1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press
OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter
keys on the center console can also be
used.
2. Continue to the next letter, etc. The
results of the search will be displayed in
the phone book (3).
3. To switch from letter entry mode to the
entry mode for numbers or special characters, or to go to the phone book, turn
TUNE to one of the selections (see the
explanation in the following table) in the
list for switching character entry mode (2)
and press OK/MENU.

Press EXIT briefly to erase a single character.
Press and hold EXIT to erase all of the characters that have been entered.
If a number button on the center console is
pressed while the text wheel is displayed, a
list of characters (1) will be displayed. Briefly
press the button once to enter its first letter,
twice to enter the second letter, etc. Continue
to press the button to display other characters. Continue with the next character, etc.
To enter a number, press and hold the button.

Adding a new contact

Character entry modes

Searching for contacts using the text wheel

List of characters
Switch between character entry modes
(see the following table)
Phone book (list of contacts)
To search for or edit a contact in phone
mode, go to Phone menu Phone book
Search.

123/ABC

Toggle between letters and
numbers by pressing OK/
MENU.

Switch to special characters
by pressing OK/MENU.
This leads to the phone book
(3). Turn TUNE to select a contact and press OK/MENU to
display the contact's information.

Enter the name of a new contact

Switch between character entry modes
(see the following table)
Character entry field
}}

275

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
New contacts can be added in phone mode
in Phone menu Phone book New
contact.
1. When Name is highlighted, press OK/
MENU to go to the character entry mode
(see the illustration).
2. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press
OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter
keys on the center console can also be
used.
3. Continue to the next letter, etc. The name
entered will be displayed in the character
entry field (2).

4. To switch from letter entry mode to the
entry mode for numbers or special characters, or to toggle between upper and
lower case letters, etc., turn TUNE to one
of the selections (see the explanation in
the following table) in the list (1) and press
OK/MENU.
When you have finished entering the name,
select OK in the list in the display (1) and
press OK/MENU. Continue by entering the
phone number in the same way.
When you have entered the phone number,
press OK/MENU and select a tag for the
number (Mobile phone, Home, Work or
General). Press OK/MENU to confirm.

276

When all of the contact's information has
been entered, select Save contact in the
menu to save.

123/AB
C

Toggle between letters and
numbers by pressing OK/
MENU.

Switch to special characters
by pressing OK/MENU.

Save and return to Add contact by pressing OK/MENU.
Toggle between upper and
lower case letters by pressing
OK/MENU.
Press OK/MENU and the cursor will move to the character
entry field (2) at the top of the
display. The cursor can now be
moved by turning TUNE to a
position where new characters
can be entered or deleted by
pressing EXIT. In order to add
characters, return to text entry
mode by pressing OK/MENU.

Speed dial
Speed dial numbers can be added in phone
mode in Phone menu Phone book
Speed dial.
To use speed dial to make a call in phone
mode, press a button on the center console
keypad followed by OK/MENU. If a contact
has not been saved on the speed dial number
used, you will be prompted to save a contact
on the number selected.

Accept vCards
vCards from other cell phones can be added
to the infotainment system's phone book. To
enable this feature, put the infotainment system in discoverable mode for Bluetooth®. The
feature is activated in Phone menu Phone
book Receive vCard.

Memory status
In phone mode, the memory status of the
infotainment system's phone book and the
connected cell phone's phone book can be
seen in Phone menu Phone book
Memory status.

Clearing the phone book
In phone mode, all entries in the infotainment
system's phone book can be cleared in

06 Infotainment
Bluetooth® hands-free connection
Phone menu
book.

Phone book

Clear phone

NOTE
Clearing the entries in the infotainment
system's phone book does not delete
entries in the cell phone's phone book.

Bluetooth® version information
For information about the Bluetooth® version
installed in the vehicle, go to Phone menu
Phone settings Bluetooth software
version in car.

277

06 Infotainment
Cell phone voice control*
Introduction
The infotainment system's voice control feature1 enables the driver to voice-activate certain functions in a Bluetooth®-connected cell
phone or the navigation system.

NOTE

•

•
06

The information in this section applies
to using voice commands to operate a
Bluetooth®-connected cell phone.
See also the section "Bluetooth®
hands-free connection" beginning on
page 269 for detailed information
about using a cell phone with the vehicle's infotainment system.
The navigation system has a separate
user's guide containing information
about voice commands for operating
that system.

WARNING
As the driver, you have full responsibility
for operating the vehicle safely and adhering to all applicable traffic regulations.

The voice control feature provides access to
a number of functions in the Bluetooth®
hands-free and navigation systems while
allowing you to keep your hands on the steering wheel. Input is in dialogue form using
spoken commands from the user and verbal
prompts from the system. Voice control uses
the same microphone as the Bluetooth®
hands-free system (see the illustration on
page 269) and system prompts are provided
through the infotainment system's front
speakers.

Voice commands offer convenience and help
avoid distractions so that you can concentrate on driving and focus your attention on
road and traffic conditions.

278

Languages

Available in vehicles equipped with the Volvo Navigation System* only

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

List of languages.

Voice control is not available for all languages. The available languages are indiicon. The language can be
cated by the
changed in the MY CAR menu system under
MY CAR Settings System options
Language.

06 Infotainment
Cell phone voice control*
Getting started

•

When giving commands, speak at your
usual speed and in a normal tone of voice
after the tone

This feature can be accessed by pressing the
MY CAR button in the center console and
turning TUNE.

•

The vehicle's doors, windows and moonroof should be closed when using the
voice control system

Tutorial

•

Avoid background noises in the cabin
when using the system

The tutorial feature can be started in two
ways:

NOTE
The tutorial feature can only be started
when the vehicle is parked and the parking
brake is applied.

NOTE

Voice control button (1) on the steering wheel.

Activating the system
Before any phone voice commands can be
used, a Bluetooth®-enabled cell phone must
be paired with the infotainment system. If a
phone command is given, the system will
inform you If there is no cell phone paired.
See page 270 for information on pairing a cell
phone.
Press the voice control button (1 in the illustration) to activate the system and initiate a
command dialogue. The system will display
commonly used commands on the screen
when the button has been pressed.
While using the voice control system, keep
the following points in mind:

If you are uncertain of the commands that
you can use, saying "help" will prompt the
system to provide a number of commands
that can be used in a specific situation.

•

Voice control commands can be cancelled
by:

By pressing the voice control button and
saying "Voice tutorial."

•

By pressing MY CAR and going to
Settings Voice settings Voice
tutorial. Press OK/MENU to begin the
tutorial lesson.

•
•
•
•

Saying "cancel"
Not speaking
Pressing and holding the voice control
button
Pressing EXIT or one of the mode buttons (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.).

Voice control support feature

•

Tutorial: A feature that helps acquaint
you with the system and the procedure
for giving commands.

The tutorial is divided into three lessons,
which take a total of approximately 5 minutes
to complete.

By default, the system will begin with the first
lesson. To skip to the next lesson, press the
voice control button and say "next." Go back
to a previous lesson by saying "previous."
Press and hold the voice control button to
exit the tutorial.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

279

06 Infotainment
Cell phone voice control*
Voice output volume
Press MY CAR and go to Settings Voice
settings Voice output volume. Press OK/
MENU and turn TUNE to raise or lower the
volume. Press EXIT to save the change and
exit the menu.

Using voice commands
The driver initiates a voice command dialogue
by pressing the voice control button (see the
illustration on page 279).
When a dialogue has been initiated, commonly used commands will be shown in the
display. Grayed-out texts or texts in parentheses are not part of the spoken command.

Once you become familiar with the system,
you can speed up the command dialogue by
briefly pressing the voice control button to
skip prompts from the system.
Commands can be given in several ways.
For example, the command "Phone call contact" can be spoken as:

280

•

"Phone > Call contact"—say "Phone,"
wait for a system response, and then
continue by saying "Call contact."

•

"Phone call contact"—give the entire
command at one time

The following is a list of features that can be
voice-controlled with a Bluetooth®-connected
cell phone.

Shortcuts
Shortcut commands for using the phone can
be found in the MY CAR menu system, under
Settings Voice settings Voice
command list Phone commands and
General commands. See page 209 for more
information on the menu system.

User action
Begin saying the digits in the phone number.
If you say several digits and pause, the system will repeat them and prompt you by saying "Continue."
Continue saying the digits. When you have
finished, complete the command by saying
"Dial."

•

Dialing a number
The system understands the digits zero to
nine. These numbers can be spoken individually, in groups of several digits at a time, or
the entire number can be given at once.
Numbers above nine will not be recognized.
The following is an example of a voice command dialogue. The system's response may
vary depending on the situation.

You can also change the number by
using the commands "Correction" (which
deletes the last group of digits spoken) or
"Delete" (which will erase the entire
phone number).

Dialing from a call list
The dialogue below enables you make a call
from one of your cell phone's call lists.

The user initiates the dialogue by
saying:
Phone > dial from call list

The user initiates the dialogue by
saying:

Phone > dial number

Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.

Phone dial from call list

Phone dial number

Calling a contact

System response

The dialogue below enables you to call the
pre-defined contacts in your cell phone. See
the phone's user's guide if necessary.

Number please

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

06 Infotainment
Cell phone voice control*
The user initiates the dialogue by
saying:
Phone > call contact
or

or
Phone dial voice mail
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.

Phone call contact
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
When calling contacts, keep the following in
mind:

•

If there are several contacts with similar
names, they will be presented in the display in numbered lines and the system
will prompt you to pick a line number

•

If there are more lines in the list than can
be displayed at one time, saying "Down"
will enable you to scroll downward in the
list (and saying "up" will take you back up
through the list).

Dialing voice mail
The dialogue below enables you to call your
voice mail to check any messages that you
may have received. Your voice mail phone
number must be registered in the Bluetooth®
function, see page 273.

The user initiates the dialogue by
saying:
Phone > dial voice mail

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

281

Driving recommendations.....................................................................
Refueling...............................................................................................
Loading.................................................................................................
Cargo area ...........................................................................................
Towing a trailer......................................................................................
Emergency towing................................................................................

282

284
288
293
299
303
306

DURING YOUR TRIP

07 During your trip
Driving recommendations
General information

•

Economical driving conserves natural
resources
Better driving economy may be obtained by
thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and
stops and adjusting the speed of your vehicle
to immediate traffic conditions.
Observe the following rules:

•

Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle for driving short distances. This does
not allow the engine to reach normal
operating temperature.

•
•

Do not exceed posted speed limits.

•

Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire
pressure regularly (when tires are cold).

•

Remove snow tires when threat of snow
or ice has ended.

•

Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,
increase air resistance and also fuel consumption.

•

At highway driving speeds, fuel consumption will be lower with the air conditioning
on and the windows closed than with the
air conditioning off and the windows
open.
Using the onboard trip computer's fuel
consumption modes can help you learn
how to drive more economically.

Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra
load) in the vehicle.

•

Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration and hard braking.

•

Use the transmission's Drive (D) position
as often as possible and avoid using kickdown.

•

Using the engine's optional Eco function1
can help improve fuel economy. See
page 134 for additional information.

Other factors that decrease gas mileage
are:

1
2

284

Bring the engine to normal operating temperature as soon as possible by driving
with a light foot on the accelerator pedal
for the first few minutes of operation. A
cold engine uses more fuel and is subject
to increased wear.

Using the transmission's Sport mode2
may increase fuel consumption somewhat. Use the transmission's Drive (D)
position as often as possible. See page
129 for additional information about Sport
mode.

Available on certain 4-cyl. engines
Models with the T6 turbo engine only.

•
•
•
•

Dirty air cleaner
Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter
Dragging brakes
Incorrect front end alignment

Some of the above mentioned items and others are checked at the standard maintenance
intervals.

WARNING
Driving with the tailgate open: Driving
with the tailgate open could lead to poisonous exhaust gases entering the passenger compartment. If the tailgate must
be kept open for any reason, proceed as
follows:

•
•

Close the windows
Set the ventilation system control to air
flow to floor, windshield and side windows and the blower control to its
highest setting.

Weight distribution affects handling
At the specified curb weight your vehicle has
a tendency to understeer, which means that
the steering wheel has to be turned more
than might seem appropriate for the curvature of a bend. This ensures good stability
and reduces the risk of rear wheel skid.

07 During your trip
Driving recommendations
Remember that these properties can alter
with the vehicle load. The heavier the load in
the cargo area, the less the tendency to
understeer.

WARNING

•

Handling, roadholding
Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure all affect vehicle handling. Therefore,
check that the tires are inflated to the recommended pressure according to the vehicle
load. See the "Tire pressure" section. Loads
should be distributed so that capacity weight
or maximum permissible axle loads are not
exceeded.

•

CAUTION

Avoid driving through standing or
rushing water. Doing so can be dangerous and it may also be difficult to
determine the actual depth of the
water.

•

Engine damage will occur if water is
drawn into the air cleaner.

•

If water cannot be avoided, after driving through the water, press lightly on
the brake pedal to ensure that the
brakes are functioning normally. Water
or mud can make the brake linings
slippery, resulting in delayed braking
effect.

If the vehicle is driven through water
deeper than 10 in (25 cm), water may
enter the differential and the transmission. This reduces the oil's lubricating
capacity and may shorten the service
life of these components.

•

Do not allow the vehicle to stand in
water up to the door sills longer than
absolutely necessary. This could result
in electrical malfunctions.

•

If the engine has been stopped while
the vehicle is in water, do not attempt
to restart it. Have the vehicle towed
out of the water.

Driving through water

•

The vehicle can be driven through water
up to a depth of approximately 10 in.
(25 cm), at a maximum speed of 6 mph
(10 km/h).

•

Take particular care when driving through
flowing water.

•

Clean the electrical connections for trailer
wiring after driving in mud or water.

•

When driving through water, maintain low
speed and do not stop in the water.

Engine and cooling system
Under special conditions, for example when
driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with
heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine
and cooling system will overheat. Proceed as
follows to avoid overheating the engine.

•

Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep hills.

•

Do not turn the engine off immediately
when stopping after a hard drive.

}}

285

07 During your trip
Driving recommendations
WARNING
The cooling fan may start or continue to
operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the
engine has been switched off.

•

Remove any auxiliary lights from in front
of the grille when driving in hot weather
conditions.

•

Do not exceed engine speeds of
4500 rpm if driving with a trailer in hilly
terrain. The oil temperature could become
too high.

Conserving electrical current
Keep the following in mind to help minimize
battery drain:

•

286

•

When the engine is not running, avoid
using ignition mode II. Many electrical
systems (the audio system, the optional
navigation system, power windows, etc)
will function in ignition modes 0 and I.
These modes reduce drain on the battery.
Please keep in mind that using systems,
accessories, etc., that consume a great
deal of current when the engine is not
running could result in the battery being
completely drained. Driving or having the
engine running for approximately
15 minutes will help keep the battery
charged.

•

The optional 12-volt socket in the cargo
area provides electrical current even with
the ignition switched off, which drains the
battery.

•

Reflective warning triangles are legally
required in some states/provinces.

•

Have a word with a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician if you intend to
drive in countries where it may be difficult
to obtain the correct fuel.

•

Consider your destination. If you will be
driving through an area where snow or ice
are likely to occur, consider snow tires.

Before a long distance trip
It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle
checked by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician before driving long distances. Your retailer will also be able to supply you with bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and
wiper blades for your use in the event that
problems occur.
As a minimum, the following items should be
checked before any long trip:

•

Check that engine runs smoothly and that
fuel consumption is normal.

•
•
•
•
•

Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage.

Cold weather precautions
If you wish to check your vehicle before the
approach of cold weather, the following
advice is worth noting:

•

Make sure that the engine coolant contains 50 percent antifreeze. Any other
mixture will reduce freeze protection. This
gives protection against freezing down to
–31 °F (–35 °C). The use of "recycled"
antifreeze is not approved by Volvo. Different types of antifreeze must not be
mixed.

•

Volvo recommends using only genuine
Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.

•

Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this
helps prevent the formation of condensation in the tank. In addition, in extremely
cold weather conditions it is worthwhile
to add fuel line de-icer before refueling.

•

The viscosity of the engine oil is important. Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil)

Have the transmission oil level checked.
Check condition of drive belts.
Check state of the battery's charge.
Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as
well), and replace those that are worn.
Check tire pressures.

•

The brakes, front wheel alignment, and
steering gear should be checked by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician only.

•

Check all lights, including high beams.

07 During your trip
Driving recommendations
improves cold-weather starting as well as
decreasing fuel consumption while the
engine is warming up. Full synthetic
0W-30 oil is recommended for driving in
areas with sustained low temperatures.

•

The load placed on the battery is greater
during the winter since the windshield
wipers, lighting, etc., are used more
often. Moreover, the capacity of the battery decreases as the temperature drops.
In very cold weather, a poorly charged
battery can freeze and be damaged. It is
therefore advisable to check the state of
charge more frequently and spray an antirust oil on the battery posts.

•

Volvo recommends the use of snow tires
on all four wheels for winter driving, see
page 323.

•

To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from
freezing, add washer solvents containing
antifreeze. This is important since dirt is
often splashed on the windshield during
winter driving, requiring the frequent use
of the washers and wipers. Volvo Washer
Solvent should be diluted as follows:
Down to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1 part washer
solvent and 4 parts water Down to 5 °F
(–15 °C): 1 part washer solvent and
3 parts water Down to 0 °F (–18 °C):
1 part washer solvent and 2 parts water
Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 part washer
solvent and 1 part water.

•
•

Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.
Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can
cause damage to the locks.

287

07 During your trip
Refueling
Fuel requirements
Deposit control gasoline (detergent
additives)
Volvo recommends the use of detergent gasoline to control engine deposits. Detergent
gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and
intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit
control gasolines will help ensure good drivability and fuel economy. If you are not sure
whether the gasoline contains deposit control
additives, check with the service station operator.

NOTE
Volvo does not recommend the use of
external fuel injector cleaning systems.

Unleaded fuel

288

Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter and must use only unleaded gasoline.
U.S. and Canadian regulations require that
pumps delivering unleaded gasoline be
labeled "UNLEADED". Only these pumps
have nozzles which fit your vehicle's filler
inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel
into a vehicle labeled "unleaded gasoline
only". Leaded gasoline damages the threeway catalytic converter and the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated use of leaded

gasoline will lessen the effectiveness of the
emission control system and could result in
loss of emission warranty coverage. State
and local vehicle inspection programs will
make detection of misfueling easier, possibly
resulting in emission test failure for misfueled
vehicles.

NOTE
Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain an octane enhancing additive called
methyl-cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). If such fuels are used,
your Emission Control System performance may be affected, and the Check
Engine Light (malfunction indicator light)
located on your instrument panel may
light. If this occurs, please return your
vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician for service.

Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers,
"Oxygenated fuels"
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or
ethers. In some areas, state or local laws
require that the service pump be marked indicating use of alcohols or ethers. However,
there are areas in which the pumps are
unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is
alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy,
check with the service station operator. To

meet seasonal air quality standards, some
areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel.
Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygenated" fuels; however, the octane ratings
listed on page 289 must still be met.

Alcohol – Ethanol
Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".
Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to
15% MTBE may be used.

Methanol
Do not use gasolines containing methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice
can result in vehicle performance deterioration and can damage critical parts in the fuel
system. Such damage may not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

07 During your trip
Refueling
Octane rating

TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
Volvo endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help maintain engine performance and reliability. TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufactures to meet the needs of today’s
advanced engines. Qualifying gasoline retailers (stations) will, in most cases, identify their
gasoline as having met the “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards.
G028920

Minimum octane

Typical pump octane label

Volvo recommends premium fuel for best
performance, but using 87 octane1 or above
will not affect engine reliability.

NOTE
Vehicles equipped with the high performance 4-cylinder engines (B4204T9 and
B4204T10) require premium fuel2.

1
2

NOTE
Information about TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline is available at
www.toptiergas.com.

Demanding driving
In demanding driving conditions, such as
operating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a
trailer, or driving for extended periods at
higher altitudes than normal, it may be advisable to switch to higher octane fuel (91 or
higher) or to change gasoline brands to fully
utilize your engine's capacity, and for the
smoothest possible operation.

AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2.
Refer to your Warranty and Maintenance Records booklet for additional information.

NOTE
When switching to higher octane fuel or
changing gasoline brands, it may be necessary to fill the tank more than once
before a difference in engine operation is
noticeable.

Fuel Formulations
Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a
knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives. Besides damaging the exhaust emission control systems on your vehicle, lead
has been strongly linked to certain forms of
cancer.
Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.
Unburned benzene has been strongly linked
to certain forms of cancer. If you live in an
area where you must fill your own gas tank,
take precautions. These may include:

•

standing upwind away from the filler nozzle while refueling

•

refueling only at gas stations with vapor
recovery systems that fully seal the
mouth of the filler neck during refueling

•

wearing neoprene gloves while handling a
fuel filler nozzle.

}}

289

07 During your trip
Refueling
Use of Additives

WARNING

290

Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless, and odorless gas. It is present in all
exhaust gases. If you ever smell exhaust
fumes inside the vehicle, make sure the
passenger compartment is ventilated, and
immediately return the vehicle to a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician for
correction.

•

Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed and is completely closed after refueling.

•

Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot
weather.

Close the fuel filler door by pressing it; a click
indicates that it is closed.

WARNING
Never carry a cell phone that is switched
on while refueling your vehicle. If the
phone rings, this may cause a spark that
could ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in
fire and injury.

central locking button does not lock the
fuel filler door.

Opening/closing the fuel filler door

With the exception of gas line antifreeze during winter months, do not add solvents, thickeners, or other store-bought additives to your
vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.
Overuse may damage your engine, and some
of these additives contain organically volatile
chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself
to these chemicals.

CAUTION
The fuel filler door is located on the right rear
fender (indicated by an arrow beside the fuel
tank symbol on the information display
)
With the ignition switched off, press and
release the button on the lighting panel to
unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the
fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the
vehicle begins to move forward. An audible
click will be heard when the fuel filler door
relocks.

•

If you intend to leave your vehicle while it
is being refueled, this feature enables you
to lock the doors/tailgate while leaving
the fuel filler door unlocked.

•

You can also keep the vehicle locked if
you remain inside it during refueling. The

Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In
addition to causing damage to the environment, gasolines containing alcohol can
cause damage to painted surfaces, which
may not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.

07 During your trip
Refueling
Opening/closing the fuel cap

CAUTION

G022915

Manually opening the fuel filler door

If necessary, the fuel filler door can be
opened manually:

Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open the
filler cap slowly.

1. Open the side hatch in the cargo area (on
the same side as the fuel filler door).

After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by
turning it clockwise until it clicks into place.

2. Grasp the handle on the green cord.
3. Gently pull the cord straight rearward until
the fuel filler door clicks open.

•

Do not refuel with the engine running3.
Turn the ignition off or to position I. If
the ignition is on, an incorrect reading
could occur in the fuel gauge.

•

Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not
press the handle on the filler nozzle
more than one extra time. Too much
fuel in the tank in hot weather conditions can cause the fuel to overflow.
Overfilling could also cause damage to
the emission control systems.

Emission controls
Three-way catalytic converter

•

Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain
engine malfunctions, particularly involving
the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition
systems, may cause unusually high threeway catalytic converter temperatures. Do
not continue to operate your vehicle if
you detect engine misfire, noticeable loss
of power or other unusual operating conditions, such as engine overheating or
backfiring. A properly tuned engine will

If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's
performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

}}

291

07 During your trip
Refueling
help avoid malfunctions that could damage the three-way catalytic converter.

•

Do not park your vehicle over combustible materials, such as grass or leaves,
which can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system and cause such materials
to ignite under certain wind and weather
conditions.

•

Excessive starter cranking (in excess of
one minute), or an intermittently firing or
flooded engine can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating.

•

Remember that tampering or unauthorized modifications to the engine, the
Engine Control Module, or the vehicle
may be illegal and can cause three-way
catalytic converter or exhaust system
overheating. This includes: altering fuel
injection settings or components, altering
emission system components or location
or removing components, and/or repeated use of leaded fuel.

NOTE
Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with
three-way catalytic converters.

Heated oxygen sensors
The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxygen content of the exhaust gases. Readings

292

are fed into a control module that continuously monitors engine functions and controls
fuel injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the
engine is continuously adjusted for efficient
combustion to help reduce harmful emissions.

07 During your trip
Loading
Power tailgate*

WARNING

The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is
determined by factors such as the number of
passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight
of any accessories that may be installed, etc.

•

Stop the engine, put the gear selector
in P, and apply the parking brake
when loading or unloading long
objects.

To increase loading space, the rear seat
backrests can be folded down, see page 93.

•

The vehicle's driving characteristics
may change depending on the weight
and distribution of the load.

•

A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a
force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a
head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h).

•

When loading the cargo area, keep the following in mind:

•

Load objects in the cargo area against
the backrest whenever possible.

•

Unstable loads can be secured to the
load anchoring eyelets with straps or web
lashings to help keep them from shifting.

•

Stop the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading or unloading long
objects. The gear selector can be
knocked out of position by long loads,
which could set the vehicle in motion.

G017876

Introduction

Power tailgate closing button

Automatic opening
The power tailgate can be opened automatically in the three ways:

•
•
•

butBy pressing and holding the
ton on the lighting panel until the tailgate
begins to open.
butBy pressing and holding the
ton on the remote key until the tailgate
begins to open.

By pressing the rubber-covered button
under the outer handle on the tailgate.

The taillights illuminate automatically when
the automatic open function is used.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

293

07 During your trip
Loading
CAUTION
Be sure that there is adequate space
above and behind the vehicle before opening the tailgate automatically.
The vehicle should not be driven or moved
with the tailgate in the open position. However, if the vehicle is moved with the tailgate in the open position, the automatic
closing function will be inoperative until
one of the following occurs:

•
•

294

If the tailgate has been opened and closed
continuously too long, the automatic function will be deactivated to avoid overloading the electrical system. The automatic
function can be used again after approximately 2 minutes.
If the vehicle's battery has been discharged or disconnected, the tailgate must
be opened and closed once manually to
reset the system.

WARNING
Be sure that no one is near the tailgate
when it is opened or closed automatically.
The tailgate should never be obstructed in
any way when it is operated.

The tailgate's maximum opening angle can
be programmed, which can be useful, for
example, if the tailgate has to be opened in a
garage with a low ceiling.
To do so:

Interrupting automatic opening/closing

•

Automatic opening or closing the tailgate can
be interrupted in four ways:

The tailgate is closed manually
The ignition is switched off and the key
is removed for approximately 10
minutes (the tailgate will function again
after restart).

NOTE

Programming the tailgate opening
angle

•

Open the tailgate manually, hold it at the
desired maximum opening angle and
press the tailgate's closing button for at
least 3 seconds. When the tailgate is
released, programming is complete.
To remove this programming, open the
tailgate manually to a higher opening
angle.

Automatic closing
The power tailgate can be closed by pressing
button on the tailgate (see the
the
illustration) or by pressing it down.

NOTE
If the tailgate is pressed down e.g., by the
weight of snow or strong wind, it will close
automatically.

•
•

By pressing the
lighting panel.

button on the

By pressing the
remote key.

button on the

•

By pressing the button on the lower edge
of the tailgate.

•

By pressing the rubber-covered button
under the outer handle on the tailgate.

If one of these actions is taken, the tailgate
will stop moving.

Pinch protection
If the tailgate is obstructed while it is being
operated, the pinch protection function is
activated.

•

If the tailgate is being opened, the electrical function will be switched off and the

07 During your trip
Loading
tailgate will be released from the electrical
system.

•

If the tailgate is being closed, it will stop
and move slightly in the opposite direction.

The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of
the vehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., to
help anchor items in the cargo area.

WARNING

Operating the tailgate manually

•

The power tailgate can be disconnected from
the vehicle’s electrical system by quickly pulling the outer handle twice. The tailgate can
then be opened/closed manually.

Cover sharp edges on long loads to
help prevent injury to occupants.
Secure the load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops.

•

Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seat belt or cargo retaining
straps.

•

Always secure the load to help prevent
it from moving in the event of sudden
stops.

Folding down the rear seat backrests
The rear seat backrests can be folded down
for additional loading space, see page 95.

Load anchoring eyelets

Cargo area floor rails and hooks

•

Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in
P when loading and unloading the
vehicle.

Load secured in upper and lower hooks

The floor of the cargo compartment has rails
on opposite sides of the vehicle equipped
with hooks for anchoring loads with straps,
nets, etc.

Cleaning the rails
Dirt or other small objects that collect in the
rails can make moving, locking, unlocking,
and removing the hooks more difficult.
Objects can be removed from the rails with a
vacuum cleaner, and the rails can be cleaned
with a moist cloth.

}}

295

07 During your trip
Loading

To move a hook, fold it down in the direction in which its opening points.

G019581

Upper illustration: hooks correctly installed,
Lower illustration: hooks incorrectly installed

To remove a hook, fold it down in the
direction in which its opening points.

It is important to insert the hooks correctly in
the rails. The hooks' openings should point
away from each other.

Fold up the hook. It will lock in place.

Press the hook down lightly and move the
it to an opening in the rail.

•

The opening on the hook closest to the
rear seat backrest should point toward
the backrest.

•

The opening on the hook closest to the
tailgate should point toward the tailgate.

There should be at least 2 in. (50 cm)
between the hooks in the rail.

WARNING
Switch off the engine, apply the parking
brake and put the gear selector in P when
loading and unloading the vehicle.

296

The load-securing hooks can easily be
removed, for example, to clean the rail.

Press the hook down lightly and move it
to the desired position.

NOTE
07

Reinserting a hook

G018134

Removing a hook

G017742

Moving the load anchoring hooks

Pull the hook straight up.
Replace a hook in the rail in the reverse order.

NOTE
In order to return a removed hook into a
rail, it must be pressed down lightly.

WARNING
The hooks must be installed correctly in
the rail. Incorrectly installed hooks will be
folded down by the strap, allowing them to
move. The load will then no longer be
securely anchored.

07 During your trip
Loading
Grocery bag holder*

Straps for securing loads

Roof loads
Using load carriers

Securing loads

Wrapping straps a full turn around the hooks
helps keep them in place.

NOTE
The straps should preferably be approximately 1 in. (25 mm) in width.

G017745

G019397

Load carriers are available as Volvo accessories. Observe the following points when in
use:

•

To avoid damaging your vehicle and to
achieve maximum safety when driving,
we recommend using the load carriers
that Volvo has developed especially for
your vehicle.

•

Volvo-approved removable roof racks are
designed to carry the maximum allowable
roof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg).
For non-Volvo roof racks, check the manufacturer's weight limits for the rack.

•

Never exceed the rack manufacturer's
weigh limits and never exceed the maximum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg).

•

Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads
evenly.

•

Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the
load.

•

Secure the cargo correctly with appropriate tie-down equipment.

•

Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured.

•

Remember that the vehicle's center of
gravity and handling change when you
carry a load on the roof.

Grocery bag holder under the floor of the cargo
area

The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags
in place.
1. Open the hatch in the floor of the cargo
area.
2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

297

07 During your trip
Loading

298

•

The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel
consumption will increase with the size of
the load.

•

Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast
cornering and hard braking.

07 During your trip
Cargo area
Steel cargo grid*

Installing the steel cargo grid
In order to install the steel grid, the rear seat
backrests must be completely folded down,
see page 95 for instructions.

Folding the grid up/down
Grasp the lowering edge of the grid and pull it
rearward/upward, or push it downward/
forward.

NOTE
If the steel grid is to be used with the
optional cargo area cover, the grid must
be folded down before the cargo area
cover is put in place.

When installing the grid, the handle
should be on the front side of the grid
–
).
(see illustrations

G018367

•

Put the handle in the installation position,
see the illustration. Press lightly on the
handle in order to turn it to this position,
see the arrow.

G018368

Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel
grid that helps prevent objects in the cargo
area from moving forward into the passenger
compartment.

The steel cargo grid is easiest to install
by two people, and should be folded
down.

Press in the piston toward the grid and
press it into the attachment bracket near
the ceiling.
Turn the handle 90°
. Press lightly as
if necessary.
shown in illustration
Attach the grid
by moving the handle
90°.
Do the same on the opposite side of the
vehicle.

07
G018369

G017748

NOTE

•

Installing the cargo grid

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

299

07 During your trip
Cargo area
Cargo area cover*

3. Press both sides of the cover until they
click into place
. The red mark will no
longer be visible.

Cargo net*

4. Check that both ends of the cover are
securely locked in place.

Removing the cover

G017749

1. Press one of the end pieces of the cover
inward.

Use

•

Pull the cover over the cargo and hook it
into the holes in the rear cargo area pillars.

•

To retract (roll up) the cover, release it
from the holes and guide it toward the
rear seat backrest.

2. Pull the cover carefully upward and outward. The other end will release automatically from its retaining bracket.

Folding down the cargo area cover's
rear flap
The cargo area cover's rear flap points horizontally when the cover is retracted (rolled
up). To fold it down:
–

Pull the flap slightly rearward past its supports and fold it down.

Installing the cover
07

1. Press the end piece on one side of the
cargo area cover into the retaining
bracket in the side panel of the cargo
.
area
2. Do the same on the opposite side

300

NOTE
On models equipped with this cover, it
should be removed before a child seat is
attached to the child restraint anchors.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Storage compartment for the cargo net

Two cassettes containing nylon cargo nets
are stored in a compartment under the cargo
area floor.

Attaching the cassette(s)

07 During your trip
Cargo area
The two-sections of the net are attached to
the rear side of the rear seat backrest. The
cassettes have different widths, and the widest section should be mounted on the right
side (seen from the rear of the vehicle).

With the backrests upright

Removing the cargo net cassettes

The net is pulled up from the cassette and
locks in position after approximately 1
minute.

1. Retract the net(s) in the reverse order.

Pull up the right side of the net by grasping its strap.

1. Fold down the rear seat backrests.
2. Align the cassette’s mounting rail above
the mounting brackets on the backrest
.

Insert the net’s rod in the retaining
bracket on the right side near the ceiling
and press it forward. It will click into
place.

3. Slide the cassette onto the mounting
.
brackets

Extend the left section of the rod and
insert it in the bracket on the left side of
the cargo compartment. Press it forward
until it clicks into place.

4. Return the backrest to the upright position.

Using the net(s)

Pull up the left side of the cargo net and
secure it on the rod.

2. Fold the entire rear seat backrest down.
3. Slide the cassettes outward until they
release from the mounting brackets.

WARNING

•

When not in use, return the cassettes
to their storage compartment under
the cargo area floor.

•

Objects in the cargo area should be
securely anchored, even if the cargo
net is correctly installed and in use.

Using the cargo net with the cargo area
cover

NOTE

G018246

•

The net can be fastened in the same
way if the rear seat backrests are
folded down. In this case, use the
retaining brackets near the ceiling,
above the front seats.

The front passenger's seat backrest
can also be folded down for carrying
long objects.

G018247

•

Straps for pulling up the net

}}

301

07 During your trip
Cargo area
The cargo net(s) can also be pulled up from
the backrest when the cargo area cover is
pulled out.
The straps for pulling up the cargo net are
located at the arrows in the illustration. Follow
the same procedure as for using the nets with
the backrests upright.

302

07 During your trip
Towing a trailer
Introduction
Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer
hitches that are specially designed for the
vehicle.

watched when driving in hot climates or
hilly terrain. Use a lower gear and turn off
the air conditioner if the temperature
gauge needle enters the red range.
If the automatic transmission begins to
overheat, a message will be displayed in
the text window.

Bumper-attached trailer hitches must
not be used on Volvos, nor should
safety chains be attached to the
bumper.

•

Avoid overload and other abusive operation.

Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle
rear axle must not be used.

•

Hauling a trailer affects handling, durability, and economy.

•

It is necessary to balance trailer brakes
with the towing vehicle brakes to provide
a safe stop (check and observe state/
local regulations).

Never connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to the vehicle
brake system, nor a trailer's lighting
system directly to the vehicle lighting
system. Consult your nearest authorized Volvo retailer for correct installation.

•

Do not connect the trailer's brake system
directly to the vehicle's brake system.

•

More frequent vehicle maintenance is
required.

•

Remove the ball holder when the hitch is
not being used.

When towing a trailer, the trailer's
safety wire must be correctly fastened
to the hole or hook provided in the
trailer hitch on the vehicle. The safety
wire should never be fastened to or
wound around the drawbar ball.

•

NOTE
See page 385 for the maximum trailer and
tongue weights recommended by Volvo.

•

Observe the legal requirements of the
state/province in which the vehicles are

•

All Volvo models are equipped with
energy-absorbing shock-mounted bumpers. Trailer hitch installation should not
interfere with the proper operation of this
bumper system.

Trailer towing does not normally present any
particular problems, but take into consideration:

•

Increase tire pressure to recommended
full pressure. See the tire inflation table
on page 316.

•

When your vehicle is new, avoid towing
heavy trailers during the first 620 miles
(1,000 km).

•

Maximum speed when towing a trailer:
50 mph (80 km/h).

•

Engine and transmission are subject to
increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant temperature should be closely

WARNING

•

}}

303

07 During your trip
Towing a trailer

•

•
•

•

•
07

When parking the vehicle with a trailer
on a hill, apply the parking brake
before putting the gear selector in P.
Always follow the trailer manufacturer's recommendations for wheel
chocking.

If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift
positions while towing a trailer, make
sure the gear you select does not put
too much strain on the engine (using
too high a gear).
The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch
may be rated for trailers heavier than
the vehicle is designed to tow. Please
adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer
weights.
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines
of more than 15%.

An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer
hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer
has 7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved
by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag
on the ground.

304

3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the
one in the hitch assembly.
4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch
assembly/ball holder.
5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end
of the locking bolt.

When starting on a hill, put the gear
selector in D before releasing the parking brake.

Trailer cable

Detachable trailer hitch (accessory)1

Removing the ball holder
D

G010496

NOTE

Ball holder
Locking bolt
Cotter pin

1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking
bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the
ball holder/hitch assembly.
2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch
assembly.

NOTE
A cover for the hitch assembly is also
included in the kit.

Hitch assembly
Safety wire attachment

Installing the ball holder
1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from
the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt
out of the hitch assembly.
2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assembly.

Check with your retailer for availability of the Volvo accessory trailer hitch

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)
Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to
help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer
when the vehicle and trailer have begun to
sway and is part of the Dynamic Stability and
Traction Control system (DSTC). See page
152 for information on DSTC.

07 During your trip
Towing a trailer
Function

How TSA works

A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway
for various reasons. Normally this only occurs
at high speeds but, for example, if the trailer
is overloaded or if the load is unevenly distributed in the trailer, there is risk of swaying
at speeds between approximately 45-55 mph
(70-90 km/h).

Once swaying has begun, it can be very difficult to stop, which makes it difficult to control
the vehicle and trailer.

Swaying may be caused by factors such as:

•

The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden, strong crosswind

•

The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an
uneven road surface or drive over a bump

•

Sudden movements of the steering wheel

Facts about TSA

•

•
•

•

TSA intervenes at speeds above approximately 40 mph (60 km/h)
) in the instruThe DSTC symbol (
ment panel will flash when TSA is working
If the driver switches off the DSTC system's Spin Control function, TSA will also
be switched off (but will be on again the
next time the engine is started)

The TSA system continuously monitors the
vehicle's movements, particularly lateral
movement. If the system detects a tendency
to sway, the brakes are applied individually
on the front wheels, which has a stabilizing
effect on the vehicle and trailer. This is often
enough to enable the driver to regain control
of the vehicle.
If this is not adequate to stop the swaying
motion, the brakes are applied to all of the
wheels on the vehicle and on the trailer if it is
equipped with brakes, and engine power is
temporarily reduced. As the swaying motion
begins to decrease and the vehicle-trailer
have once again become stable, TSA will now
stop regulating the brakes/engine power and
the driver regains control of the vehicle.
07

TSA may not intervene when the vehicle
and trailer begin to sway if the driver tries
to compensate for the swaying motion by
moving the steering wheel rapidly

305

07 During your trip
Emergency towing
Towing eyelet

There are two different types of covers
over the openings for the towing eyelet
and they have to be opened differently.

•

If the cover has a notch, insert a coin,
etc., into the notch and pry open the
edge of the cover. Open the cover
completely and remove it.

•

If the cover has a mark along one edge
or in a corner, press the mark while
prying out the opposite side/corner
using a coin, etc. Open the cover and
remove it.

Screw the towing eyelet in place, first by
hand and then using the tire iron until it is
securely in place.
After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet
should be removed and returned to its storage location.
Attaching the towing eyelet

Attaching the towing eyelet
07

306

The towing eyelet is located under the
floor of the cargo area, with the spare tire.
This eyelet must be screwed into the
positions provided on the right sides of
either the front or rear bumper (see illustration).

Press the cover for the attachment point back
into position.

WARNING

•

When the vehicle is being towed, the
ignition should be in mode II (in mode
I, all of the vehicle's airbags are deactivated). See page 89 for more information about ignition modes.

•

Never remove the remote key from the
ignition slot when the vehicle is being
towed. For vehicles with keyless drive,
the remote key must remain inside the
vehicle.

•

The power brakes and power steering
will not function when the engine is not
running. Approximately 5 times more
pressure will be required on the brake
pedal and the steering wheel will be
considerably harder to turn.

•

The towing eyelets must not be used
for pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or
for any similar purpose involving
severe strain.

07 During your trip
Emergency towing
Having the vehicle towed by a tow
truck
Call for professional help from an authorized
towing company. Volvo recommends the use
of flat bed equipment.

CAUTION
In certain conditions, the towing eyelet
may be used to pull the vehicle onto a
flatbed tow truck.

•

The vehicle's position and ground
clearance determine if it can be pulled
up onto a flatbed tow truck using the
towing eyelet.
If the angle of the tow truck’s ramp is
too steep or the ground clearance
under the vehicle is insufficient, damage could occur by attempting to pull
the vehicle using the towing eyelet.
If necessary, lift the vehicle using the
tow truck’s lifting device.

WARNING
No person or object should be behind the
tow truck while the vehicle is being pulled
up onto the flatbed.

1
2

CAUTION

•

The vehicle should always be towed in
the forward direction.

•

Vehicles with All Wheel Drive (AWD)*
that are being towed with the front
wheels off the ground should not be
towed at a speed above approx.
45 mph (70 km/h) and should not be
towed farther than 30 miles (50 km).

General towing precautions:

•

Please check with state and local
authorities before attempting this type
of towing, as vehicles being towed are
subject to regulations regarding maximum towing speed, length and type of
towing device, lighting, etc.

•

If the vehicle's battery is dead, see
page 125 to provide current for releasing the electric parking brake and to
move the gear selector from the P
position to N. If this is not possible,
see page 130 for information about
manually overriding the shiftlock system to move the gear selector from P
to N.

•

Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h).
Do not exceed the maximum allowable
towing speed.

•

Maximum distance with front wheels
on ground: 50 miles (80 km).

•

The vehicle should only be towed in
the forward direction.

Towing the vehicle
1. With the remote key fully pressed into the
ignition slot1, press START/STOP
ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds to
activate ignition mode II.
2. The remote key must remain in the ignition slot2 for the entire time that the vehicle is being towed.
3. Keep the tow rope taut when the towing
vehicle slows down by applying light
pressure on the brake pedal. This will
help prevent jarring movements of the
vehicle being towed.

4. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stop
the vehicle being towed.

Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.
For vehicles with the optional keyless drive, the remote key must be in the vehicle.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

307

General information ..............................................................................
Tire inflation...........................................................................................
Inflation pressure .................................................................................
Tire designations ..................................................................................
Glossary of tire terminology .................................................................
Vehicle loading .....................................................................................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...............................................................
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires ...............................................
Temporary Spare .................................................................................
Tire Sealing System*.............................................................................
Changing a wheel ................................................................................
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).............................................

308

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

310
313
316
317
319
320
322
323
324
325
331
334

WHEELS AND TIRES

08 Wheels and tires
General information
Introduction
Your vehicle is equipped with tires according
to the vehicle's tire information placard on the
B-pillar (the structural member at the side of
the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door
opening).

CAUTION
Some Volvo models are equipped with an
Ultra High Performance tire and wheel
combination designed to provide maximum dry pavement performance with consideration for hydroplaning resistance.
They may be more susceptible to road
hazard damage and, depending on driving
conditions, may achieve a tread life of less
than 20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this
vehicle is equipped with Volvo’s advanced
AWD or DSTC system, these tires are not
designed for winter driving, and should be
replaced with winter tires when weather
conditions dictate.

The tires have good road holding characteristics and offer good handling on dry and wet
surfaces. It should be noted however that the
tires have been developed to give these features on snow/ice-free surfaces.
08

310

Most models are equipped with "all-season"
tires, which provide a somewhat higher
degree of road holding on slippery surfaces

than tires without the "all-season" rating.
However, for optimum road holding on icy or
snow-covered roads, we recommend suitable
winter tires on all four wheels.
When replacing tires, be sure that the new
tires are the same size designation, type
(radial) and preferably from the same manufacturer, on all four wheels. Otherwise there is
a risk of altering the car's roadholding and
handling characteristics.

New Tires

Tire rotation
Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire
wear is affected by a number of factors such
as tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving
style, etc.

NOTE

•

If the tires are rotated, they should
only be moved from front to rear or
vice versa. They should never be rotated left to right/right to left.

•

Ideally, tire rotation should be done the
first time after approximately 3,000
miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at
6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals.
Some customers find that tire rotation
may help to get extra mileage from tire
life.

•

Tire rotation should only be performed
if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and
tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).

Tire age
Remember that tires are perishable goods. As
of 2000, the manufacturing week and year
(Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp)
will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1513
means that the tire illustrated was manufactured during week 15 of 2013).

Tires degrade over time, even when they are
not being used. It is recommended that tires
generally be replaced after 6 years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent high loading conditions or Ultra Violet
(U.V.) exposure can accelerate the aging

08 Wheels and tires
General information
process. The temporary spare1 should also
be replaced at 6-year intervals, even if it has
never been used.
A tire's age can be determined by the DOT
stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration).
A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration
should be replaced immediately.

Tread wear indicator

G021829

Option or accessory on some models

Summer and winter tires

When replacing worn tires, it is recommended
that the tire be identical in type (radial) and
size as the one being replaced. Using a tire of
the same make (manufacturer) will prevent
alteration of the driving characteristics of the
vehicle.

•

Maintain correct tire pressure. See the tire
inflation table on page 316.

•

Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard
braking and tire screeching.

•
•

Tire wear increases with speed.
Correct front wheel alignment is very
important.

•

Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy
and driving comfort.

•

Tires must maintain the same direction of
rotation throughout their lifetime.

•

When replacing tires, the tires with the
most tread should be mounted on the
rear wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer during hard braking.

•

Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the
tires and/or wheels permanently.

G021778

Improving tire economy

The tires have wear indicator strips running
across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI
are printed on the side of the tire. When
approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the
tread, these strips become visible and indicate that the tire should be replaced. Tires

with less than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very
poor traction.

The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the
tire

•

When switching between summer and
winter tires, mark the tires to indicate
where they were mounted on the car,
e.g., LF = left front, RR = right rear

•

Tires with tread designed to roll in only
one direction are marked with an arrow
on the sidewall.

•

Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's
braking properties and ability to force
aside rain, snow and slush.

}}

311

08 Wheels and tires
General information
•
•

The tires with the most tread should
always be at the rear (to reduce the risk of
skidding).

WARNING

•

The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo
are specified to meet stringent stability
and handling requirements. Unapproved wheel/tire size combinations
can negatively affect your vehicle's
stability and handling.

•

Any damage caused by installation of
unapproved wheel/tire size combinations will not be covered by your new
vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no
responsibility for death, injury, or
expenses that may result from such
installations.

Contact a Volvo workshop if you are
unsure about the tread depth.

Storing wheels and tires
When storing complete wheels (tires mounted
on rims), they should be suspended off the
floor or placed on their sides on the floor.
Tires not mounted on rims should be stored
on their sides or standing upright, but should
not be suspended.

CAUTION
Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,
dry, dark place, and should never be
stored in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils, etc.

312

08 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation
Inflation placard

G032521

NOTE

•

A certain amount of air seepage from
the tires occurs naturally and tire pressure fluctuates with seasonal changes
in temperature. Always check tire
pressure regularly.

Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation
pressure, including the spare, at least
once a month and before long trips. You
are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire
pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate.

•

Use the recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire performance
and wear.

•

Under-inflation or over-inflation may
cause uneven treadwear patterns.

Tire inflation
See the tire inflation table on page 316. A tire
inflation pressure placard is also located on
the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of
the driver's door opening). This placard indicates the designation of the factory-mounted
tires on your vehicle, as well as load limits
and inflation pressure.

The placards shown indicate inflation
pressure for the tires installed on the
vehicle at the factory only.

•

Tire inflation placard

Check tire inflation pressure regularly.

•

WARNING

•

Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failure and may result in
severe tire cracking, tread separation,
or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of
injury.

•

Under-inflated tires reduce the load
carrying capacity of your vehicle.

When weather temperature changes occur,
tire inflation pressures also change. A 10degree temperature drop causes a corresponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures frequently
and adjust them to the proper pressure,
which can be found on the vehicle's tire information placard or certification label.

Checking tire pressure
Cold tires
Inflation pressure should be checked when
the tires are cold.
The tires are considered to be cold when
they have the same temperature as the
surrounding (ambient) air.
This temperature is normally reached after the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

}}

313

08 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation
After driving a distance of approximately
1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be
hot. If you have to drive farther than this distance to pump your tire(s), check and record
the tire pressure first and add the appropriate
air pressure when you get to the pump.
If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,
never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The
tires are hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above recommended
cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.

To check inflation pressure:
1. Remove the cap from the valve on one
tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto
the valve.
2. Add air to reach the recommended air
pressure.

314

3. Replace the valve cap.

CAUTION

•

After pumping the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to
the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•

Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.

4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure
there are no nails or other objects
embedded that could puncture the tire
and cause an air leak.
5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there
are no gouges, cuts, bulges or other
irregularities.
6. Repeat this procedure for each tire,
including the spare.

NOTE

•

If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve. Then recheck the
pressure with your tire gauge.

•

Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure than the other tires. Consult the tire inflation pressure table on
page 316 or see the inflation pressure
placard.

Tire ratings
Speed ratings
The speed ratings in the table translate as follow:

Speed ratings
M

81 mph (130 km/h)

100 mph (160 km/h)

118 mph (190 km/h)

130 mph (210 km/h)

149 mph (240 km/h)

168 mph (270 km/h)

186 mph (300 km/h)

08 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation
Load ratings
See page 317 for an explanation of the load
rating on the sidewall of the tire.

315

08 Wheels and tires
Inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure table
The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard (see page 313 for its location) for information specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory.

Tire size

Cold tire pressure for up to five persons
Front

Rear

psi (kPa)

36 (250)

235/45 R19 Extra load

39 (270)

Temporary spare tire

61 (420)

215/65 R16 Extra load
235/55 R17
235/50 R18

T125/80R17

NOTE
Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts
department for the most up-to-date specifications.

316

08 Wheels and tires
Tire designations
Information on the sidewall
5

1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The
larger the number, the wider the tire.

2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its
width in percent.
3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the
symbol indicate that the vehicle is
equipped with optional self-supporting
run flat tires1. See page 336 for more
information about these tires).

4
10
3
2
12

G010753

11
1

Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires (see the illustration).
The following information is listed on the tire
sidewall:
The tire designation:

NOTE
Please be aware that the following tire
designation is an example only and that
this particular tire may not be available on
your vehicle.

Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models

4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in
inches).
5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example,
a load index of 95 equals a maximum
load of 1521 lbs (690 kg).
6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum speed at which the tire is designed
to be driven for extended periods of time,
carrying a permissible load for the vehicle, and with correct inflation pressure.
For example, H indicates a speed rating
of 130 mph (210 km/h).

NOTE
The tire's load index and speed rating may
not appear on the sidewall because they
are not required by law.

7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All
Terrain, AS = All Season
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT"
and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire
size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, 1510 means that the
tire was manufactured during week 15 of
2010. The numbers in between are marketing codes used at the manufacturer's
discretion. This information helps a tire
manufacturer identify a tire for safety
recall purposes.
9. Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies indicates or the number of layers of rubbercoated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

}}

317

08 Wheels and tires
Tire designations
10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum
load in pounds and kilograms that can be
carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's
tire information placard located on the BPillar for the correct tire pressure for your
vehicle.
11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature
grades: see page 322 for more information.
12. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure: the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the
tire. This limit is set by the tire manufacturer.

318

08 Wheels and tires
Glossary of tire terminology
Terms

•

The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard
load, radial tubeless, etc.

PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
unit of air pressure.

•

B-pillar: The structural member at the
side of the vehicle behind the front door.

•

Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire
next to the rim.

•

Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
bead area and the tread.

Tire information placard: A placard
showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire
sizes, recommended inflation pressure,
and the maximum weight the vehicle can
carry.
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A
number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand
and manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacturer.

•

Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road
when mounted on the vehicle.

•

Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.

Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire
or a tire and tube assembly upon which
the tire beads are seated.

•

Standard load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a maximum
load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric
tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not increase the
tires load carrying capability.

Maximum load rating: a figure indicating
the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. This
rating is established by the tire manufacturer.

•

Maximum permissible inflation
pressure: the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the
tire. This limit is set by the tire manufacturer.

•

Recommended tire inflation pressure:
inflation pressure, established by Volvo,
which is based on the type of tires that
are mounted on a vehicle at the factory.
This information can be found on the tire
inflation placard(s) located on the driver's

•

Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for
Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire's load carrying capability.
kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.

side B-pillar and in the tire inflation table
in this chapter.

•

Cold tires: The tires are considered to be
cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air. This
temperature is normally reached after the
vehicle has been parked for at least
3 hours.

319

08 Wheels and tires
Vehicle loading
Loads

Permissible axle weight

Properly loading your vehicle will provide
maximum return of vehicle design performance.

The maximum allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/
CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle
must never exceed its maximum permissible
weight.

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without
a trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/
CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire information placard:

Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passengers.

Curb weight
The weight of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard equipment. It does
not include passengers, cargo, or optional
equipment.

Capacity weight
All weight added to the curb weight, including
cargo and optional equipment. When towing,
trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo
weight.

NOTE
For trailer towing information, please refer
to the section "Towing a trailer" on page
303.

320

See page 303.

NOTE

•

The location of the various labels in
your vehicle can be found on page
382.

•

A table listing important weight limits
for your vehicle can be found on page
385.

Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1. Locate the statement "the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehicle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX"
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 –
750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual1 to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.

08 Wheels and tires
Vehicle loading
WARNING

•

Exceeding the permissible axle weight,
gross vehicle weight, or any other
weight rating limits can cause tire
overheating resulting in permanent
deformation or catastrophic failure.

•

Do not use replacement tires with
lower load carrying capacities than the
tires that were original equipment on
the vehicle because this will lower the
vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires
with the correct load carrying capacity.
Consult your Volvo retailer for information.

321

08 Wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grading information
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST
CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE
GRADES
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between the
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and many
depart significantly from the norm due to variation in driving habits, maintenance practices
and differences in road characteristics and
climate.

TRACTION
08

322

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government

test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction
tests and is not a measure of cornering (turning) traction.

WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on braking (straight-ahead) traction
tests and is not a measure of cornering
(turning) traction.

TEMPERATURE
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a minimum level of performance that all passenger vehicle tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and tire failure.

08 Wheels and tires
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires
Winter driving conditions
Snow chains
Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with
the following restrictions:

•

Snow chains should be installed on front
wheels only. Use only Volvo approved
snow chains.

•

If accessory, aftermarket or "custom"
tires and wheels are installed and are of a
size different than the original tires and
wheels, chains in some cases CANNOT
be used. Sufficient clearances between
chains and brakes, suspension and body
components must be maintained.

•

Some strap-on type chains will interfere
with brake components and therefore
CANNOT be used.

•

All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains
should only be installed on the front
wheels.

•

Certain size tires may not allow the
assembly of snow chains/traction devices.

Consult your Volvo retailer for additional
snow chain information.

to help retain the highest degree of traction.

CAUTION

•

Check local regulations regarding the
use of snow chains before installing.

•
•

Use single-sided snow chains only.
Always follow the chain manufacturer's installation instructions carefully.
Install chains as tightly as possible and
retighten periodically.

•

Never exceed the chain manufacturer's specified maximum speed limit.
(Under no circumstances should you
exceed 31 mph (50 km/h).

•

Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns
when driving with snow chains.

•

The handling of the vehicle can be
adversely affected when driving with
chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as
well as locked wheel braking.

Snow tires, studded tires1
Tires for winter use:

•

Owners who live in or regularly commute
through areas with sustained periods of
snow or icy driving conditions are
strongly advised to fit suitable winter tires

•

It is important to install winter tires on all
four wheels to help retain traction during
cornering, braking, and accelerating. Failure to do so could reduce traction to an
unsafe level or adversely affect handling.

•

Do not mix tires of different design as this
could also negatively affect overall tire
road grip.

•

Winter tires wear more quickly on dry
roads in warm weather. They should be
removed when the winter driving season
has ended.

•

Studded tires should be run-in 300 –
600 miles (500 – 1000 km) during which
the vehicle should be driven as smoothly
as possible to give the studs the opportunity to seat properly in the tires. The tires
should have the same rotational direction
throughout their entire lifetime.

NOTE
Please consult state or provincial regulations restricting the use of studded winter
tires before installing such tires.
08

Where permitted

323

08 Wheels and tires
Temporary Spare
Spare tire
The spare tire in your vehicle1 is called a
"Temporary Spare".
Recommended tire pressure (see the placard
on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should
be maintained irrespective of which position
on the vehicle the temporary spare tire is
used on.
In the event of damage to this tire, a new one
can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.

WARNING
Current legislation prohibits the use of the
"Temporary Spare" tire other than as a
temporary replacement for a punctured
tire. It must be replaced as soon as possible by a standard tire. Road holding and
handling may be affected with the "Temporary Spare" in use. Do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h).

CAUTION
The vehicle must not be driven with wheels
of different dimensions or with a spare tire
other than the one that came with the vehicle. The use of different size wheels can
seriously damage your car's transmission.

324

Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System*
Location

NOTE

WARNING

The tire sealing system's compressor has
been tested and approved by Volvo.

The 12-volt sockets are located in the front
tunnel console, on the rear side of the center
console in the rear seat and in the cargo
area*, see page 235.

•

After using the tire sealing system, the
vehicle should not be driven farther
than approximately 120 miles (200
km).

•

Have the tire inspected by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician
as soon as possible to determine if it
can be permanently repaired or must
be replaced.

•

The vehicle should not be driven faster
than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a
tire that has been temporarily repaired
with the tire sealing system.

•

After using the tire sealing system,
drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering maneuvers and sudden stops.

Accessing the tire sealing system
The tire sealing system is stowed under the
floor of the cargo area. To access it:
1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area.

Introduction
Certain models are equipped with a tire
sealing system* that enables you to temporarily seal a hole in the tread surface and reinflate a flat tire, or to adjust a tire’s inflation
pressure.
The system consists of an air compressor, a
container for the sealing compound, wiring to
connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical
system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a
hose used to connect the system to the tire’s
inflation valve.

2. Lift out the tire sealing system.

NOTE

•

The tire sealing system is only
intended to seal holes on the tire’s
tread area, not the sidewall.

•

Tires with large holes or tears cannot
be repaired with the tire sealing system.

•

After use, stow the tire sealing system
properly to help prevent rattling.
08

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

325

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System*
Tire sealing system–overview

WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind
when using the tire sealing system:

•

The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in
the illustration) contains 1) rubber
latex, natural and 2) ethanediol. These
substances are harmful if swallowed.

•

Speed limit sticker (on the rear side of the
compressor)
On/Off switch
Electrical wire
Bottle holder (orange cover)
Protective hose cover
Air release knob
Hose
Bottle with sealing compound
08

326

The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the respiratory
tract, the skin, the central nervous system, and the eyes.
Precautions:

•
•
•

Keep out of reach of children.
Do not ingest the contents.
Avoid prolonged or repeated contact
with the skin.

• Wash thoroughly after handling.
First aid:
•

Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention
if symptoms occur.

•

Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for
least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting
the upper and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.

Air pressure gauge

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

•

Inhalation: Move the exposed person
to fresh air. If irritation persists, get
medical attention.

•

Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
unless directed to do so by medical
personnel. Get medical attention.

•

Disposal: Dispose of this material and
its container to a hazardous or special
waste collection point.

NOTE
Do not break the seal on the bottle. This
occurs automatically when the bottle is
screwed into the holder.

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System*
Tire sealing system–temporarily
repairing a flat tire

NOTE

WARNING

Do not remove any foreign objects (nails,
etc.) from the tire before using the sealing
system.

•

Contact with the sealing compound may
cause skin irritation. If contact occurs,
wash the affected area immediately with
soap and water.

Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is
checked and adjusted if necessary.

3. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle
holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle
of sealing compound.

WARNING

•

Never leave the tire sealing system
unattended when it is operating.

NOTE

•

Keep the tire sealing system away
from children.

•

Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off
the road and away from moving traffic.

•

Apply the parking brake.

1. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it
to the steering wheel hub where it will be
clearly visible to the driver.

•

Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping
sealing compound into the tire. The car is
then driven a short distance to distribute
the sealing compound in the tire.

4. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.

WARNING

Stage 1: Sealing the hole

Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two
stages:

Do not break the seal on the bottle. This
occurs automatically when the bottle is
screwed into the holder.

2. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be
pressed down).

The bottle is equipped with a catch to
keep it securely in place and help prevent
sealing compound leakage. Once in place,
the bottle cannot be unscrewed. This must
be done by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.

5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s
inflation valve and screw the tire sealing
system’s hose connector onto the valve
as tightly as possible by hand.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

327

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System*
6. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
12-volt socket in the vehicle.

WARNING

•

Never stand next to the tire being inflated when the compressor is in operation.

•

If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,
switch off the compressor immediately.

•

If there is visible damage to the sidewall
or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired.
The vehicle should not be driven if this
occurs. Contact a towing service or
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if
applicable.

NOTE
Be sure that none of the other 12-volt
sockets is being used while the compressor is in operation.

7. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING
The vehicle´s engine should be running
when the tire sealing system is used to
avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure the
vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place,
or outdoors, before using the system.

8. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor by pressing the on/off switch to position I.

NOTE
The air pressure gauge will temporarily
show an increase in pressure to approximately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing
compound is being pumped into the tire.
The pressure should return to a normal
level after approximately 30 seconds.

9. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to
between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar).
Switch off the compressor briefly to get a
clear reading from the pressure gauge.
08

328

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.

WARNING
If the pressure remains below 22 psi
(1.8 bar) after approximately seven
minutes, turn off the compressor. In this
case, the hole is too large to be sealed and
the vehicle should not be driven.

10. Switch off the compressor and disconnect the electrical wire from the 12-volt
socket.
11. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation
valve and reinstall the valve cap.

CAUTION

•

After pumping the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to
the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•

Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System*
12. Immediately drive the vehicle for approximately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute
the sealing compound in the tire.

CAUTION
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the
use of the sealing compound may lead to
incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare
cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor.
Use the tire sealing system to check and
adjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure.

NOTE

•

Safely stow the tire sealing system in a
convenient place as it will soon be
used again to check the tire’s inflation
pressure.

•

The empty bottle of sealing compound
cannot be removed from the bottle
holder. Consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician to have the
bottle removed and properly disposed
of.

WARNING

If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering
behavior, or noises should occur while
driving, reduce speed and park the vehicle
in a safe place. Recheck the tire for
bumps, cracks, or other visible damage,
and recheck its inflation pressure. If the
pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not
continue driving. Have the vehicle towed
to a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.

Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure
1. Connect the tire sealing system as
described in stage 1.
2. Refer to the inflation pressure table in this
chapter for the correct inflation pressure.
If the tire needs to be inflated, start the
tire sealing system’s compressor. If necessary, release air from the tire by turning
the air release knob counterclockwise.

CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.

If you interrupt your trip for more than 1
hour, check the inflation pressure in the
damaged tire again before continuing.

Replacing the sealing compound
container
The sealing compound container must be
replaced if:

•

the tire sealing system has been used to
repair a tire

•

the container’s expiration date has
passed (see the date on decal).

NOTE

•

After use, the sealing compound bottle, the hose, and certain other system
components must be replaced. Please
consult your Volvo retailer for replacement parts.

•

If the sealing compound bottle’s expiration date has passed, please take it
to a Volvo retailer or a recycling station
that can properly dispose of harmful
substances.
08

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

329

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System*
Inflating tires
The tire sealing system can be used to inflate
the tires. To do so:

WARNING

•

1. Park the car in a safe place.
2. The compressor should be switched off.
Ensure that the on/off switch is in position
0 (the 0 side of the switch should be
pressed down).
3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.
4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s
inflation valve and screw the hose connector onto the valve as tightly as possible by hand.
5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
12-volt socket in the vehicle.
6. Start the vehicle’s engine.

•

Children should never be left unattended in the vehicle when the engine is
running.

7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the
gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly
to get a clear reading from the pressure
gauge.
8. Refer to the tire inflation table in this
chapter for the correct inflation pressure.
If the tire needs to be inflated, start the
tire sealing system’s compressor (press
the on/off switch to position I). If necessary, release air from the tire by turning
the air release knob counterclockwise.

330

The vehicle’s engine should be running
when the tire sealing system is used to
avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure
the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated
place, or outdoors, before using the
system. The parking brake should be
securely applied and the gear selector
should be in the P (park) position.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.

9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off
switch to position 0) when the correct
inflation pressure has been reached.
10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation
valve and reinstall the valve cap.

CAUTION

•

After pumping the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to
the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•

Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.

11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the
12-volt socket.

08 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel
Removing a wheel

After use

WARNING
Current legislation prohibits the use of the
“Temporary Spare” tire other than as a
temporary replacement for a punctured
tire. It must be replaced as soon as possible by a standard tire. Road holding and
handling may be affected with the “Temporary Spare” in use.

G017464

CAUTION

Location of jack and tools

Spare wheel
The spare wheel is only intended for temporary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as
soon as possible. The car's handling may be
altered by the use of the spare wheel. The
correct tire pressure for the spare wheel is
stated in the tire pressure table on page 316
and in the tire inflation placard on the driver's
side door jamb at the rear of the driver's door
opening.

The vehicle must never be driven with
more than one temporary spare wheel.

The foam block and spare wheel must be
replaced in the reverse order. Note the arrow
on the upper foam block. It should point forward.

NOTE
If the floor hatch is not completely closed,
the private locking feature (see page 67)
will not function.

Changing a wheel

The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel
well with the rim side down. There are two
foam blocks, one under the spare wheel and
one over/inside. The upper one contains all
tools.
The same bolt runs through to secure the
spare wheel and the foam blocks.

1. Apply the parking brake and put the gear
selector in P.
2. Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the towing eyelet and the wheel cover removal
tool* stowed under the floor of the cargo
area.
3. Remove the wheel cover (where applicable) using the removal tool or remove the
wheel cover by hand.

Taking out the spare wheel

4. Block the wheels that are on the ground
with wooden blocks or large stones.

1. Open the floor hatch.
2. Undo the retaining bolt.
3. Lift out the foam block.
4. Lift out the spare wheel.
The other two blocks can remain in the spare
wheel well.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

331

08 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel

Jack attachment points
Lug wrench and towing eyelet

5. Screw the towing eyelet into the lug
wrench as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION
The towing eyelet must be screwed into
the lug wrench as far as possible.

6. With the vehicle still on the ground, use
the lug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen
the wheel nuts ½ – 1 turn by exerting
downward (counterclockwise) pressure.

7. There are two jack attachment points on
each side of the vehicle. Position the jack
correctly in the attachment (see the illustration) and crank while simultaneously
guiding the base of the jack to the
ground. The base of the jack must be flat
on a level, firm, non-slippery surface.
Before raising the vehicle, check that the
jack is still correctly positioned in the
attachment.
8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be
changed is lifted off the ground.

332

9. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and
remove the wheel.

08 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel
WARNING

•

The jack must correctly engage the
jack attachment.

•

Be sure the jack is on a firm, level,
non-slippery surface.

•

Never allow any part of your body to
be extended under a vehicle supported by a jack.

•

Use the jack intended for the vehicle
when changing a tire. For any other
job, use stands to support the vehicle.

•

Apply the parking brake and put the
gear selector in the Park (P) position.

•

Block the wheels standing on the
ground, use rigid wooden blocks or
large stones.

•

The jack should be kept well-greased
and clean, and should not be damaged.

•

No objects should be placed between
the base of jack and the ground, or
between the jack and the attachment
bar on the vehicle.

NOTE
The jack provided with your vehicle is
intended to be used only in temporary situations such as changing wheels in the
event of a flat tire. Only the jack that came
with your particular model should be used
to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be
lifted more frequently or for a prolonged
period, using a garage jack or hoist is recommended. Always follow this device’s
instructions for use.

3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten handtight. Using the lug wrench, tighten crosswise until all nuts are snug.
4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alternately tighten the bolts crosswise to
103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm).
5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable).
The opening in the wheel cover for the
tire's inflation valve must be positioned
over the valve.

Re-installing the wheel
1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel
and hub.
2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.

Tighten the wheel nuts

333

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Introduction
NOTE
USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

The tire pressure monitoring system1 uses
sensors mounted in the tire valves to check
inflation pressure levels. When the vehicle is
moving at a speed of approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit
inflation pressure data to a receiver located in
the vehicle.
When low inflation pressure is detected or if a
sensor is not functioning properly, TPMS will
)
light up the tire pressure warning light (
(also referred to as a telltale) in the instrument
panel and will display one of the following
messages in the text window: Tire pressure
low or
08

Tire needs air now.

334

Not available in all markets or in all models.

NOTE
If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure
warning light will flash for approximately
1 minute and Tire press. syst Service
required will be displayed.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle's handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires
or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

NOTE
TPMS indicates low tire pressure but does
not replace normal tire maintenance. For
information on correct tire pressure, please
refer to the tire inflation pressure table in
this chapter or consult your Volvo retailer.

Erasing warning messages
When a low tire pressure warning message
has been displayed, and the tire pressure
warning light has come on:
1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the
inflation pressure of all four tires.
2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure (consult the tire pressure placard or
the inflation pressure table on page 316.
3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to
drive the vehicle for several minutes at a
speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This
will erase the warning text and the warning light will go out.

WARNING
Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to
tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of
the vehicle.

Changing wheels with TPMS
Please note the following when changing or
replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/
tires on the vehicle:

•

Only the factory-mounted wheels are
equipped with TPMS sensors in the
valves.

•

If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary spare tire, this tire does not have a
TPMS sensor.

•

If wheels without TPMS sensors are
mounted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS
SYST SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed each time the vehicle is driven
above 25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or
more.

•

Once TPMS sensors are properly installed, the warning message should not
reappear. If the message is still displayed,
drive the vehicle for several minutes at a
speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to
erase the message.

•

Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors
be fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle. Volvo does not recommend moving
sensors back and forth between sets of
wheels.

CAUTION
When inflating tires with TPMS valves,
press the pump's mouthpiece straight
onto the valve to help avoid bending or
otherwise damaging the valve.

CAUTION

•

After pumping the tires, always reinstall the valve cap to help avoid damage to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•

Use plastic valve caps only. Metal
caps could corrode and become difficult to remove.

}}

335

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

•

NOTE

To recalibrate:

If you change to tires with a different
recommended inflation pressure, the
TPMS system must be recalibrated to
these tires. On U.S. models, this must
be done by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician. On Canadian
models, see the following section
"Recalibrating TPMS."

1. Switch off the engine.

•

If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sensor is moved to another wheel, the
sensor's seal, nut, and valve core
should be replaced.

•

When installing TPMS sensors, the
vehicle must be parked for at least
15 minutes with the ignition off. If the
vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a
TPMS error message will be displayed.

Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models
only)*
In certain cases, it may be necessary to recalibrate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recommended tire inflation pressures (see the inflation pressure table on page 316), for example, if higher inflation pressure is necessary
when transporting heavy loads, etc.
08

336

This is done in the vehicle's menu system.
See page 209 for a description of the menu
system.

2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure
and put the ignition in mode I or II (see
page 89 for additional information).
3. Press the MY CAR key in the center console control panel and select Settings
Car settings Tyre pressure
4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tyre
pressure and press OK/MENU again.
5. Drive the vehicle at a speed above
25 mph (40 km/h) continuously for at
least 10 minutes.
> When the calibration message is no
longer displayed, TPMS has been
recalibrated to the new inflation pressure.

Activating/deactivating TPMS
(Canadian models only)*
1. Switch off the engine.
2. Put the ignition in mode I or II (see page
89 for additional information).
3. Press the MY CAR key in the center console control panel and select Settings
Car settings Tyre pressure

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

4. Select Tyre pressure system and press
OK/MENU to turn the system on or off.

Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)*
Self-supporting run flat tires are available as
optional equipment. The vehicle must be
equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) if tires of this type are installed.
Tires of this type have specially reinforced
sidewalls that make it possible to continue
driving to a limited extent even though the tire
has lost some or all of its inflation pressure.
These tires are mounted on special rims (normal tires can also be mounted on these rims).
If an SST tire loses inflation pressure, the yellow TPMS symbol illuminates in the instrument panel and a text message is also displayed. If this happens, reduce speed to not
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). The tire should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Drive carefully; it may be difficult to determine
which tire is damaged. To find the damaged
tire, check the inflation pressure in all four
tires.

08 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
WARNING

•

SST tires should only be mounted by
service technicians who are familiar
with tires of this type.

•

SST tires may only be mounted on
vehicles equipped with TPMS.

•

Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h) if TPMS indicates that a tire
has lost inflation pressure.

•

Do not drive farther than 50 miles
(80 km) before replacing a damaged
SST tire.

•

Drive carefully and avoid e.g., hard
braking or fast turns.

•

SST tires must be replaced if they are
damaged. A tire of this type cannot be
repaired.

337

Volvo maintenance................................................................................
Maintaining your car.............................................................................
Hood and engine compartment............................................................
Engine oil...............................................................................................
Fluids.....................................................................................................
Replacing bulbs....................................................................................
Wiper blades and washer fluid..............................................................
Battery...................................................................................................
Fuses.....................................................................................................
Vehicle care...........................................................................................

338

340
341
344
346
348
350
356
359
363
374

MAINTENANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Volvo maintenance
Introduction
Periodic maintenance will help keep your
vehicle running well. The maintenance services contain several checks that require special instruments and tools and therefore must
be performed by a qualified technician. To
keep your Volvo in top condition, specify
time-tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts
and Accessories.

The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S.
The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle
manufacturers to furnish written instructions
to the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper
servicing and function of the components that
control emissions. These services, which are
listed in the "Warranty and Service Records
Information" booklet, are not covered by the
warranty. You will be required to pay for labor
and material used.

Maintenance
Your Volvo passed several major inspections
before it was delivered to you, in accordance
with Volvo specifications. The maintenance
procedures outlined in the Warranty and
Service Records Information booklet, many of
which will positively affect your vehicle's
emissions, should be performed as indicated.
It is recommended that receipts for vehicle
emission maintenance be retained in case
questions arise concerning maintenance.

340

Inspection and maintenance should also be
performed anytime a malfunction is observed
or suspected.

Applicable warranties – U.S./Canada
In accordance with applicable U.S. and
Canadian regulations, the following list of
warranties is provided.

•
•
•
•

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

•
•

Emission Design and Defect Warranty

Periodic maintenance helps minimize
emissions

NOTE

•

Refer to your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet for a
comprehensive service and maintenance schedule up to 150,000 miles
(240,000 km). This program contains
inspections and services necessary for
the proper function of your vehicle and
includes components that affect vehicle emissions.

•

The Warranty and Service Records
Information booklet also contains
detailed information concerning the
warranties that apply to your vehicle.

Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty
Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint
Systems Limited Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty

These are the federal warranties; other warranties are provided as required by state/
provincial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for detailed information concerning each
of the warranties.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Maintaining your car
Owner maintenance

As needed:

Periodic maintenance requirements and intervals are described in your vehicle's Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet.

Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to
reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup
of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by
salt residues.

The following points can be carried out
between the normally scheduled maintenance
services.

Each time the car is refueled:

•
•

Check the engine oil level.
Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,
headlights, and taillights.

Monthly:

•

Check cold tire pressure in all tires.
Inspect the tires for wear.

•

Check that engine coolant and other fluid
levels are between the indicated "min"
and "max" markings.

•

Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass
cleaner and soft paper towels.

•

Wipe driver information displays with a
soft cloth.

•

Visually inspect battery terminals for corrosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose
terminal connector, or a battery near the
end of its useful service life. Consult your
Volvo retailer for additional information.

Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents
at the base of the windshield, and from other
places where they may collect.

NOTE
Complete service information for qualified
technicians is available online for purchase
or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.

}}

341

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Maintaining your car
Hoisting the vehicle

If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, it
should be placed:
Front: under either of the two reinforced
areas under the front section of the vehicle,
not under to jack attachment points (the
outermost points shown in the illustration).
Rear: Under the jack attachment points.
Ensure that the jack is positioned so that the
vehicle cannot slide off it. Always use axle
stands or similar structures.

342

Emission inspection readiness
What is an Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II)?
OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized
engine management system. It stores diagnostic information about your vehicle's emission controls. It can light the Check Engine
light (MIL) if it detects an emission control
"fault." A "fault" is a component or system
that is not performing within an expected
range. A fault may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will store a message about any
fault.

How do states use OBD II for emission
inspections?
Many states connect a computer directly to a
vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can
then read "faults." In some states, this type of
inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission
test.

How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission
inspection?
Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspection for any of the following reasons.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Maintaining your car
•

If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your
vehicle may fail inspection.

•

If your vehicle's Check Engine light was
lit, but went out without any action on
your part, OBD II will still have a recorded
fault. Your vehicle may pass or fail,
depending on the inspection practices in
your area.

•

If you had recent service that required
disconnecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic information may be incomplete
and "not ready" for inspection. A vehicle
that is not ready may fail inspection.

How can I prepare for my next OBD II
emission inspection?

•

If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or
was lit but went out without service, have
your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,
serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.

•

If you recently had service for a lit Check
Engine light, or if you had service that
required disconnecting the battery, a
period of driving is necessary to bring the
OBD II system to "ready" for inspection.
Two half-hour trips of mixed stop-andgo/highway driving are typically needed
to allow OBD II to reach readiness. Your
Volvo retailer can provide you with more
information on planning a trip.

•

Maintain your vehicle in accordance with
your vehicle's maintenance schedule.

343

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Hood and engine compartment
Opening and closing the hood

Engine compartment, overview

G010951

Engine compartment - 4-cylinder engines only

Pull the lever located under the left side
of the dash to release the hood lock.
Lift the hood slightly. Press the release
control (located under the right front edge
of the hood) to the left, and lift the hood.

WARNING
Check that the hood locks properly when
closed.

344

Coolant expansion tank

Filler cap-engine oil

Power steering fluid reservoir

Coolant expansion tank

Dipstick-engine oil

Power steering fluid reservoir

Filler cap-engine oil

Radiator

Cover over brake fluid reservoir

Brake fluid reservoir

Battery

Relay/fuse box

Washer fluid reservoir

Washer fluid reservoir
Air cleaner
The appearance of the engine compartment
may vary depending on engine model.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Hood and engine compartment

WARNING
The cooling fan (located at the front of the
engine compartment, behind the radiator)
may start or continue to operate (for up to
6 minutes) after the engine has been
switched off.

WARNING
Before performing any operations in the
engine compartment, the ignition should
always be completely switched off (in
mode 0, see page 89) and there should be
no remote keys in the passenger compartment. The gear selector should be in the P
(park) position. If the engine has been running, wait until it has cooled before touching any components in the engine compartment.
The distributor ignition system operates at
very high voltages. Special safety precautions must be followed to prevent injury.
Always turn the ignition off when:

•

Replacing distributor ignition components e.g. plugs, coil, etc.

•

Do not touch any part of the distributor
ignition system while the engine is running. This may result in unintended
movements and body injury.

345

09 Maintenance and specifications
Engine oil

Checking the engine oil

Checking and adding oil

NOTE

The oil level should be checked at regular
intervals, particularly during the period up to
the first scheduled maintenance service.

•
•

Before checking the oil:

See page 388 for oil specifications.
Also, refer to the Warranty and Service
Records information booklet for information on oil change intervals and oil specifications.

346

Not checking the oil level regularly can
result in serious engine damage if the
oil level becomes too low.

•

Oil that is lower than the specified
quality can damage the engine.

•

Volvo does not recommend the use of
oil additives.

•

Always add oil of the same type and
viscosity as already used.

•

Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This
could cause an increase in oil consumption.

•

Oil changes should be carried out by a
trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.

•

If the engine is warm, wait for at least
10 – 15 minutes after the engine has
been switched off.

Location of the filler cap and dipstick

G021737

•

The car should be parked on a level
surface.

G021734

CAUTION

•

The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks on the dipstick

Checking the oil
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a
lint-free rag.
2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and
check the oil level. The level must be
between the MIN and MAX marks.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Engine oil

3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to
the MIN mark, add approximately
0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil.
4. Recheck the level and add more oil if
necessary until the level is near the MAX
mark.

WARNING
Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into
contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

347

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Fluids
Coolant

Location of the coolant reservoir

CAUTION

•

If necessary, top up the cooling system with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze only (a 50/50 mix of water and
antifreeze).

•

Different types of antifreeze/coolant
may not be mixed.

•

If the cooling system is drained, it
should be flushed with clean water or
premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled
with the correct mixture of water/antifreeze.

•

The cooling system must always be
kept filled to the correct level, and the
level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there
can be high local temperatures in the
engine which could result in damage.
Check coolant regularly!

•

Do not top up with water only. This
reduces the rust-protective and antifreeze qualities of the coolant and has
a lower boiling point. It can also cause
damage to the cooling system if it
should freeze.

Normally, the coolant does not need to be
changed. If the system must be drained, consult a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
See page 389 for information on cooling system capacities.

•

348

Do not use chlorinated tap water in the
vehicle's cooling system.

WARNING

•

Never remove the expansion tank cap
while the engine is warm. Wait until the
engine cools.

•

If it is necessary to top off the coolant
when the engine is warm, unscrew the
expansion tank cap slowly so that the
overpressure dissipates.

Brake fluid

Location of the brake fluid reservoir

Checking the level
The fluid reservoir is concealed under the
round cover at the rear of the engine compartment. The round cover must be removed
first before the reservoir cap can be
accessed.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Fluids
The brake fluid should always be between the
MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the reservoir. Check, without removing the cap, that
there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir.
Fluid type: DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F
(>280 °C).
Replace: The fluid should be replaced
according to the intervals specified in the
Warranty and Service Records Information
booklet.

Filling
1. Turn and open the cover.
2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the
fluid. The level must be between the MIN
and MAX marks.

Power steering fluid

WARNING
If a problem should occur in the power
steering system or if the vehicle has no
electrical current and must be towed, it is
still possible to steer the vehicle. However,
keep in mind that greater effort will be
required to turn the steering wheel.

CAUTION
Keep the area around the power steering
fluid reservoir clean when checking.

When driving under extremely hard conditions (mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to replace the fluid more often. Consult a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
Always entrust brake fluid changing to a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING

•

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark
in the reservoir or if a brake-related
message is shown in the information
display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician and have the brake
system inspected.

•

Dot 4 should never be mixed with any
other type of brake fluid.

Check the level frequently. The fluid does not
require changing. The fluid level must be
between the MIN and MAX marks. For
capacities and recommended fluid grade, see
page 389.

349

09 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs

Introduction
All bulb specifications are listed on page 355.
The following bulbs should only be replaced
by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

NOTE

•

For information regarding any bulbs
not mentioned in this section, please
contact your Volvo retailer or a trained
and authorized Volvo service technician.

•

Always switch off the ignition before
starting to replace a bulb.

•

If an error message remains in the display after a faulty bulb has been
replaced, contact an authorized Volvo
workshop.

Active Bending Lights
Daytime running lights
Turn signals in the door mirrors
Approach lighting in the door mirrors
Interior lighting
Glove compartment lighting
Brake lights

•

Rear parking lights
Rear side marker lights
Back-up lights
Rear fog light
LED bulbs

•

350

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CAUTION
Never touch the glass of bulbs with your
fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers
vaporize in the heat and will leave a
deposit on the reflector, which will damage
it.

WARNING

•

The engine should not be running
when changing bulbs.

•

If the engine has been running just
prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight housing, please keep in mind that
components in the engine compartment will be hot.

Condensation may form temporarily on
the inside of the lenses of exterior
lights such as headlights, fog lights, or
taillights. This is normal and the lights
are designed to withstand moisture.
Normally, condensation will dissipate
after the lights have been on for a
short time.

•

The optional Active Bending Light
bulbs contain trace amounts of mercury. These bulbs should always be
disposed of by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.

Active Bending Lights* – due to the
high voltage used by these headlights,
these bulbs should only be replaced
by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

•

Turn off the lights and remove the
remote key from the ignition before
changing any bulbs.

WARNING

09 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
Headlight housing

CAUTION

The entire headlight housing must be lifted
out when replacing all front bulbs.

When disconnecting the connector, pull on
the connector itself and not on the wiring.

Removing the headlight housing

Removing the cover to access the
bulbs

Unplug the wiring connector by holding
down the clip with your thumb.
Pull the connector out with the other
hand.

G021745

5. Lift out the headlight housing and place it
on a soft surface to avoid scratching the
lens.
6. Replace the defective bulb(s).

Reinserting the headlight housing

Pull out the headlight housing's locking
pins.

1. Plug in the connector until it clicks into
place.

Pull the headlight housing straight out.

G010325

2. Reinstall the headlight housing and locking pins. Check that they are correctly
inserted.
The headlight housing must be properly
in place and the wiring connector correctly reconnected before the lighting is
switched on or the remote key is inserted
into the ignition slot.

NOTE
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 350.

1. Open the retaining clamp by pressing it
upward/outward.
2. Press down the clips on the cover and
remove it.
Reinstall the cover in the reverse order.

3. Check that the lights function properly.

}}

351

09 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
High beam, Halogen

1. Remove the headlight housing from the
vehicle (see page 350).

2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see
page 351).

3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

3. Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out.

3. Remove the bulb by pressing the holder
downward.

4. Remove the connector from the bulb.

5. Press the new bulb into the socket until it
snaps into place. It can only be secured
in one position.

5. Press the new bulb into the socket and
turn it clockwise to put it in place. It can
only be secured in one position.

5. Insert a new bulb in the connector until it
snaps in place. It can only be inserted in
one way.

6. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing.

6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight
housing.

6. Return the bulb holder into position in the
headlight housing.

7. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing.

4. Remove the bulb by pressing the holder
downward.

352

Extra high beam1

G021748

G021746

Low beam, Halogen

G021747

Models with optional Active Bending Lights only.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
Location of taillight bulbs

G021750

Turn signals

G021751

Front side marker lights

1. Remove the headlight housing from the
vehicle.

1. Remove the headlight housing from the
vehicle (see page 350).

2. Remove the small round cover over the
bulbs.

2. Remove the round cover by pulling the
tab until the cover comes off.

3. Pull the wire to withdraw the bulb holder.

3. Pull out the holder to access the bulb.

4. Pull out the burned out bulb and press a
new bulb into the socket. It can only be
secured in one position.

5. Press the bulb holder into the socket and
press until it clicks into place.

6. Press the cover in place until it clicks into
position.

Taillight lens, right side

Parking light (LEDs)
Brake light (LEDs)
Turn signal
Side maker light (LEDs)
Backup light
Rear fog light
Brake light (LEDs)

7. Reinstall the headlight housing.

}}

353

09 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
License plate lighting

The turn signal bulb in the taillight cluster is
replaced from inside the cargo area.
1. Open the panel.
2. Remove the insulation by pulling it
straight out.
3. Remove the entire bulb unit by turning its
handle counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
Replace the bulb in the reverse order.

354

Cargo area lighting

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housing
and pull it out.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Reinsert the entire bulb housing and
tighten the screws.

G031942

G017456

Taillight housing, turn signal

G017458

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so
that the bulb housing comes loose.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
it back into the bulb housing.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Replacing bulbs
Vanity mirror lighting
Removing the mirror glass

Bulb specifications
Wattage

Bulb

Lighting function

Wattage

Bulb

Lighting function

H7 LL

Glove compartment lighting

Extra high beam
(models with
Active Bending
Lights*)

SV8.5
(length
43mm)

Cargo area lighting

Low beam (halogen)

H11 LL

SV8.5
(length
43mm)

High beam (halogen)

Rear turn signals

PY21W SV

1. Insert a flat screwdriver under the glass
and carefully exert upward pressure to
release the retaining lugs.

Front turn signals

H21W LL

2. Snap out the lens.

License plate
lighting

C5W LL

Vanity mirror

W2x4.6d
type T5

Front side
marker lights

W5W LL

3. Use needle nose pliers to pull the bulb
straight to the side. Replace the bulb. Do
not exert too much pressure on the bulb
with the pliers to help avoid damaging it.

Reinstalling the mirror glass
1. Put the lens back into position.

NOTE
Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts
department for the most up-to-date bulb
specifications.

2. Press it into place.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

355

09 Maintenance and specifications
Wiper blades and washer fluid

Wiper blades
Service position

1. Insert the remote key into the ignition
slot1 and press the START/STOP
ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition
in mode I (see page 89 for detailed information about the ignition modes).

Replacing the windshield wiper blades

2. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button
again briefly to switch the ignition off.

Wiper blades in service position

The wiper blades must be in the vertical
(service) position for replacement, washing or
to lift them away from the windshield when
e.g., removing ice or snow. To put them in
this position:

CAUTION
Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in
position before attempting to move them
to the service position.

356

Not necessary on vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

The wipers can be returned to the normal
position by pressing the START/STOP
ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in
mode I (or by starting the engine).

CAUTION
If the wiper arms have been folded out
from the windshield while in the service
position, fold them back against the windshield before returning the wipers to the
normal position to help avoid scratching
the paint on the hood.

G021763

3. Within 3 seconds, move the right steering
wheel lever up and hold it for at least
1 second.
> The wipers will then move to the vertical (service) position on the windshield.

NOTE
The windshield wiper blades are different
lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is
longer than the one on the passenger side.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Wiper blades and washer fluid
4. Press the wipers back against the windshield.

2. Grasp the inner section of wiper blade (at
the arrow).

To return the wipers from the service position
to the normal position, fold the wipers back
against the windshield and press the START/
STOP ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in mode I (or start the engine).

3. Pull out the blade to release it from the
wiper arm.

Cleaning
Keeping the windshield and wiper blades
clean helps improve visibility and prolongs
the service life of the wiper blades. Clean the
wiper blades with a stiff-bristle brush and
lukewarm soap solution or car washing detergent.

4. Press the new wiper blade into place and
check that it seats securely.
5. Fold the wiper arm back toward the tailgate window.

Filling washer fluid

Replacing the tailgate wiper blade

G021764

With the wipers in the service position,
fold out the wiper arm from the windshield. Press the button on the wiper
blade attachment and pull the wiper
blade straight out, parallel with the wiper
arm.

Location of the washer fluid reservoir
G032770

Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks
into place.
Check that the blade is securely in place.
1. Fold the wiper arm outward.

The windshield and headlight washers share
a common reservoir.
The washer fluid reservoir is located on the
driver's side of the engine compartment. During cold weather, the reservoir should be
}}

357

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Wiper blades and washer fluid
filled with windshield washer solvent containing antifreeze. For capacities, see page 389.

358

09 Maintenance and specifications
Battery
Warning symbols on the battery

may also further decrease the battery’s
starting capacity.

Risk of explosion

Wear protective goggles.

•

Because the battery’s starting capacity
decreases with time, it may be necessary
to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven
for an extended period of time or if the
vehicle is usually only driven short distances.

•

Never use a quick charger to charge the
battery. Only traditional types of battery
chargers should be used.

Recycle properly
Keep away from children.

Avoid smoking, open
flames, and/or sparks.

See the owner's manual.

Handling
Contains corrosive acid.

CAUTION

NOTE
A used battery should be disposed of in an
environmentally responsible manner. Consult your Volvo retailer or take the battery
to a recycling station.

•

Check that the battery cables are correctly connected and tightened.

•

Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running (for example, when
replacing the battery).

•

If the battery is fully discharged a number
of times, this may shorten its service life.

•

The service life of a battery is affected by
factors such as the number of starts, driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold

The infotainment system's energy-saving
feature may not function correctly or at all,
and/or a message may be displayed if a
battery charger or jumper cables are not
connected properly.

•

The negative terminal on the battery
must never be used to connect a
jumper cable or a battery charger.
Only the ground point on the chassis
may be used.
See page 125 for an illustration and additional information.

}}

359

09 Maintenance and specifications
Battery

WARNING

•

Never expose the battery to open
flame or electric spark.

•
•

Do not smoke near the battery.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,
skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If
contact occurs, flush the affected area
immediately with water. Obtain medical help immediately if eyes are affected.

NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.

•

The battery should be disconnected from
the vehicle when a battery charger is
used directly on the battery.

•

To help keep the battery in good condition, the vehicle should be driven for at
least 15 minutes a week or connected to
a charger with an automatic charging
function.

•

If the battery is fully discharged a number
of times, this may shorten its service life.
Keeping the battery fully charged helps
prolong its service life.

•

The service life of a battery is affected by
factors such as driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold may also further
decrease the battery’s starting capacity.

•

Maintenance

360

•

Use a screw driver to open the caps or
cover and a flashlight to inspect the level.

•

If necessary, add distilled water. The level
should never be above the indicator.

•

The fluid level should be checked if the
battery has been recharged.

•

After inspection, be sure the cap over
each battery cell or the cover is securely
in place.

•

Check that the battery cables are correctly connected and properly tightened.

Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running, or when the key is in
the ignition. This could damage the vehicle's electrical system.

CAUTION

•

Always use distilled or deionized water
(battery water).

•

Never fill above the level mark in the
cell.

Replacing

09 Maintenance and specifications
Battery
WARNING
Connect and disconnect the positive and
negative cables in the correct sequence.

Removal
Switch off the ignition, remove the remote key
from the ignition slot and wait at least
5 minutes before disconnecting the battery so
that all information in the vehicle's electrical
system can be stored in the control modules.

WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

Installation
1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

Open the clips on the front cover and
remove the cover.
Release the rubber molding so that the
rear cover is free.
Remove the rear cover by pulling it away.
Detach the black negative cable.
Detach the red positive cable
Detach the ventilation hose from the
battery
Loosen the screw holding the battery
clamp.
Move the battery to the side and lift it up.

2. Move the battery inward and to the side
until it reaches the rear edge of the box.
3. Tighten the clamp that secures the battery.
4. Connect the ventilation hose.
> Be sure that it is correctly connected
to the battery and the vent in the vehicle's body.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
}}

361

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Battery
6. Connect the black negative cable.
7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).
8. Reinstall the molding. (See Removal).
9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with
the clips. (See Removal).

362

09 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Replacing fuses

Location of the fuseboxes

There are relay/fuseboxes located in the
engine compartment, the passenger compartment and the cargo area.
If an electrical component fails to function,
this may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest
way to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it.
To do so:
1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult to remove, a special fuse removal
tool is located on the inside of the
engine compartment fusebox cover.
2. From the side, examine the curved metal
wire in the fuse to see if it is intact.

Engine compartment
Under the glove compartment

If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the
same color and amperage (written on the
fuse).

Under the glove compartment

If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical system inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Engine compartment cold zone (Start/
Stop only)

Cargo area

WARNING
Never use metal objects or fuses with
higher amperage than those stated on the
following pages. Doing so could seriously
damage or overload the vehicle's electrical
system.

}}

363

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Fuses
Engine compartment

364

09 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Engine compartment, upper
Engine compartment, front
Engine compartment, lower

Positions
These fuses are all located in the engine compartment box. Fuses in C are located under
A.
A decal on the inside of the cover shows the
positions of the fuses.

•

Fuses 1 – 15, 34 and 42 – 44 are relays/
circuit breakers and should only be
removed or replaced by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
Fuses 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 may be
changed at any time when necessary.

There is a special fuse removal tool on the
underside of the cover.

Pos

Function

Circuit breaker: central
electrical module
under the glove compartmentA

Circuit breaker: central
electrical module
under the glove compartment

Circuit breaker: central
electrical module in the
cargo compartmentA

Circuit breaker: central
electrical module
under the glove compartmentA

Function

Windshield wipers

–

–
–
Headed windshield*,
driver's side

Pos

Climate system
blowerA

Headed windshield*,
passenger's side

ABS pump

ABS valves

Headlight washers

Active Bending Lightsheadlight leveling*

Central electrical module (under the glove
compartment)

ABS

Adjustable steering
force*

Engine Control Module
(ECM), transmission,
SRS

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

365

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Fuses
Pos

Function

Heated washer nozzles*

Pos

Function

Relay-coils A/C, relay
coils in engine compartment cold zone for
Start/Stop

Starter motor relayA

Engine control module
(4-cyl. engines)

Lighting panel
-

Ignition coils (5-/6-cyl.
engines), condenser
(6-cyl. engines)

366

Relay coils

Auxiliary lights*

Horn

Relay coils, Engine
Control Module (ECM)

Control module - automatic transmission

A/C compressor (not
4-cyl. engines)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Engine Control Module
(4-cyl. engines)

Engine Control Module
(5-cyl. & 6-cyl. engines)

4-cyl. engines: mass
air meter, thermostat,
EVAP valve

5-/6-cyl. engines:
Injection system, mass
air meter (6-cyl.
engines only), engine
control module

Pos

Function

A/C compressor (5-/6cyl. engines), engine
valves, engine control
module (6-cyl.
engines), solenoids (6cyl. non-turbo only),
mass air meter (6-cyl.
only)

Engine valves/oil
pump/center heated
oxygen sensor (4-cyl.
engines)

Front/rear heated oxygen sensors (4-cyl.
engines), EVAP valve
(5-/6-cyl. engines),
heated oxygen sensors
(5-/6-cyl. engines)

Oil pump (automatic
transmission)/crankcase ventilation heater
(5-cyl. engines)

Ignition coils

09 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Pos

Function

Fuel leakage detection
(5-/6-cyl. engines),
control module for
radiator shutter (5-cyl.
engines)

Fuel leakage detection,
A/C relay (4-cyl.
engines)

Coolant pump (4-cyl.
engines)

Cooling fan

60 (4/5cyl.
engines)

80 (6-cyl.
engines)
Power steering
A

100

This position is not used on vehicles with the optional
Start/Stop function, refer to the table "Engine compartment cold zone" on page 372

}}

367

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Fuses
Under the glove compartment

Fusebox A: General fuses

Positions: fusebox A

Function

A
40

1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up.

Circuit breaker for the infotainment system and for fuses
16-20

2. The fuses are accessible.

Fusebox B: Control module fuses

Pos

Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuseboxes.

Heated steering wheel*
-

368

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Pos

Function

12-volt socket (cargo area)

Controls in driver's door

Controls in front passenger's
door

Controls in right rear passenger's door

Controls in left rear passenger's door

09 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Pos

Function

Keyless drive*

Power driver's seat*

Power front passenger's seat*

Pos

Function

Heated rear seat* (driver's
side)

Heated front passenger's
seat*

Infotainment system control
module

Heated driver's seat*

15
5

Infotainment system: amplifier, SiriusXM™ satellite radio*

Park assist*, trailer hitch control module*, park assist camera*

Infotainment system

Bluetooth hands-free system

All Wheel Drive* control module
Active chassis system*

Rear Seat Entertainment system (RSE)*

7.5

Power moonroof*

Courtesy lighting, climate system sensor
12-volt sockets in tunnel console

Heated rear seat* (passenger's side)

Positions: fusebox B

Pos

Function

Tailgate wiper

Function

Instrument panel

Adaptive cruise control/collision warning*

Courtesy lighting, rain sensor*

7.5

Steering wheel module

7.5

Cental locking: fuel filler door

Tailgate window washer

Windshield washers

Tailgate unlock

Electrical folding rear seat
outboard head restraints*

Fuel pump

Climate system control panel

Front courtesy lighting, driver's door power window controls, power seat(s)*, HomeLInk® Wireless Control System*

Pos

7.5

Alarm, On-board diagnostic
system

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

369

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Fuses
Pos

Function

Airbag system, occupant
weight sensor

Collision warning system*

Accelerator pedal sensor,
auto-dim mirror function,
heated rear seats*

7.5

370

Brake lights

Power moonroof*

Immobilizer

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses

Cargo area

Located behind the upholstery on the left side of the cargo area

Positions

Pos

Function

Electric parking brake (left
side)

Electric parking brake (right
side)

Heated rear window

Trailer socket 2*

Power tailgate*

Pos

Function

Pos

Function

Trailer socket 1*

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

371

09 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses

Engine compartment cold zone (Start/Stop only)1

Location of Start/Stop fuses

Positions

•

Fuses A1, A2 and 1–11 are relays/circuit
breakers and should only be removed or
replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.

•

Fuse 12 may be changed at any time
when necessary.

See page 137 for more information about the
Start/Stop function.

Pos

Function

372

Option on 4-cyl. engines

Pos

Function

Circuit breaker: central electrical module in the engine
compartment

175

Circuit breaker: fusebox B
under the glove compartment
(see page 368)

Circuit breaker: fuseboxes
under the glove compartment, central electrical module in the cargo area

175

Circuit breaker: fusebox A
under the glove compartment
(see page 368)

09 Maintenance and specifications
Fuses
Pos

Function

Circuit breaker: fusebox A
under the glove compartment
(see page 368)

Circuit breaker: central electrical module in the cargo
area

Climate system blower

–

Starter motor relay

Internal diode

Auxiliary battery

Central electrical module:
auxiliary battery reference
voltage, auxiliary battery
charging point

373

09 Maintenance and specifications
Vehicle care

Washing the car
The following points should be kept in mind
when washing and cleaning the car:

•

374

The car should be washed at regular
intervals since dirt, dust, insects and tar
spots adhere to the paint and may cause
damage. To help prevent corrosion, it is
particularly important to wash the car frequently in the wintertime.
Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight.
Doing so may cause detergents and wax
to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid
scratching, use lukewarm water to soften
the dirt before you wash with a soft
sponge, and plenty of sudsy water.

considerably and also helps prolong the
service life of the wiper blades.

•

Wash off the dirt from the underside
(wheel housings, fenders, etc).

•

In areas of high industrial fallout, more
frequent washing is recommended.

NOTE
When washing the car, remember to
remove dirt from the drain holes in the
doors and sills.

Exterior components
Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning products, available at your Volvo retailer,
for cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental components such as chromed strips
on the exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for using these products should be followed carefully. Solvents or stain removers
should not be used.

CAUTION

•

During high pressure washing, the
spray mouthpiece must never be
closer to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm).
Do not spray into the locks.

•

Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork
as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish
may be permanently damaged.

•

A detergent can be used to facilitate the
softening of dirt and oil.

•

Dry the car with a clean chamois and
remember to clean the drain holes in the
doors and rocker panels.

•

Tar spots can be removed with tar
remover after the car has been washed.

•

Always close the moonroof and sun
shade before washing your vehicle.

•

A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy
water can be used to clean the wiper
blades. Frequent cleaning of the windshield and wiper blades improves visibility

•

Never use abrasive cleaning agents on
the moonroof.

•

Never use wax on the rubber seals
around the moonroof.

•

Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can
reduce lighting capacity considerably.
Clean the headlights regularly, for
example when refueling.
Special moonroof cautions:

•

Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or
rubber components

•

Polishing chromed strips can wear
away or damage the surface

•

Polishes containing abrasive substances should not be used

Automatic car wash

•

We do NOT recommend washing your
car in an automatic wash during the first
few months (because the paint will not
have hardened sufficiently).

•

An automatic wash is a simple and quick
way to clean your car, but it is worth
remembering that it may not be as thorough as when you yourself go over the
car with sponge and water. Keeping the
underbody clean is most important, especially in the winter. Some automatic

09 Maintenance and specifications
Vehicle care
washers do not have facilities for washing
the underbody.

CAUTION

•

Before driving into an automatic car
wash, turn off the optional rain sensor
to avoid damaging the windshield wipers.
Make sure that side view mirrors, auxiliary lamps, etc, are secure, and that
any antenna(s) are retracted or
removed. Otherwise there is risk of the
machine dislodging them.
Chromed wheels: Clean chromeplated wheels using the same detergents used for the body of the vehicle.
Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can
permanently stain chrome-plated
wheels.

bodywork against oxidation, road dirt and
fading.

WARNING

•

When the vehicle is driven immediately
after being washed, apply the brakes,
including the parking brake, several
times in order to remove any moisture
from the brake linings.

•

Engine cleaning agents should not be
used when the engine is warm. This
constitutes a fire risk.

NOTE

Polishing and waxing

•

Normally, polishing is not required during
the first year after delivery, however, waxing may be beneficial.

•

Before applying polish or wax the vehicle
must be washed and dried. Tar spots can
be removed with kerosene or tar remover.
Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing
compound.

•
•

After polishing use liquid or paste wax.

•

Waxing alone does not substitute for polishing a dull surface.

•

A wide range of polymer-based waxes
can be purchased today. These waxes
are easy to use and produce a long-lasting, high-gloss finish that protects the

Several commercially available products
contain both polish and wax.

•

Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct
sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should
not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).

CAUTION
Volvo does not recommend the use of
long-life or durable paint protection coatings, some of which may claim to prevent
pitting, fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have not been tested by Volvo for
compatibility with your vehicle's clear coat.
Some of them may cause the clear coat to
soften, crack, or cloud. Damage caused by
application of paint protection coatings
may not be covered under your vehicle's
paint warranty.

Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
and follow the instructions included with the
car care product.

Upholstery care
Fabric
Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For
more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,
shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/
}}

375

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

Vehicle care
fabric stain remover. Consult your Volvo
retailer.

AlcanteraTM suede-like material

1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge
and squeeze it until the cleaner foams.

Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a
soft cloth and mild soap solution.

2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the
sponge with circular movements.

Leather care

3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the
sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain,
do not rub.

Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured
with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,
sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the
protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and
fading can result.
Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy
leather care kit formulated to clean and beautify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the
protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner
removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream
protectant restores a barrier against soil and
sunlight.
Volvo also offers a special leather softener
that should be applied after the cleaner and
protectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth,
and reduces friction between leather and
other finishes in the vehicle.
Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and
conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four
times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about
Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Softener 943 7429.

376

Cleaning leather upholstery

CAUTION

4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a
towel, and allow the leather to dry completely.

Protecting leather upholstery
1. Put a small amount of protectant cream
on a cloth and apply a thin coating of
cream to the upholstery with light circular
movements.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.
This will help the leather resist staining and
protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.

•

Under no circumstances should gasoline, naphtha or similar cleaning agents
be used on the plastic or the leather
since these can cause damage.

•

Take extra care when removing stains
such as ink or lipstick since the coloring can spread.

•

Use solvents sparingly. Too much solvent can damage the seat padding.

•

Start from the outside of the stain and
work toward the center.

•

Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a
pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing
may damage the textile upholstery.

•

Clothing that is not colorfast, such as
new jeans or suede garments, may
stain the upholstery.

Cleaning a leather-covered steering
wheel

•

Remove soil, dust, etc., with a damp
sponge and a neutral soap solution.

•

Leather should be allowed to breath.
Never cover the steering wheel with a
plastic protector.

•

Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting
and conditioning the steering wheel with
Volvo's Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and
Leather Softener 943 7429.

09 Maintenance and specifications
Vehicle care
If there are stains on the steering wheel:
Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or
blood)
–

Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the
wheel with a solution with 5% ammonia.
For blood stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl)
of water and one ounce (25g) of salt and
wipe the stain.

Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate)
1. Same procedure as for type I stains.
2. Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorbent paper or a towel.
Type 3 (dry soil or dust)
1. Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush.
2. Same procedure as for type I stains.

CAUTION
Sharp objects, such as rings, could damage the leather on the steering wheel.

ing. Spots on textile mats can be removed
with a mild detergent. For best protection in
winter, Volvo recommends the use of Volvo
rubber floor mats. Consult your Volvo retailer.

Color code

Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood
surfaces
Cleaning interior plastic components should
be done with a cleaning agent specially
designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo
retailer.

Touching up paintwork
Paint damage requires immediate attention to
avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish regularly, for instance washing the vehicle.
Touch-up if necessary.

Sample color code: US models

Paint repairs require special equipment and
skill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any
extensive damage.
Minor scratches can be repaired by using
Volvo touch-up paint.

Cleaning the seat belts
Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild
soap solution.

Cleaning floor mats
The floor mats should be vacuumed or
brushed clean regularly, especially during
winter when they should be taken out for dry-

Sample color code: Canadian models

Make sure you have the right color. See page
382 for the location of this label (label number
4 in the illustration).
}}

377

09 Maintenance and specifications
Vehicle care

Minor stone chips and scratches

Repairing stone chips

Material:

•
•
•
•

Primer – can
Paint – touch-up pen
Brush
Masking tape

G021832

If the stone chip has not gone down to the
bare metal and an undamaged color coat
remains, you can add paint immediately after
removing dirt.

NOTE
When touching up the vehicle, it should be
clean and dry. The surface temperature
should be above 60 °F (15 °C).

1. Place a strip of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that
any loose flakes of paint adhere to it.
2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it
with a small brush.
3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint
can be applied using a brush. Mix the
paint thoroughly; apply several thin paint
coats and let dry after each application.
4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want
to protect surrounding paint by masking it
off
5. After a few days, polish the touched-up
areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount
of polish.

378

09 Maintenance and specifications
09

379

Label information..................................................................................
Specifications........................................................................................
Overview of information and warning symbols.....................................
Volvo programs.....................................................................................

380

382
384
391
394

SPECIFICATIONS

10 Specifications
Label information
Location of labels
10

382

10 Specifications
Label information
List of labels
Vehicle Emission Control Information.
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable emission standards, as evidenced
by the certification label on the underside
of the hood. For further information regarding these regulations, please consult
your Volvo retailer.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The VIN plate is located on the top left
surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) should always
be quoted in all correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when
ordering parts.

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) specifications (USA) and
Ministry of Transport (CMVSS) standards (Canada). Your Volvo is designed to
meet all applicable safety standards, as
evidenced by the certification label on the
driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear
of the driver's door opening). This label
also includes codes for paint color, etc.
For further information regarding these
regulations, please consult your Volvo
retailer. U.S. models have the upper
decal; Canadian models have the lower
one.

Tire inflation pressures. This label indicates the correct inflation pressures for
the tires that were on the vehicle when it
left the factory.

383

10 Specifications
Specifications
Dimensions
10

384

Position

Dimension

in (mm)

Wheelbase

110.8 (2815)

Length

190.5 (4838)

Load length, floor, seatback down

73.9 (1878)

Load length, floor

42.9 (1089)

Height

63.1 (1604)

Load height

28.5 (724)

10 Specifications
Specifications
Position

Dimension

in (mm)

Track, front

63.5 (1614)A

63.1 (1604)B
H

Track, rear

62.2 (1580)A
61.8 (1570)B

Load width, floor

45.4 (1153)

Width

73.6 (1870)
73.9 (1876)C

A
B
C

Width incl. door mirrors (folded out)

83.4 (2119)

Width incl. door mirrors (folded in)

75.8 (1925)

16" 50 wheels
17/18" 55 wheels
Models with the optional keyless drive

Weights
Category

USA

Canada

Gross vehicle weight

4-cyl. FWDA turbo: 5100 lbs

4-cyl. FWDA turbo: 2310 kg

6-cyl. non-turbo AWDB: 5270 lbs

6-cyl. non-turbo AWDB: 2390 kg

6-cyl. turbo AWD: 5310 lbs

6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2410 kg

All models: 900 lbs

All models: 410 kg

Capacity weight

}}

385

10 Specifications
Specifications

Volvo 2015 XC70 Owner's Manual Owners V1

Owners Manual Pdf 2015-Volvo-XC70-Owners-Manual-v1 2015 Volvo XC70 Owners Manual Pdf | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation